《显明精义复注》(第三部分)显示巴利原文
Sāratthadīpanī-ṭīkā (tatiyo bhāgo)
五、波逸提篇显示巴利原文
5. Pācittiyakaṇḍaṃ
一、妄语品显示巴利原文
1. Musāvādavaggo
一、妄语学处解释显示巴利原文
1. Musāvādasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
1 在妄语品第一学处中,提到“小者”。此处有人说:“‘小’这个词是‘多’的同义词。由于数量多,这些便被称为小者。”其中,“于彼处”是指在那九品当中,或是在那些小者当中。为了阐明以一种理由掩盖其他理由,他宣说了“色无常”等。于承认“色无常”之后,说明其理由时说了“应知故”。当被他人质问“若是如此,涅槃也会变成无常”时,为了掩盖那个理由,他又提出“由生法故”这另一个理由。显示巴利原文
1. Musāvādavaggassa paṭhamasikkhāpade khuddakānanti ettha ‘‘khuddaka-saddo bahu-saddapariyāyo . Bahubhāvato imāni khuddakāni nāma jātānī’’ti vadanti. Tatthāti tesu navasu vaggesu, tesu vā khuddakesu. Kāraṇena kāraṇantarapaṭicchādanameva vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘rūpaṃ anicca’’ntiādimāha. Rūpaṃ aniccanti paṭijānitvā tattha kāraṇaṃ vadanto ‘‘jānitabbato’’ti āha. ‘‘Yadi evaṃ nibbānassapi aniccatā āpajjatī’’ti parena vutto taṃ kāraṇaṃ paṭicchādetuṃ puna ‘‘jātidhammato’’ti aññaṃ kāraṇaṃ vadati.
本应说“sampajānaṃ musā bhāsatī”,却说“sampajāna musā bhāsatī”,这是省略鼻音的表述,故说“jānanto musā bhāsatī”。显示巴利原文
‘‘Sampajānaṃ musā bhāsatī’’ti vattabbe sampajāna musā bhāsatīti anunāsikalopena niddesoti āha ‘‘jānanto musā bhāsatī’’ti.
2 所谓“知后”与“对正知者”而说妄语,是指在事前已知,且在说出的当下也正知的情况下说妄语。此处所说的“说”,是指将不实之事说成实有,或将实有之事说成不实,以身或语作出令他人了知的努力。“sampajānamusāvāde”是处格,表因义,因此,凡是故意说妄语者,以此为相、以此为因、以此为缘,结波逸提罪。在此处及类似情形中,应作如是解。显示巴利原文
2.Jānitvā jānantassa ca musā bhaṇaneti pubbabhāgepi jānitvā vacanakkhaṇepi jānantassa musā bhaṇane. Bhaṇanañca nāma idha abhūtassa vā bhūtataṃ bhūtassa vā abhūtataṃ katvā kāyena vā vācāya vā viññāpanapayogo. Sampajānamusāvādeti ca nimittatthe bhummavacanaṃ, tasmā yo sampajāna musā vadati, tassa taṃnimittaṃ taṃhetu tappaccayā pācittiyaṃ hotīti evamettha aññesu ca īdisesu attho veditabbo.
3 “以此而说相违之语”故为“相违语”,即具有欺骗意图的心。故说:“将相违心置于前而说者。”“以此而说”故为“语”,即能发起言说的思。故说:“邪语……思。”“种种差别之语”即分为多种差别。如此,由第一句说明唯思……应知已说。以此阐明此义:唯思、唯声或唯表知,不名为妄语;与表知及声相结合、能发起它们的思,方为妄语。“以眼未执取之所缘”即依眼识而未执取之所缘。由于鼻等三根能执取现前之境,故说“如以三根作成一束”。“以眼见”是世间通行的说法,如同“以弓射”等众所周知,故说“以粗显之理”。显示巴利原文
3. Visaṃvādenti etenāti visaṃvādanaṃ, vañcanādhippāyavasappavattaṃ cittaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘visaṃvādanacittaṃ purato katvā vadantassā’’ti. Vadati etāyāti vācā, vacanasamuṭṭhāpikā cetanā. Tenāha ‘‘micchāvācā…pe… cetanā’’ti. Pabhedagatā vācāti anekabhedabhinnā. Evaṃ paṭhamapadena suddhacetanā…pe… kathitāti veditabbāti iminā imaṃ dīpeti – suddhacetanā vā suddhasaddo vā suddhaviññatti vā musāvādo nāma na hoti, viññattiyā saddena ca sahitā taṃsamuṭṭhāpikā cetanā musāvādoti. Cakkhuvasena aggahitārammaṇanti cakkhusannissitena viññāṇena aggahitamārammaṇaṃ. Ghānādīnaṃ tiṇṇaṃ indriyānaṃ sampattavisayaggāhakattā vuttaṃ ‘‘tīhi indriyehi ekābaddhaṃ viya katvā’’ti. ‘‘Dhanunā vijjhatī’’tiādīsu viya ‘‘cakkhunā diṭṭha’’nti ayaṃ vohāro loke pākaṭoti āha ‘‘oḷārikeneva nayenā’’ti.
11 “未审察”即未加以考察。“未确定”即未作出决断。“由于愚钝”即由于无知。“套上木车而去”意为套上木车后,坐在上面而去。“他将已去”是因为如此断定而说,故构成妄语。然而有人说:“因为说‘正在游戏’,如此说者犯恶说罪”,此说不应采纳。因为仅以出身等十种骂詈事,出于嬉戏心而说者,才称为恶说。有偈云:显示巴利原文
11.Avīmaṃsitvāti anupaparikkhitvā. Anupadhāretvāti avinicchinitvā. Jaḷattāti aññāṇatāya. Dārusakaṭaṃ yojetvā gatoti dārusakaṭaṃ yojetvā tattha nisīditvā gatoti adhippāyo. Gato bhavissatīti tatheva sanniṭṭhānaṃ katvā vuttattā musāvādo jāto. Keci pana ‘‘keḷiṃ kurumānoti vuttattā evaṃ vadanto dubbhāsitaṃ āpajjatī’’ti vadanti, taṃ na gahetabbaṃ . Jātiādīhiyeva hi dasahi akkosavatthūhi davakamyatāya vadantassa dubbhāsitaṃ vuttaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ –
以低劣者贬损殊胜者,或以出身等贬损低劣者;
或以直接、间接的方式,出于嬉戏而说,即犯恶说罪。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Hīnukkaṭṭhehi ukkaṭṭhaṃ, hīnaṃ vā jātiādihi; Ujuṃ vāññāpadesena, vade dubbhāsitaṃ davā’’ti.
由于内心不取较少的相,只取较多的相而说,因此说“村庄只剩一粒”等也成为妄语。“令行”意为使之接近。以欺骗心为首、以欺骗心想说某事,而向对方作出令其了知的努力,此处具此二支。为宣称上人法而说妄语者,犯波罗夷;以无根的波罗夷诽谤者,犯桑喀地谢沙;以桑喀地谢沙诽谤者,犯波逸提;以威仪败坏而诽谤者,犯恶作;以“住在你寺院者”等迂回方式宣称上人法,若对方理解而说妄语,犯偷兰遮;若对方不理解,犯恶作;单纯说妄语者,此处说犯波逸提。显示巴利原文
Cittena thokatarabhāvaṃyeva aggahetvā bahubhāvaṃyeva gahetvā vuttattā ‘‘gāmo ekatelo’’tiādināpi musāvādo jāto. Cāresunti upanesuṃ. Visaṃvādanapurekkhāratā, visaṃvādanacittena yamatthaṃ vattukāmo, tassa puggalassa viññāpanapayogo cāti imānettha dve aṅgāni . Uttarimanussadhammārocanatthaṃ musā bhaṇantassa pārājikaṃ, amūlakena pārājikena anuddhaṃsanatthaṃ saṅghādiseso, saṅghādisesena anuddhaṃsanatthaṃ pācittiyaṃ, ācāravipattiyā dukkaṭaṃ, ‘‘yo te vihāre vasatī’’tiādipariyāyena uttarimanussadhammārocanatthaṃ paṭivijānantassa musā bhaṇite thullaccayaṃ, appaṭivijānantassa dukkaṭaṃ, kevalaṃ musā bhaṇantassa idha pācittiyaṃ vuttaṃ.
二、骂詈学处解释显示巴利原文
2. Omasavādasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
12 在第二学处中,由于言语刺耳,说不可意之语,犹如刺入耳中一般,故说“omasanti即是ovijjhanti(刺入)”。“padhaṃsenti”意指压倒、征服。显示巴利原文
12. Dutiye kaṇṇakaṭukatāya amanāpaṃ vadantā kaṇṇesu vijjhantā viya hontīti āha ‘‘omasantīti ovijjhantī’’ti. Padhaṃsentīti abhibhavanti.
13 “菩萨当时存在”意为那时菩萨名为欢喜牛王。这是以现在时表示过去义,或因动词时态选用不定,而由邻近词语可知为过去。“他察觉”即了知:“这是不可意的。”“在树下给予支撑物”意为给予支撑物。将先前安立的辐所立之处,重新安在同一辐上:即先前辐端垂直向下立于地面之处,再次翻转同一辐,使其达到辐端向下的状态;或者,将先前立于地面的轮辋部分翻转后,重新立于地面。“松弛造作”即松弛的行为。显示巴利原文
13.Bodhisatto tena samayena hotīti tena samayena bodhisatto nandivisālo nāma ahosīti attho. Atītatthe vattamānavacanaṃ, kiriyākālavacanicchāya vā vattamānappayogo saddantarasannidhānena bhūtatāvagamo siyāti. Paccesīti ‘‘amanāpaṃ ida’’nti aññāsi. Heṭṭhārukkhe datvāti upatthambhake datvā. Pubbe patiṭṭhitārappadesaṃ puna are patteti pubbe ujukaṃ heṭṭhāmukhaṃ patiṭṭhitaarassa bhūmippadesaṃ puna tasmiṃyeva are parivattetvā heṭṭhāmukhabhāvena sampatte, paṭhamaṃ bhūmiyaṃ patiṭṭhitanemippadese parivattetvā puna bhūmiyaṃ patiṭṭhiteti vuttaṃ hoti. Sithilakaraṇanti sithilakiriyā.
15 “先前”指事由发生之时。“木工活”即木匠活,“石工活”即石匠活。“手印计数”即仅以屈指的方式计数。如足、趾、纹路等,以新方式计数,称为无缺计数。以“等”字摄取了依合计、产生、扣除、分割等方式而进行的总体计数。对此熟练者,即使看见一棵树,也能了知“此中有多少叶子”。“yabha methuna”一词,是将 ya 音与 bha 音相合而成,故为非法之语。显示巴利原文
15.Pubbeti aṭṭhuppattiyaṃ. Tacchakakammanti vaḍḍhakīkammaṃ. Koṭṭakakammanti vā pāsāṇakoṭṭakakammaṃ . Hatthamuddāgaṇanāti aṅgulisaṅkoceneva gaṇanā. Pādasikamilakkhakādayo viya navantavasena gaṇanā acchiddakagaṇanā. Ādi-saddena saṅkalanapaṭuppādanavoklanabhāgahārādivasena pavattā piṇḍagaṇanā gahitā. Yassa sā paguṇā hoti, so rukkhampi disvā ‘‘ettakāni ettha paṇṇānī’’ti jānāti. Yabha methuneti vacanato ya-kāra bha-kāre ekato yojite asaddhammavacanaṃ hoti.
16-26 第16至26条。“应令其行忏悔”意为:应以波逸提罪处罚,因为律典中已收录的“极恶贱民”等词,仅是附带贪欲等而为特别粗恶之词。而“你是盗贼”等词,由于在律典中未以任何方式出现,故说为恶作罪。“以戏弄为意图”是对前一词的意义解释。诸师长说:即使律典中未说,但“对于以出身等骂詈事由而背后骂詈者,由于事由无别,故如恶作罪;同样,以戏弄欲而背地说者,亦为恶语罪”。此处“一切有情”,也应包括能了知语义、有觉知本性的畜生。显示巴利原文
16-26.Āpattiyākāretabboti pācittiyena kāretabbo upasaggādimattavisiṭṭhānaṃ aticaṇḍālādipadānaṃ pāḷiyaṃ āgatesuyeva saṅgahitattā. Corosītiādīnaṃ pana kenaci pariyāyena pāḷiyaṃ anāgatattā dukkaṭaṃ vuttaṃ. Hasādhippāyatāti purimapadassa atthavivaraṇaṃ. Pāḷiyaṃ avuttepi ‘‘jātiādīhi akkosavatthūhi parammukhā akkosantassa vatthūnaṃ anaññabhāvato yathā dukkaṭaṃ, tathā davakamyatāya parammukhā vadantassapi dubbhāsitamevā’’ti ācariyā vadanti. Sabbasattāti ettha vacanatthavijānanapakatikā tiracchānagatāpi gahetabbā.
35 关于第35条,由于以教诲为先而站立说话时,心念轻动易转,即使中间生起忿怒,也不犯戒。此处有四种构成要件:所骂詈的对象是已受具足戒者;不假其他借口,而以出身等骂詈;了知“他在骂我”;不以实义为先等。显示巴利原文
35. Anusāsanipurekkhāratāya ṭhatvā vadantassa cittassa lahuparivattibhāvato antarā kope uppannepi anāpatti. Yaṃ akkosati, tassa upasampannatā, anaññāpadesena jātiādīhi akkosanaṃ, ‘‘maṃ akkosatī’’ti jānanā, atthapurekkhāratādīnaṃ abhāvatāti imānettha cattāri aṅgāni.
三、离间语学处解释显示巴利原文
3. Pesuññasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
36 关于第三学处,“已生起争论者”指他们之间已生起了争论。“和解”指秘密地调和。“已生起争吵者”指他们之间已生起了通过手拉手等方式达到顶点的争吵。“已陷入争论者”指已陷入不犯戒的对立言论之争。“诤论言说”指导致执取的言论。“离间”意为破坏,即破坏和合有情,令其分裂。离间语即是离间。或者,具足彼语者为离间者,其行为即是离间。而依“令亲爱空无之语”这一词源解释,其义为:因令亲爱空无,故名离间语。显示巴利原文
36. Tatiye bhaṇḍanaṃ jātaṃ etesanti bhaṇḍanajātā. Sammantananti raho saṃsandanaṃ. Hatthaparāmāsādivasena matthakaṃ patto kalaho jāto etesanti kalahajātā. Anāpattigāmikaṃ viruddhavādabhūtaṃ vivādaṃ āpannāti vivādāpannā. Viggahasaṃvattanikā kathā viggāhikakathā. Pisatīti pisuṇā, vācā, samagge satte avayavabhūte vagge bhinne karotīti attho. Pisuṇā eva pesuññaṃ. Tāya vācāya vā samannāgato pisuṇo, tassa kammaṃ pesuññaṃ. Piyabhāvassa suññakaraṇavācanti iminā pana ‘‘piyasuññakaraṇato pisuṇā’’ti niruttinayena atthaṃ vadati.
此处亦应知:由“以十种方式传达离间语”之说,仅依十种骂詈事由传达离间语者,犯波逸提。而依律典之外的“盗贼”等词,则仅犯恶作。他们认为:“然而,对并非以骂詈为事由的离间行为——即出于喜爱欲而传达其行为或言语者,依此学处虽不见有犯,但于此仍应以恶作论处。”此处有三种构成要素:听闻比丘不以其他借口而以出身等骂詈后,向比丘传达;具有喜爱欲或离间意图中的任一种;对方了知。显示巴利原文
Idhāpi ‘‘dasahākārehi pesuññaṃ upasaṃharatī’’ti vacanato dasavidhaakkosavatthuvaseneva pesuññaṃ upasaṃharantassa pācittiyaṃ. Pāḷimuttakānaṃ corotiādīnaṃ vasena pana dukkaṭamevāti veditabbaṃ . ‘‘Anakkosavatthubhūtaṃ pana pesuññakaraṃ tassa kiriyaṃ vacanaṃ vā piyakamyatāya upasaṃharantassa kiñcāpi iminā sikkhāpadena āpatti na dissati, tathāpi dukkaṭenettha bhavitabba’’nti vadanti. Jātiādīhi anaññāpadesena akkosantassa bhikkhuno sutvā bhikkhussa upasaṃharaṇaṃ, piyakamyatābhedādhippāyesu aññataratā, tassa vijānanāti imānettha tīṇi aṅgāni.
四、句句教诵学处解释显示巴利原文
4. Padasodhammasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
45 关于第四学处,“一起”指与未受具足戒者一起。前文句与后文句相似,例如“色无常”中的“无常”一词,与“受无常”中的“无常”一词相似。“字聚”指无变格词尾的字聚。“字与随字聚为句”指带有变格词尾的句。取带有变格词尾的句,而说“第一句即是句,第二句为随句”。显示巴利原文
45. Catutthe ekatoti anupasampannena saddhiṃ. Purimabyañjanena sadisaṃ pacchābyañjananti ‘‘rūpaṃ anicca’’nti ettha anicca-saddena sadisaṃ ‘‘vedanā aniccā’’ti ettha anicca-saddaṃ vadati. Akkharasamūhoti avibhattiko akkharasamūho. Akkharānubyañjanasamūho padanti vibhattiantaṃ padamāha. Vibhattiantameva padaṃ gahetvā ‘‘paṭhamapadaṃ padameva, dutiyaṃ anupada’’nti vuttaṃ.
“一句”是就偈颂之句而言。“以句数计算”意为以偈颂句数计算。“未达到”意为未一起诵完。“ru”为“使落下”,此处依增音而有鼻音,应知是令复合辅音前的音节变为短音。因此说“仅是‘rū’音而已”。如果被要求说“沙弥,请诵‘色无常’”,但他不发“rū”音而发短音“ru”,则称为诵了其他,故不犯戒。如此而行时,亦应知在“受无常”中,仅以“无常”一词即犯戒。此理亦然:即仅诵一字而止。例如,被要求诵“诸法意先行”时,仅诵“ma”音而止。若被要求诵“如是我闻”等经时,仅诵“e”音而止,则以随字犯波逸提;若诵未完整之句而止,则以随字犯波逸提。在诸句中,若错失第一句,则以第二随句犯波逸提。显示巴利原文
Ekaṃ padanti gāthāpadaṃ sandhāya vadati. Padagaṇanāyāti gāthāpadagaṇanāya. Apāpuṇitvāti saddhiṃ akathetvā. Runti opātetīti ettha anunāsiko āgamavasena vutto, saṃyogapubbassa rassattaṃ katanti veditabbaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘rū-kāramattamevā’’ti. Ettha ca ‘‘rūpaṃ aniccanti bhaṇa sāmaṇerā’’ti vuccamāno sace rū-kāraṃ avatvā ru-iti rassaṃ katvā vadati, aññaṃ bhaṇitaṃ nāma hoti, tasmā anāpatti. Evañca katvā ‘‘vedanā aniccā’’ti etthāpi anicca-saddamatteneva āpatti hotīti veditabbaṃ. Esa nayoti ekamevakkharaṃ vatvā ṭhānaṃ. ‘‘Manopubbaṅgamā dhammā’’ti vuccamāno hi ma-kāramattameva vatvā tiṭṭhati. ‘‘Evaṃ me suta’’ntiādisuttaṃ bhaṇāpiyamāno e-kāraṃ vatvā tiṭṭhati ce, anvakkharena pācittiyaṃ, aparipuṇṇapadaṃ vatvā ṭhite anubyañjanena. Padesu ekaṃ paṭhamapadaṃ virajjhati, dutiyena anupadena pācittiyaṃ.
《无秽经》、《正见经》及《大问答经》为法军将所说,《推论经》为大目犍连长老所说,《小问答经》为法授长老尼所说。独觉佛所说亦归入佛所说。“依止注疏”是指先前以摩揭陀语所说、已收入法集的注疏。如今亦说,如“犹如名为豹者,隐藏而捕鹿”等,已收入法集的注疏之语亦应采纳。“依止律典”是指如“猕猴、跋耆子等”那样,仅出现于律典中者。“依止还灭”意为依止涅槃。然而,通常亦应取依止还灭者,故说“虽亦”等。“长老”指那先长老。此说见于道论等典籍。律典中说“以文字令诵,字字犯波逸提”,因此宜说“以文字令诵,字字犯波逸提”。显示巴利原文
Anaṅgaṇasuttaṃ (ma. ni. 1.57 ādayo) sammādiṭṭhisuttaṃ (ma. ni. 1.89 ādayo) mahāvedallañca (ma. ni. 1.449 ādayo) dhammasenāpatinā bhāsitaṃ, anumānasuttaṃ (ma. ni. 1.181 ādayo) mahāmoggallānattherena, cūḷavedallasuttaṃ (ma. ni. 1.460 ādayo) dhammadinnāya theriyā bhāsitaṃ. Paccekabuddhabhāsitampi buddhabhāsiteyeva saṅgahaṃ gacchati. Aṭṭhakathānissitoti pubbe magadhabhāsāya vuttaṃ dhammasaṅgahāruḷhaṃ aṭṭhakathaṃ sandhāya vadati. Idānipi ‘‘yathāpi dīpiko nāma, nilīyitvā gaṇhate mige’’ti (mi. pa. 6.1.5) evamādikaṃ saṅgahāruḷhaṃ aṭṭhakathāvacanaṃ gahetabbanti vadanti. Pāḷinissitoti ‘‘makkaṭī vajjiputtā cā’’tievamādinā (pārā. 66) pāḷiyaṃyeva āgato. Vivaṭṭūpanissitanti nibbānupanissitaṃ. Vivaṭṭanissitaṃ pana sāmaññato gahetabbanti āha ‘‘kiñcāpī’’tiādi. Therassāti nāgasenattherassa. Maggakathādīni pakaraṇāni. ‘‘Akkharena vāceti, akkharakkhare āpatti pācittiyassā’’ti vattabbe ‘‘akkharāya vāceti, akkharakkharāya āpatti pācittiyassā’’ti pāḷiyaṃ vuttaṃ.
48 第四十八条:与未受具足戒者一起学习而不犯,是指与未受具足戒者同坐学习诵经时无犯。年少比丘坐着……乃至……念诵者无犯。此处指两人皆站立或坐着时,若比丘心想“我在念诵”而念诵,实无犯。“舍去近行”是指舍去距离众会边缘十二肘的范围。即使心想“我坐着教诵”而念诵者,因舍去近行且坐着,故无犯。然而,若远处坐着而心想“我教诵”,并分别作意而念诵,则有犯。“一只脚不来”是指先前熟练的经文后来记不起来。对这样的人说“你这样说吧”,然后一起念诵,无犯。“Opātetī”是指一起说话。此处其余内容浅显易懂。未受具足戒的状态、以分句方式教诵所说特征之法以及一起念诵,是此处的三要素。显示巴利原文
48.Anupasampannena saddhiṃ gaṇhantassa anāpattīti anupasampannena saha nisīditvā uddesaṃ gaṇhantassa anāpatti vuttā. Daharabhikkhu nisinno…pe… bhaṇato anāpattīti ettha dvīsupi ṭhitesu nisinnesu vā upasampannassa bhaṇāmīti bhaṇantassa anāpattiyeva. Upacāraṃ muñcitvāti parisapariyantato dvādasahatthaṃ muñcitvā. ‘‘Nisinne vācemī’’ti bhaṇantassapi upacāraṃ muñcitvā nisinnattā anāpatti. Sace pana dūre nisinnampi vācemīti visuṃ sallakkhetvā bhaṇati, āpattiyeva. Eko pādo na āgacchatīti pubbe paguṇoyeva pacchā asarantassa na āgacchati, taṃ ‘‘evaṃ bhaṇāhī’’ti ekato bhaṇantassa anāpatti. Opātetīti saddhiṃ katheti. Sesamettha uttānameva. Anupasampannatā, vuttalakkhaṇadhammaṃ padaso vācanatā, ekato bhaṇanañcāti imānettha tīṇi aṅgāni.
五、共宿学处解释显示巴利原文
5. Sahaseyyasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
49-50 第五学处中,‘vikūjamānā’指呻吟者,‘kākacchamānā’指哭泣者。此处或为举出事例。‘Tena nu kho pātita’(他是否因此堕落?)——因其是以提问方式说出,故不构成妄语。然而有些人认为:‘以疑惑方式说的话不名为妄语,因此才这样说。’‘santikaṃ agantvā’(未前往近处)是指怀着‘凡对他们不许可的,对他们也不许可’的想法而未前往。显示巴利原文
49-50. Pañcame vikūjamānāti nitthunantā. Kākacchamānāti rodantā. Tatridaṃ vatthunidassanaṃ vā. Tena nu kho pātitanti pucchāvasena kathitattā natthi musāvādo. Keci pana ‘‘sandehavasena vacanaṃ musā nāma na hoti, tasmā evaṃ vutta’’nti vadanti. Santikaṃ agantvāti ‘‘yaṃ etesaṃ na kappati, taṃ tesampi na kappatī’’ti adhippāyena agantvā.
51 ‘dirattatiratta’(二夜三夜)——这里应知,仅为言辞通顺而说‘diratta’(二夜)。因为若允许同宿三夜,则二夜自然不必另说,故‘diratta’一词并非单独适用。因此他说:‘世尊为摄受沙弥,开许超过二夜三夜,即三夜的豁免。’或为显示无间断的三夜而说‘diratta’。若只说‘tiratta’(三夜),则可能将住在别处而有间隔的三夜也算入;而说‘dirattavisiṭṭhaṃ tirattaṃ’(以二夜为特征的三夜)时,则表明是无间断的三夜。‘sayanaṃ seyyā’(卧处为床),‘sayanti etthātipi seyyā’(人们在此躺卧,故亦为床),因此说‘称为身体伸展的……’等。‘tasmā’(因此)是因为两者皆被执受。‘以五种覆盖物’指以砖、石、灰泥、草、叶这五种覆盖物。‘以熟诵之力’指以熟练之力。‘一肘半高’应以工匠肘量取。‘同一出入口’是就使用之门的同一性而言。‘有百间房或四方形建筑为同一出入口’——此是句子的连接。显示巴利原文
51.Dirattatirattanti ettha vacanasiliṭṭhatāmattena diratta-ggahaṇaṃ katanti veditabbaṃ. Tirattañhi sahavāse labbhamāne diratte vattabbameva natthīti dirattaggahaṇaṃ visuṃ na yojeti. Tenevāha ‘‘uttaridirattatirattanti bhagavā sāmaṇerānaṃ saṅgahakaraṇatthāya tirattaparihāraṃ adāsī’’ti. Nirantaraṃ tirattadassanatthaṃ vā dirattaggahaṇaṃ kataṃ. Kevalañhi tirattanti vutte aññattha vāsena antarikampi tirattaṃ gaṇheyya, dirattavisiṭṭhaṃ pana tirattaṃ vuccamānaṃ tena anantarikameva tirattaṃ dīpeti. Sayanaṃ seyyā, sayanti etthātipi seyyāti āha ‘‘kāyappasāraṇasaṅkhāta’’ntiādi. Tasmāti yasmā ubhayampi pariggahitaṃ, tasmā. Pañcahi chadanehīti iṭṭhakasilāsudhātiṇapaṇṇasaṅkhaātehi pañcahi chadanehi. Vācuggatavasenāti paguṇavasena. Diyaḍḍhahatthubbedho vaḍḍhakīhatthena gahetabbo. Ekūpacāroti vaḷañjanadvārassa ekattaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Satagabbhaṃ vā catussālaṃ ekūpacāraṃ hotīti sambandho.
‘与上层墙壁不相连的建筑’——这是为了显示:在横梁内躺卧后,再通过同一个孔洞出来,经由墙壁间隙进入下层是可能的,对于这种与上层墙壁不相连的住所,已说无犯;而对于无法如此进入的、墙壁相连的住所,则无需再说无犯,并非为了显示墙壁相连的住所有犯。‘在下层建筑躺卧的比丘无犯’——这也是为了遮止在那种住所的下层躺卧可能产生的犯戒之嫌而说,并非为了显示在上层躺卧者有犯。‘不同出入口’——这是针对那种在外面设置梯子以登上上层的建筑而说。由于在上层的露天处躺卧并无犯,故说‘在覆盖物之内’。显示巴利原文
Uparimatalena saddhiṃ asambaddhabhittikassāti idaṃ tulāya abbhantare sayitvā puna teneva susirena nikkhamitvā bhittiantarena heṭṭhimatalaṃ pavisituṃ yoggepi uparimatalena asambaddhabhittike senāsane anāpattiyā vuttāya tathā pavisituṃ asakkuṇeyye sambaddhabhittike vattabbameva natthīti dassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ, na pana sambaddhabhittike āpattīti dassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Heṭṭhāpāsāde sayitabhikkhussa anāpattīti idampi tādise senāsane heṭṭhimatale sayitasseva āpattippasaṅkā siyāti taṃnivāraṇatthaṃ vuttaṃ, na pana uparimatale sayitassa āpattīti dassanatthaṃ. Nānūpacāreti yattha bahi nisseṇiṃ katvā uparimatalaṃ ārohanti, tādisaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Uparimatalepi ākāsaṅgaṇe nipajjantassa āpattiyā abhāvato ‘‘chadanabbhantare’’ti vuttaṃ.
“以会堂之略称”,即依会堂的形式而称。“半墙住所”——三本复注中均说:“所谓半墙,是指放开一面,而在其余三面砌墙;或先立一面墙壁,再于两侧各砌半墙的住所。”然而,复注中又说:“半墙是指屋顶未及墙体一半的”,此说在我们看来并不合理。“vāḷasaṅghāṭo”(猛兽栅栏),指柱子上方制成猛兽形状的栅栏。“在围墙之外”——此处,即便在没有围墙的那一面,若已处在适宜围墙的范围之外,也应视为无犯。“房间通道未分隔的”——指中央设有露天庭院的方形门厅大建筑,若不穿过露天庭院而仅由门厅便无法进入所有房间;若在每间房的两侧延伸墙壁而建成,则称为“房间通道已分隔的”。此处并非如此,故说“房间通道未分隔的”。“进入所有房间”——由于房间通道未分隔,不穿过露天庭院,仅由门厅即可进入各个房间。那么,它的围墙又是什么呢?因为一切已得分隔,所以说“房间的墙壁即是其围墙”,这是就四周的房间墙壁而说。即便是按方形建筑式样布局的住所,房间的门厅虽未单独围起,依四周耸立的房间墙壁而言,也名为……显示巴利原文
Sabhāsaṅkhepenāti sabhākārena. Aḍḍhakuṭṭake senāsaneti ettha ‘‘aḍḍhakuṭṭakaṃ nāma yattha ekaṃ passaṃ muñcitvā tīsu passesu bhittiyo baddhā honti, yattha vā ekasmiṃ passe bhittiṃ uṭṭhāpetvā ubhosu passesu upaḍḍhaṃ upaḍḍhaṃ katvā bhittiyo uṭṭhāpenti, tādisaṃ senāsana’’nti tīsupi gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ. Gaṇṭhipade pana ‘‘aḍḍhakuṭṭaketi chadanaṃ aḍḍhena asampattakuṭṭake’’ti vuttaṃ, tampi no na yuttaṃ. ‘‘Vāḷasaṅghāṭo nāma thambhānaṃ upari vāḷarūpehi katasaṅghāṭo vuccatī’’ti vadanti. Parikkhepassa bahigateti ettha yasmiṃ passe parikkhepo natthi, tatthāpi parikkhepārahappadesato bahigate anāpattiyevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Aparicchinnagabbhūpacāreti ettha majjhe vivaṭaṅgaṇavantāsu pamukhamahācatussālāsu yathā ākāsaṅgaṇaṃ anotaritvā pamukheneva gantvā sabbagabbhe pavisituṃ na sakkā hoti, evaṃ ekekagabbhassa dvīsu passesu kuṭṭaṃ nīharitvā kataṃ paricchinnagabbhūpacāraṃ nāma, idaṃ pana tādisaṃ na hotīti ‘‘aparicchinnagabbhūpacāre’’ti vuttaṃ. Sabbagabbhe pavisantīti gabbhūpacārassa aparicchinnattā ākāsaṅgaṇaṃ anotaritvā pamukheneva gantvā taṃ taṃ gabbhaṃ pavisanti. Atha kuto tassa parikkhepoyeva sabbaparicchannattāti vuttanti āha ‘‘gabbhaparikkhepoyeva hissa parikkhepo’’ti. Idañca samantā gabbhabhittiyo sandhāya vuttaṃ. Catussālavasena sanniviṭṭhepi senāsane gabbhapamukhaṃ visuṃ aparikkhittampi samantā ṭhitagabbhabhittīnaṃ vasena parikkhittaṃ nāma hoti.
“难道‘在未围隔的前庭,无犯’一语,在《暗部注释书》中不是不加简别地说过的吗?既然如此,即便在四厢房式的住所中,若其前庭是单独未围隔的,也应无犯。”若有人作此主张,为破除其说,便说:“然而……乃至……是针对各自独立建造、同一屋顶的单排房舍而说。”其意为:“‘在未围隔的前庭,无犯’这一说,并非针对四厢房式排列的房舍,而是针对独立建造、仅为一排的房舍而说。对此类单排房舍,其未围隔的前庭方为无犯,对四厢房式则不适用。”再者,对于单排房舍,若划定各房间的邻近区域,乃至仅在两侧砌起矮墙,其前庭便称为“已围隔”;而在四厢房式排列的房舍中,凭借两侧房间的墙壁,其前庭也已称为“已围隔”。因此,凡依此相而成为已围隔的前庭处,便有犯;其他情况则无犯。这便是此处的定论。
},
{显示巴利原文
‘‘Nanu ca ‘aparikkhitte pamukhe anāpattī’ti andhakaṭṭhakathāyaṃ avisesena vuttaṃ, tasmā catussālavasena sanniviṭṭhepi senāsane visuṃ aparikkhitte pamukhe anāpattiyevā’’ti yo vadeyya, tassa vādaparimocanatthaṃ idaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘yaṃ pana…pe… pāṭekkasannivesā ekacchadanā gabbhapāḷiyo sandhāya vutta’’nti. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – ‘‘aparikkhitte pamukhe anāpattīti yaṃ vuttaṃ, taṃ na catussālavasena sanniviṭṭhā gabbhapāḷiyo sandhāya vuttaṃ, kiñcarahi visuṃ sanniviṭṭhaṃ ekameva gabbhapāḷiṃ sandhāya. Tādisāya hi gabbhapāḷiyā aparikkhitte pamukhe anāpatti, na catussālavasena sanniviṭṭhāyā’’ti. Ekāya ca gabbhapāḷiyā tassa tassa gabbhassa upacāraṃ paricchinditvā antamaso ubhosu passesu khuddakabhittīnaṃ uṭṭhāpanamattenapi pamukhaṃ parikkhittaṃ nāma hoti, catussālavasena sanniviṭṭhāsu pana gabbhapāḷīsu ubhosu passesu gabbhabhittīnaṃ vasenapi pamukhaṃ parikkhittaṃ nāma hoti. Tasmā yaṃ iminā lakkhaṇena parikkhittaṃ pamukhaṃ, tattha āpatti, itarattha anāpattīti idamettha sanniṭṭhānaṃ.
现在,为了阐明“在未围隔的前庭,无犯”这句话的真实意图,有人说了“这是针对没有基台、直接建在地上的前庭而说的”这样的话。为了显示此说不合理,便开始了“而那里……”等的论述。所谓“这是针对没有基台、直接建在地上的前庭而说的”,其意图是:“‘在未围隔的前庭,无犯’这一说法,是针对没有基台、直接建在地上的房屋的前庭而说的。然而,如果前庭有高基台,它就不计入‘已围隔’之列。”正因如此,他才说:“即使基台高达十肘,也不计入围隔之列。”前面也是基于此意而说:“即使是有高基台的,睡在前庭的人,对睡在房间里的人也不构成犯戒。”其中,“那里”指的是《暗部注释书》。“在说明了基台的尺寸之后”是指:“如果从基台下来睡在地上,就看不到睡在基台上方的人”——像这样,以基台的高度说明了尺寸之后。所谓“单厅式建造”,是指将殿堂径直纵向加长而建造的。双厅式建造等,也可依所述类推而知。此处与前面所说不同的是,仅仅阐明了厅堂的分类。显示巴利原文
Idāni ‘‘aparikkhitte pamukhe anāpattī’’ti vatvā tasseva vacanassa adhippāyaṃ pakāsentena yaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘bhūmiyaṃ vinā jagatiyā pamukhaṃ sandhāya kathita’’nti, tassa ayuttatāvibhāvanatthaṃ ‘‘yañca tatthā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Bhūmiyaṃ vinā jagatiyā pamukhaṃ sandhāya kathitanti hi imassa vacanassa ayamadhippāyo – ‘‘aparikkhitte pamukhe anāpattī’’ti yaṃ vuttaṃ, taṃ vinā vatthuṃ bhūmiyaṃ katagehassa pamukhaṃ sandhāya kathitaṃ. Sace pana uccavatthukaṃ pamukhaṃ hoti, parikkhittasaṅkhyaṃ na gacchatīti. Tenevāha ‘‘dasahatthubbedhāpi hi jagati parikkhepasaṅkhyaṃ na gacchatī’’ti. Heṭṭhāpi idameva manasi sannidhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘uccavatthukaṃ cepi hoti, pamukhe sayito gabbhe sayitānaṃ āpattiṃ na karotī’’ti. Tatthāti andhakaṭṭhakathāyaṃ. Jagatiyā pamāṇaṃ vatvāti ‘‘sace jagatiyā otaritvā bhūmiyaṃ sayito, jagatiyā upari sayitaṃ na passatī’’ti evaṃ jagatiyā ubbedhena pamāṇaṃ vatvā. Ekasālādīsu ujukameva dīghaṃ katvā sannivesito pāsādo ekasālasanniveso. Dvisālasannivesādayopi vuttānusārato veditabbā. Sālappabhedadīpanameva cettha heṭṭhā vuttato viseso.
“在中间砌墙”:在此也应了知,由于围隔的最低标准是一肘半高,所以即使在中间砌一肘半高的墙,也仍然不是同一邻近区域。所谓“有洞的房子不名为同一邻近区域”,是指如果在高度一肘半的范围内,有一个足以让人通行的洞,那即是门,因此就成为同一邻近区域。所谓“什么围隔被破坏了?”这是针对前庭的围隔而言。“因为所有地方都提到了五种覆盖”,所以他说“被五种覆盖之一所覆盖”。显示巴利原文
Majjhepākāraṃ karontīti etthāpi parikkhepassa heṭṭhimaparicchedena diyaḍḍhahatthubbedhattā diyaḍḍhahatthaṃ cepi majjhe pākāraṃ karonti, nānūpacārameva hotīti veditabbaṃ. Na hi chiddena gehaṃ ekūpacāraṃ nāma hotīti ettha sace ubbedhena diyaḍḍhahatthabbhantare manussānaṃ sañcārappahonakaṃ chiddaṃ hoti, tampi dvāramevāti ekūpacāraṃ hoti. Kiṃ parikkhepoviddhastoti pamukhassa parikkhepaṃ sandhāya vadati. Sabbattha pañcannaṃyeva chadanānaṃ āgatattā vadati ‘‘pañcannaṃ aññatarena chadanena channā’’ti.
53 在巴利圣典中,说到“卧处者,谓全覆全围、多分覆多分围”,这是将多分覆多分围的住所示现为波逸提的终点;而说到“半覆半围者,犯恶作”,则是将半覆半围的住处显示为恶作的起点。那么,介于两者之间的状态,应判为波逸提还是恶作?由于此学处是制定戒,制定戒的制定不留余地,而多分覆多分围与半覆半围之间的状态,波逸提并未被遮止,因此在律判中,应取重者,注释书也显示为波逸提。所谓“七种波逸提”,是将圣典中所说的波逸提总括为一而说的。若一一分别,则“全覆全围者波逸提,多分覆多分围者波逸提”,共有八种波逸提。显示巴利原文
53. Pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘seyyā nāma sabbacchannā sabbaparicchannā yebhuyyenacchannā yebhuyyenaparicchannā’’ti vadantena yebhuyyenacchannayebhuyyenaparicchannasenāsanaṃ pācittiyassa avasānaṃ viya katvā dassitaṃ, ‘‘upaḍḍhacchanne upaḍḍhaparicchanne āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti vadantena ca upaḍḍhacchannaupaḍḍhaparicchannasenāsanaṃ dukkaṭassa ādiṃ katvā dassitaṃ, ubhinnamantarā kena bhavitabbaṃ pācittiyena, udāhu dukkaṭenāti? Lokavajjasikkhāpadasseva anavasesaṃ katvā paññāpanato imassa ca paṇṇattivajjattā yebhuyyenacchannayebhuyyenaparicchannassa upaḍḍhacchannaupaḍḍhaparicchannassa ca antarā pācittiyaṃ anivāritameva, tasmā vinayavinicchaye ca garukeyeva ṭhātabbattā aṭṭhakathāyampi pācittiyameva dassitaṃ. Satta pācittiyānīti pāḷiyaṃ vuttapācittiyaṃ sāmaññato ekattena gahetvā vuttaṃ. Visuṃ pana gayhamāne ‘‘sabbacchanne sabbaparicchanne pācittiyaṃ, yebhuyyenacchanne yebhuyyenaparicchanne pācittiya’’nti aṭṭheva pācittiyāni honti.
即所谓Senambamaṇḍapa的样式:据说在锡兰岛,有一高基台、全覆、全不围、名为Senambamaṇḍapa的集会堂,此处是就它而说。若把它算作基台围隔,则该堂因有高基台,“全不围”便不合理,因此说“由此也可了知……”等。此处,小覆等应如此理解:若一处住所四个部分中,一部分有覆盖,其余无覆盖,这称为“小覆”。若三部分中,两部分有覆盖,一部分无覆盖,称为“多分覆”。若两部分中,一部分有覆盖,一部分无覆盖,称为“半覆”住所。小围等也可依此类推。其余文义易解。此处的三要素是:构成波逸提的住所、在那里与未受具戒者同卧、第四天日落。显示巴利原文
Senambamaṇḍapavaṇṇaṃ hotīti sīhaḷadīpe kira uccavatthuko sabbacchanno sabbaaparicchanno evaṃnāmako sannipātamaṇḍapo atthi, taṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ. Yadi jagatiparikkhepasaṅkhyaṃ gacchati, uccavatthukattā maṇḍapassa sabbaaparicchannatā na yujjatīti āha ‘‘imināpetaṃ veditabba’’ntiādi. Cūḷakacchannādīni cettha evaṃ veditabbāni – yassa catūsu bhāgesu eko channo, sesā acchannā, idaṃ cūḷakacchannaṃ. Yassa tīsu bhāgesu dve channā, eko acchanno, idaṃ yebhuyyenacchannaṃ. Yassa dvīsu bhāgesu eko channo, eko acchanno, idaṃ upaḍḍhacchannaṃ nāma senāsanaṃ. Cūḷakaparicchannādīnipi imināva nayena veditabbāni. Sesaṃ uttānameva. Pācittiyavatthukasenāsanaṃ, tattha tattha anupasampannena saha nipajjanaṃ, catutthadivase sūriyatthaṅgamananti imānettha tīṇi aṅgāni.
六、第二共宿学处解释显示巴利原文
6. Dutiyasahaseyyasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
55 第六项中,有人说:“因为在第一条学处中说‘除比丘外,其余皆名未受具足戒者’,因此女性自然也包含在‘未受具足戒者’的范畴内,所以第四天与女性同宿者,依两条学处得两个波逸提罪。”然而,在《甘提帕达》中,于三处皆说:“在此学处中,女性是被单独说明的,因此第一条学处中‘除比丘外,其余皆名未受具足戒者’仅指男性,方为恰当。”此说方为合理。显示巴利原文
55. Chaṭṭhe ‘‘paṭhamasikkhāpade ‘bhikkhuṃ ṭhapetvā avaseso anupasampanno nāmā’ti vuttattā ‘mātugāmopi anupasampannaggahaṇena gahitoyevā’ti catutthadivase mātugāmena saddhiṃ sayantassa dvīhi sikkhāpadehi dve pācittiyāni hontī’’ti vadanti. Gaṇṭhipadesu pana tīsupi ‘‘imasmiṃ sikkhāpade mātugāmassa visuṃ vuccamānattā paṭhamasikkhāpade ‘bhikkhuṃ ṭhapetvā avaseso anupasampanno nāmā’ti purisasseva gahaṇaṃ anucchavika’’nti vuttaṃ, tadeva ca yuttataraṃ.
至于他们在这里所说的理由——“‘第一日也’中的‘也’字,也含有第四日的意思”——也并非正理。因为‘也’字只有总括之义,并无限定之义,而决定之义另有可能。或者,此处的‘也’字应当视为表示可能性。由此,它在此处阐明此义:即使在第一日也有罪,在第二日等日子更不待言。纵然将‘也’字理解为总括之义,它也只是显示依此学处所犯之罪在其他日子也会发生,而非依第一学处所犯之罪,因此应当了知,那根本不成其为理由。他们说:‘即使作为波罗夷事对象的女子,因处于未被执受的方面,故不产生同宿罪。’应当了知,由‘日落时,比丘在有女人躺卧之处躺下’这句话可知,白昼躺卧者绝无同宿罪。与波逸提事相关的卧处、在那里与女人一同躺卧、日落,这是此处的三支。显示巴利原文
Yañca idha ‘‘paṭhamadivasepīti pi-saddena catutthadivasepīti vuttaṃ hotī’’ti kāraṇaṃ vadanti, tampi akāraṇaṃ pi-saddo sampiṇḍanatthoyevāti niyamābhāvato avadhāraṇatthassa ca sambhavato. Sambhāvane vā pi-saddo daṭṭhabbo. Tena idha paṭhamadivasepi tāva āpatti, dutiyādidivase kimeva vattabbanti imamatthaṃ dīpeti. Sampiṇḍanatthepi pi-sadde gayhamāne imināva sikkhāpadena āpajjitabbāpattiyā aññasmimpi divase āpajjanaṃ dīpeti, na paṭhamasikkhāpadena āpajjitabbāpattiyāti akāraṇameva tanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. ‘‘Matitthī pārājikavatthubhūtāpi anupādinnapakkhe ṭhitattā sahaseyyāpattiṃ na janetī’’ti vadanti. ‘‘Atthaṅgate sūriye mātugāme nipanne bhikkhu nipajjatī’’ti vacanato divā sayantassa sahaseyyāpatti na hotiyevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Pācittiyavatthukasenāsanaṃ, tattha mātugāmena saha nipajjanaṃ, sūriyatthaṅgamananti imānettha tīṇi aṅgāni.
七、说法学处解释显示巴利原文
7. Dhammadesanāsikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
60-64 第六十至六十四条中,“引归家者”指家妇,即一家之主妇,故说“家之主妇”。“媳”即子媳。“非由夜叉……”等语,与“除了”一词相关联。即使是与现为男身而站立的夜叉、饿鬼或畜生一同站立,也不得说法。“以字说法”在此,他们说:“超过五六句之后,即使只说一个字便停下,心想‘我将说此句’,也构成罪。”显示巴利原文
60-64. Sattame gharaṃ nayatīti gharaṇī, gharanāyikā. Tenāha ‘‘gharasāminī’’ti. Suṇhāti suṇisā. Na yakkhenātiādīnaṃ ‘‘aññatrā’’ti iminā sambandho. Purisaviggahaṃ gahetvā ṭhitena yakkhena vā petena vā tiracchānena vā saddhiṃ ṭhitāyapi desetuṃ na vaṭṭati. Akkharāya desetīti ettha ‘‘chappañcavācato uttari ‘imaṃ padaṃ bhāsissāmī’ti ekampi akkharaṃ vatvā tiṭṭhati, āpattiyevā’’ti vadanti.
66 他们说:“‘一个偈颂之句’是就偈颂的结集而言,但在其他情况下,应取有格尾变化的词。”他们说:“‘注释、法句、本生等事’——这也是指古时结集所收录的注释等。”除去注释等的原文,可以随宜用泰米尔等其他语言讲说。“于句净法中,如前所说之分类”——以此显示在其他情况下无罪。“站起后又坐下”——以威仪转换的方式,显示即使以不同威仪也无罪。“即使讲述全部长部”——只要尚未结束,即使在次日也可以继续讲述。显示巴利原文
66.‘‘Eko gāthāpādoti idaṃ gāthābandhameva sandhāya vuttaṃ, aññattha pana vibhattiantapadameva gahetabba’’nti vadanti. ‘‘Aṭṭhakathaṃ dhammapadaṃ jātakādivatthuṃ vāti imināpi porāṇaṃ saṅgītiāruḷhameva aṭṭhakathādi vutta’’nti vadanti. Aṭṭhakathādipāṭhaṃ ṭhapetvā damiḷādibhāsantarena yathāruci kathetuṃ vaṭṭati. Padasodhamme vuttappabhedoti iminā aññattha anāpattīti dīpeti. Uṭṭhahitvā puna nisīditvāti iriyāpathaparivattananayena nānāiriyāpathenapi anāpattīti dīpeti. Sabbaṃ cepi dīghanikāyaṃ kathetīti yāva na niṭṭhāti, tāva punadivasepi katheti.
第二项中,无有智男子的参与属于无犯。与女人一同站立以及有智男子的距离,应依不定法中所说的方法来把握。其余都是明显的。此处有五支:对具有所述特征之法作超过六语的教导;具有所述特征的女人;无威仪转换;无有智男子在场;非为解答问难。显示巴利原文
Dutiyassa viññūpurisassa aggahaṇaṃ akiriyā. Mātugāmena saddhiṃ ṭhitassa ca viññūpurisassa ca upacāro aniyatesu vuttanayeneva gahetabbo. Sesaṃ uttānameva. Vuttalakkhaṇassa dhammassa channaṃ vācānaṃ upari desanā, vuttalakkhaṇo mātugāmo, iriyāpathapaavattanābhāvo, viññūpurisābhāvo, apañhavissajjanāti imāni panettha pañca aṅgāni.
八、宣说上人法学处解释显示巴利原文
8. Bhūtārocanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
77 第七十七条中,“中间”是指不同于般涅槃时的其他时间。“被过度催逼”是指被这样逼迫:“尊者,请说,您证得了什么?”即使未被过度催逼,无论被问或未被问,在有那样的因缘时,也完全可以宣说。因此,一位长老被某年少比丘指责后说:“贤友,不要为上位道而努力了,你指责的是一位漏尽者。”而长老问:“贤友,你在此教法中有所确立吗?”年少比丘答:“是的,尊者,我是须陀洹。”圣者们即使知道“这是造作者”,为了以显示修行不虚来激励和安慰,也会显示自己。所闻、教理、戒德,即闻德、教理之德、戒德。在此为痴狂者说明不说的理由时,应知也为心散乱者、受痛苦者说明了不说的理由。或者以“iti”一词表示“等”义,将心散乱者、受痛苦者一并包含在内。因此他说:“或者由于无心乱。”具见者,指具足道果之见者。因为只有圣者才没有痴狂等状态。而得禅定者若有他们状态,则会退失禅定,因此对于他们,应说因不实说而无罪,而非因实说而无罪。因此他说:“不应说因实说而无罪。”显示巴利原文
77. Aṭṭhame antarāti parinibbānasamayato aññasmiṃ kāle. Atikaḍḍhiyamānenāti ‘‘vadatha, bhante, kiṃ tumhehi adhigata’’nti evaṃ nippīḷiyamānena. Anatikaḍḍhiyamānenapi pucchite vā apucchite vā tathārūpe kāraṇe sati ārocetuṃ vaṭṭatiyeva. Teneva aññatarena daharabhikkhunā upavadito aññataro thero ‘‘āvuso, uparimaggatthāya vāyāmaṃ mā akāsi, khīṇāsavo tayā upavadito’’ti āha. Therena ca ‘‘atthi te, āvuso, imasmiṃ sāsane patiṭṭhā’’ti vutto daharabhikkhu ‘‘āma, bhante, sotāpanno aha’’nti avoca. ‘‘Kārako aya’’nti ñatvāpi paṭipattiyā amoghabhāvadassanena samuttejanāya sampahaṃsanāya ca ariyā attānaṃ pakāsentiyeva. Sutapariyattisīlaguṇanti sutaguṇaṃ pariyattiguṇaṃ sīlaguṇañca. Ummattakassa idha avacane kāraṇaṃ vadantena khittacittavedanaṭṭānampi avacane kāraṇaṃ vuttamevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Iti-saddena vā ādiatthena khittacittavedanaṭṭe saṅgaṇhāti. Teneva vadati ‘‘cittakkhepassa vā abhāvā’’ti. Diṭṭhisampannānanti maggaphaladiṭṭhiyā samannāgatānaṃ. Ariyānameva hi ummattakādibhāvo natthi. Jhānalābhino pana tasmiṃ sati jhānā parihāyanti, tasmā tesaṃ abhūtārocanapaccayā anāpatti vattabbā, na bhūtārocanapaccayā. Tenevāha ‘‘bhūtārocanapaccayā anāpatti na vattabbā’’ti.
“依先前未说者”,是指在第四波罗夷中所未说者。而且,此学处因不了知制戒,属非由心念而生起的情况。在此,圣者因了知制戒,故不违犯;凡夫虽了知制戒,仍会违犯。应知,他们由于生起违犯大师教诫的思心所,造成了强力的不善,从而退失禅那。再者,若就最上而言,仅对于圣者说“有善心及无记心这两种心”。然而,对于不了知制戒的得禅那凡夫,说他们会由贪欲而以不善心宣说,这也是不可能存在的情形。而且,由于此处没有苦受,所以只说“二受”;为了与此相应而说“二心”——当如此理解此处的意趣,或以这种方式去把握。其余文句是明显的。上人法的真实性、对未受具足戒者宣说、彼时的了知、别无其他指称——这是此处的四支。显示巴利原文
Pubbe avuttehīti catutthapārājike avuttehi. Idañca sikkhāpadaṃ paṇṇattiajānanavasena acittakasamuṭṭhānaṃ hoti. Ariyā cettha paṇṇattiṃ jānantā vītikkamaṃ na karonti, puthujjanā pana paṇṇattiṃ jānitvāpi vītikkamaṃ karonti, te ca satthuno āṇāvītikkamacetanāya balavaakusalabhāvato jhānā parihāyantīti daṭṭhabbaṃ, ukkaṭṭhaparicchedena ariyapuggale eva sandhāya ‘‘kusalābyākatacittehi dvicitta’’nti vuttaṃ. Paṇṇattiṃ ajānantā pana jhānalābhī puthujjanā vatthumhi lobhavasena akusalacittenapi na ārocentīti natthi. Idha dukkhavedanāya abhāvato ‘‘dvivedana’’nti imassa anurūpaṃ katvā dvicittanti idaṃ vuttanti evaṃ vā ettha adhippāyo gahetabbo. Sesaṃ uttānameva. Uttarimanussadhammassa bhūtatā, anupasampannassa ārocanaṃ, taṅkhaṇavijānanā, anaññappadesoti imāni panettha cattāri aṅgāni.
九、发露粗恶罪学处解释显示巴利原文
9. Duṭṭhullārocanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
78 第七十八 “Navame duṭṭhullasaddatthadassanatthanti”,意思是“为了显示粗恶一词的义理”。因为当义理被显示时,其词句本身也即被显示为“此词用于这些义理上”。此处的意图是:“凡是以粗恶一词所指称的,为了将其完全显示,而说出诸波罗夷罪”。所谓“在此有辨析”,是指在此巴利原文中有此辨析,或是在此巴利注疏中有此辨析。所谓“在此或有”,意即有人可能会对此生起如此的疑惑。正如向未受具足戒者发露粗恶罪时,应以恶作处理,故说“犯恶作”。即便是斥骂者,也犯恶作,即由辱骂之语而犯恶作。为了表明即使不理解此意图,也应以注疏师之言为准则,故说“在此唯以注疏师为准则”。继而再以理据,将注疏师之言坚固地确立起来,故说“以此也……”等等。显示巴利原文
78. Navame duṭṭhullasaddatthadassanatthanti duṭṭhullasaddassa atthadassanatthaṃ. Atthe hi dassite saddopi ‘‘ayaṃ etesu atthesu vattatī’’ti dassitoyeva hoti. ‘‘Yaṃ yaṃ duṭṭhullasaddena abhidhīyati, taṃ sabbaṃ dassetuṃ pārājikāni vuttānī’’ti ayañhettha adhippāyo. Tatrāyaṃ vicāraṇāti tatra pāḷiyaṃ ayaṃ vicāraṇā, tatra pāḷiaṭṭhakathāsu vā ayaṃ vicāraṇā. Tattha bhaveyyāti tattha kassaci vimati evaṃ bhaveyya. Anupasampannassa duṭṭhullārocane viya dukkaṭena bhavitabbanti āha ‘‘dukkaṭaṃ āpajjatī’’ti. Akkosantopi dukkaṭaṃ āpajjeyyāti omasavādena dukkaṭaṃ āpajjeyya. Adhippāyaṃ ajānantenapi aṭṭhakathācariyānaṃ vacaneyeva ṭhātabbanti dīpanatthaṃ ‘‘aṭṭhakathācariyāva ettha pamāṇa’’nti vuttaṃ. Punapi aṭṭhakathāvacanameva upapattito daḷhaṃ katvā patiṭṭhapento ‘‘imināpi ceta’’ntiādimāha.
80 第八十条 因为说到“除了依比丘僧团授权外”,便应理解为授权是存在的,故此说“正是依此处所说之故……”等。显示巴利原文
80. ‘‘Aññatra bhikkhusammutiyā’’ti vuttattā sammuti atthīti gahetabbāti āha ‘‘idha vuttattāyevā’’tiādi.
82 82.“Ādito pañca sikkhāpadānīti”:指杀生等五学处。有人说:“其余者,指非时食等五学处。”然而有些人说:“从最初开始的五学处,即故意出精等五学处”,此说不应采纳。因为为沙弥制定的正是杀生等十学处。正如所说——显示巴利原文
82.Ādito pañca sikkhāpadānīti pāṇātipātādīni pañca sikkhāpadāni. ‘‘Sesānīti vikālabhojanādīni pañcā’’ti vadanti. Keci pana ‘‘ādito paṭṭhāya pañca sikkhāpadānīti sukkavissaṭṭhiādīni pañcā’’ti vadanti, taṃ na gahetabbaṃ. Pāṇātipātādīni hi daseva sikkhāpadāni sāmaṇerānaṃ paññattāni. Vuttañhetaṃ –
那时,沙弥们心想:“我们的学处有多少?我们又应在何处学习呢?”他们便将此事禀告世尊。世尊说:“诸比丘,我允许沙弥们有十学处,这些便是沙弥们应当修学的:离杀生、离不与取……”等(《大品》106)。显示巴利原文
‘‘Atha kho sāmaṇerānaṃ etadahosi ‘kati nu kho amhākaṃ sikkhāpadāni, kattha ca amhehi sikkhitabba’nti? Bhagavato etamatthaṃ ārocesuṃ. Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, sāmaṇerānaṃ dasa sikkhāpadāni, tesu ca sāmaṇerehi sikkhituṃ, pāṇātipātā veramaṇī adinnādānā veramaṇī’’tiādi (mahāva. 106).
对于为他们制定的学处,应当辨析粗恶与非粗恶的差别,而故意出精等并非单独为他们制定。若问:“对比丘而言属于粗恶罪的故意出精等,对于未受具足戒者又算是什么呢?”答:“故意出精……乃至……称为恶行。”由此也成立:“未受具足戒者的故意出精等,不名为粗恶罪。”因为说“称为恶行”时,即表明未受具足戒者的故意出精等仅是恶行,而非名为“粗恶”的恶行。他们说:“由于注疏中说‘称为恶行’,且因其性质不应作,故未受具足戒者的故意出精等属于羯磨罚的所依事;若比丘出于毁他名誉的意图而向其他未受具足戒者宣说,则犯恶作。”此处应知,以“未受具足戒者”一词,包含了沙弥、沙弥尼、在学尼。其余在此易解。未犯最后重事的比丘、有事实依据、向未受具足戒者宣说、未得比丘僧团授权——此即此处所说的三项要素。显示巴利原文
Tesaṃ paññattesuyeva sikkhāpadesu duṭṭhullāduṭṭhullavicāraṇā kātabbā, na ca sukkavissaṭṭhiādīni visuṃ tesaṃ paññattāni atthīti. Atha bhikkhuno duṭṭhullasaṅkhātāni sukkavissaṭṭhiādīni anupasampannassa kiṃ nāma hontīti āha ‘‘sukkavissaṭṭhi…pe… ajjhācāro nāmāti vutta’’nti. Imināpi cetaṃ siddhaṃ ‘‘anupasampannassa sukkavissaṭṭhiādi duṭṭhullaṃ nāma na hotī’’ti. Ajjhācāro nāmāti hi vadanto anupasampannassa sukkavissaṭṭhiādi kevalaṃ ajjhācāro nāma hoti, na pana duṭṭhullo nāma ajjhācāroti dīpeti. ‘‘Ajjhācāro nāmāti ca aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttattā akattabbarūpattā ca anupasampannassa sukkavissaṭṭhiādīni daṇḍakammavatthupakkhaṃ bhajanti, tāni ca aññassa anupasampannassa avaṇṇakāmatāya ārocento bhikkhu dukkaṭaṃ āpajjatī’’ti vadanti. Idha pana anupasampannaggahaṇena sāmaṇerasāmaṇerīsikkhamānānaṃ gahaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. Sesamettha uttānameva. Antimavatthuṃ anajjhāpannassa bhikkhuno savatthuko saṅghādiseso, anupasampannassa ārocanaṃ, bhikkhusammutiyā abhāvoti imāni panettha tīṇi aṅgāni.
十、掘地学处解释显示巴利原文
10. Pathavīkhaṇanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
84-86 第八十四至八十六条 第十条中,“一根身”是指那些以为“有身根”的人所说。“握拳大小”是指可用拳头握持的大小。此处虽已说明多土与少土之地,却未提及半土之地;然而,在制罚学处中,即便有余地的制定也可能存在,故应理解:在半土之地也犯波逸提。然而有说:“在全覆等处分半犯恶作,故此处亦应犯恶作。”此说并不合理,因为除犯波逸提所依之地与无犯所依之地以外,并无第三种犯恶作所依之地。确实只说了两种地:“已生地”和“未生地”。因此,必须属于二者之一;且依律决断时,当以重者为准,故此处不可能无犯。而在全覆等处,分半犯恶作是合理的,因为那里确实存在那样的恶作所依事。显示巴利原文
84-86. Dasame ekindriyanti ‘‘kāyindriyaṃ atthī’’ti maññamānā vadanti. Muṭṭhippamāṇāti muṭṭhinā saṅgahetabbappamāṇā. Ettha kiñcāpi yebhuyyapaṃsuṃ appapaṃsuñca pathaviṃ vatvā upaḍḍhapaṃsukā pathavī na vuttā, tathāpi paṇṇattivajjasikkhāpadesu sāvasesapaññattiyāpi sambhavato upaḍḍhapaṃsukāyapi pathaviyā pācittiyamevāti gahetabbaṃ. Keci pana ‘‘sabbacchannādīsu upaḍḍhe dukkaṭassa vuttattā idhāpi dukkaṭaṃ yutta’’nti vadanti, taṃ na yuttaṃ pācittiyavatthukañca anāpattivatthukañca duvidhaṃ pathaviṃ ṭhapetvā aññissā dukkaṭavatthukāya tatiyāya pathaviyā abhāvato. Dveyeva hi pathaviyo vuttā ‘‘jātā ca pathavī ajātā ca pathavī’’ti. Tasmā dvīsu aññatarāya pathaviyā bhavitabbaṃ, vinayavinicchaye ca sampatte garukeyeva ṭhātabbattā na sakkā ettha anāpattiyā bhavituṃ. Sabbacchannādīsu pana upaḍḍhe dukkaṭaṃ yuttaṃ tattha tādisassa dukkaṭavatthuno sabbhāvā.
若说“挖一个池塘”,是许可的,因为未限定“在此处”而说。即便说“挖这条藤蔓”,由于这是就挖掘地面而言的惯用语,故依此学处犯过,而非依坏生物村。以罐子,即用壶。“稀泥”指混有水的泥,因其随水流走,故许可。“不足四月”指少于四个月。“被雨淋过”指被天雨所淋。“非人工坡”是为说明无涂抹之处,因为那样的地方有蚁冢。“鼠狗”指被老鼠挖出后堆在外面的土堆。“同理”意为:只有不足四月且被雨淋过的才许可,这是其含义。显示巴利原文
‘‘Pokkharaṇiṃ khaṇā’’ti vadati, vaṭṭatīti ‘‘imasmiṃ okāse’’ti aniyametvā vuttattā vaṭṭati. ‘‘Imaṃ valliṃ khaṇā’’ti vuttepi pathavīkhaṇanaṃ sandhāya pavattavohārattā imināva sikkhāpadena āpatti, na bhūtagāmapātabyatāya. Kuṭehīti ghaṭehi. Tanukakaddamoti udakamissakakaddamo. So ca udakagatikattā vaṭṭati. Omakacātumāsanti ūnacātumāsaṃ. Ovaṭṭhanti devena ovaṭṭhaṃ. Akatapabbhāreti avaḷañjanaṭṭhānadassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Tādise hi vammikassa sabbhāvoti. Mūsikukkuraṃ nāma mūsikāhi khaṇitvā bahi katapaṃsurāsi. Eseva nayoti omakacātumāsaovaṭṭhoyeva vaṭṭatīti attho.
即使超过一天,也不允许。即使超过下雨的一天后,也不得损坏。他们说:“在与低地相连处及牛角刺处,因从地面切断后向上竖立,从过高的顶部切断取用,是允许的。”使其不在原处停留,用脚踩踏、切断后,取用搅浑的泥浆,也是允许的。从各处旧僧舍取砖等,“我取砖”等语,是就清净心而言。所谓“用水”,是指直接从空中降下的雨水。但据他们说:“若被从别处溅落的水所浸湿,则是允许的。”“举起后”即抛起之后。“以那个借口”即利用那种计谋。显示巴利原文
Ekadivasampi na vaṭṭatīti ovaṭṭhaekadivasātikkantopi vikopetuṃ na vaṭṭati. ‘‘Heṭṭhābhūmisambandhepi ca gokaṇṭake bhūmito chinditvā uddhaṃ ṭhitattā accuggatamatthakato chinditvā gahetuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti vadanti. Sakaṭṭhāne atiṭṭhamānaṃ katvā pādehi madditvā chinditvā āloḷitakaddamampi gahetuṃ vaṭṭati. Tatoti tato purāṇasenāsanato. Iṭṭhakaṃ gaṇhāmītiādi suddhacittaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Udakenāti ujukaṃ ākāsatoyeva patanakaudakena. ‘‘Sace pana aññattha paharitvā patitena udakena temitaṃ hoti, vaṭṭatī’’ti vadanti. Uccāletvāti ukkhipitvā. Tena apadesenāti tena lesena.
87-88 关于87-88条“因非行境故不犯”,此处即便能够将火熄灭,由于最初是以清净心施与,即使心中作意“让它烧吧”而站立一旁,亦不犯。“先被雨淋,后被覆盖”是指先被雨水淋湿,之后才被覆盖。其余文句浅显易懂。“生地、地想、挖掘或令挖掘的其中一项”,这是此处的三支。显示巴利原文
87-88.Avisayattāanāpattīti ettha sacepi nibbāpetuṃ sakkā hoti, paṭhamaṃ suddhacittena dinnattā ‘‘dahatū’’ti sallakkhetvāpi tiṭṭhati, anāpatti. Ovaṭṭhaṃ channanti paṭhamaṃ ovaṭṭhaṃ pacchā channaṃ. Sesaṃ uttānameva. Jātapathavī, pathavīsaññitā, khaṇanakhaṇāpanānaṃ aññataranti imāni panettha tīṇi aṅgāni.
2. 植物品显示巴利原文
2. Bhūtagāmavaggo
1. 植物学处解释显示巴利原文
1. Bhūtagāmasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
89 89. 僧舍品第一条中,“不能制止”即无法控制。然而应知,这句话已表明那孩子被带到那里以及被他看见的情形。当那位比丘开始砍树时,一位年轻的天女将孩子抱在怀中,立于树旁,恳求道:“尊主,请不要砍倒我的宫殿,我无法带着孩子四处漂泊,无家可归。”比丘心想“我在别处得不到这样的树”,未接受她的请求。天女思忖:“他看到这孩子后,或许会住手。”于是将孩子放在树枝上。比丘无法收住已经挥起的斧头,砍断了孩子的手臂。又,因躺卧于宫殿中而称为“躺着”,故说“躺在树上的天宫中”。显示巴利原文
89. Senāsanavaggassa paṭhame niggahetuṃ asakkontoti sandhāretuṃ asakkonto. Iminā pana vacanena dārakassa tattha upanītabhāvo tena ca diṭṭhabhāvo vuttoyevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tena hi bhikkhunā taṃ rukkhaṃ chindituṃ āraddhe tattha nibbattā ekā taruṇaputtā devadhītā puttaṃ aṅkenādāya ṭhitā taṃ yāci ‘‘mā me sāmi vimānaṃ chindi, na sakkhissāmi puttakaṃ ādāya anāvāsā vicaritu’’nti. So ‘‘ahaṃ aññattha īdisaṃ rukkhaṃ na labhissāmī’’ti tassā vacanaṃ nādiyi. Sā ‘‘imampi tāva dārakaṃ oloketvā oramissatī’’ti puttaṃ rukkhasākhāya ṭhapesi. So bhikkhu ukkhittaṃ pharasuṃ sandhāretuṃ asakkonto dārakassa bāhaṃ chindi. Evañca sayito vimāne sayito nāma hotīti katvā vuttaṃ ‘‘rukkhaṭṭhakadibbavimāne nipannassā’’ti.
“树上的天宫”是指树枝上的宫殿。生于树上的宫殿因依附于树,故称“树上的宫殿”;而树枝上的宫殿则依托所有树枝而安住。其中,若是树上的宫殿,只要树根还在便不会毁坏;而树枝上的宫殿,一旦树枝断裂便在各处崩坏,若所有树枝全断,便彻底毁灭。这一宫殿正是树枝上的,因此当树被砍倒时,那座宫殿便全然毁灭。正因如此,那位天女从世尊处得到另一座宫殿后,便安住其中。“从乳房根部砍断手臂”即连同肩膀一并砍断手臂。由此可知,树神的肢体可被砍断,不像四大王天等的肢体那样不可切断。“树法”即树的特性、树的自性。所谓树法,就是如树一般在被砍伐等情形下而不生嗔怒。显示巴利原文
Rukkhaṭṭhakadibbavimāneti ca sākhaṭṭhakavimānaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Rukkhassa upari nibbattañhi vimānaṃ rukkhapaṭibaddhattā ‘‘rukkhaṭṭhakavimāna’’nti vuccati. Sākhaṭṭhakavimānaṃ pana sabbasākhāsannissitaṃ hutvā tiṭṭhati. Tattha yaṃ rukkhaṭṭhakavimānaṃ hoti, taṃ yāva rukkhassa mūlamattampi tiṭṭhati, tāva na nassati. Sākhaṭṭhakavimānaṃ pana sākhāsu bhijjamānāsu tattha tattheva bhijjitvā sabbasākhāsu bhinnāsu sabbaṃ bhijjati, idampi ca vimānaṃ sākhaṭṭhakaṃ, tasmā rukkhe chinne taṃ vimānaṃ sabbaso vinaṭṭhaṃ, teneva sā devatā bhagavato santikā laddhe aññasmiṃ vimāne vasi. Bāhuṃ thanamūleyeva chindīti aṃsena saddhiṃ bāhaṃ chindi. Iminā ca rukkhadevatānaṃ gattāni chijjanti, na cātumahārājikādīnaṃ viya acchejjānīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Rukkhadhammeti rukkhapakatiyaṃ, rukkhasabhāveti attho. Rukkhānaṃ viya chedanādīsu akuppanañhi rukkhadhammo nāma.
“Uppatitaṃ”指已生起。“Bhantaṃ”指奔走。“Vāraye”指制止。此处是说:正如一位娴熟的车夫能制御迅猛奔驰的车乘,并随心驾驭;同样,能制止、调伏已生嗔怒的人,我称他为车夫。而其他那些国王、副王等的车夫,只是执缰之人,并非最上的车夫。显示巴利原文
Uppatitanti uppannaṃ. Bhantanti dhāvantaṃ. Vārayeti niggaṇheyya. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yathā nāma cheko sārathi ativegena dhāvantaṃ rathaṃ niggahetvā yathicchakaṃ peseti, evaṃ yo puggalo uppannaṃ kodhaṃ vāraye niggaṇhituṃ sakkoti, tamahaṃ sārathiṃ brūmi. Itaro pana rājauparājādīnaṃ rathasārathijano rasmiggāho nāma hoti, na uttamasārathīti.
第二偈颂的意义是:“yo”(任何人)——不论从刹帝利族出家,或从婆罗门族出家,不论新学、中年还是长老。“Uppatitaṃ”——意为向上冲起、已去、已转起,即已生起。“Kodhaṃ”——嗔怒,即依据“他对我行无益事,故生嗔恚”等经中所说的九种,以及“他不对我行有益事”等从反面成立的九种,共十八种,加上如树桩、荆棘等非因缘的一种,共十九种嗔恚事,由其中某种嗔恚事所生的嗔怒。“Visaṭaṃ”——扩散的。“Sappavisaṃ”——蛇毒。“Iva”——比喻词,省略i音后说为“va”。“Osadhehi”——以解毒药。这里的意思是:犹如一位善治蛇毒的医师,能以由根、茎、皮、叶、花等某一种或多种药物制成的解毒药,迅速消除被蛇咬后遍满全身的扩散蛇毒;同样,任何人能依对治嗔怒的方便——如此分(止、观等)中任何一种,来消除、不忍受、舍断、驱除、灭尽那由上述嗔恚事所生起、遍满心相续而存在的嗔怒,这位比丘便舍弃了“此岸与彼岸”。如此消除嗔怒的比丘,由于嗔怒在第三道中被彻底断除,因此。显示巴利原文
Dutiyagāthāya pana ayamattho – yoti (su. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1) yo yādiso khattiyakulā vā pabbajito brāhmaṇakulā vā pabbajito navo vā majjhimo vā thero vā. Uppatitanti uddhamuddhaṃ patitaṃ, gataṃ pavattanti attho, uppannanti vuttaṃ hoti. Kodhanti ‘‘anatthaṃ me caratīti āghāto jāyatī’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 3.340; a. ni. 9.29) nayena sutte vuttānaṃ navannaṃ, ‘‘atthaṃ me na caratī’’tiādīnañca tappaṭipakkhato siddhānaṃ navannamevāti aṭṭhārasannaṃ khāṇukaṇṭakādinā aṭṭhānena saddhiṃ ekūnavīsatiyā āghātavatthūnaṃ aññatarāghātavatthusambhavaṃ āghātaṃ. Visaṭanti vitthataṃ. Sappavisanti sappassa visaṃ. Ivāti opammavacanaṃ. I-kāralopaṃ katvā va-icceva vuttaṃ. Osadhehīti agadehi. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yathā visatikicchako vejjo sappena daṭṭho sabbaṃ kāyaṃ pharitvā ṭhitaṃ visaṭaṃ sappavisaṃ mūlakhandhatacapattapupphādīnaṃ aññatarehi, nānābhesajjehi payojetvā katehi vā osadhehi khippameva vineyya, evameva yo yathāvuttena āghātavatthunā uppatitaṃ cittasantānaṃ byāpetvā ṭhitaṃ kodhaṃ vinayanupāyesu tadaṅgavinayādīsu yena kenaci upāyena vineti nādhivāseti pajahati vinodeti byantiṃ karoti, so bhikkhu jahāti orapāraṃ. So evaṃ kodhaṃ vinento bhikkhu yasmā kodho tatiyamaggena sabbaso pahīyati, tasmā orapārasaññitāni pañcorambhāgiyasaṃyojanāni jahātīti. Avisesena hi pāranti tīrassa nāmaṃ, tasmā orāni ca tāni saṃsārasāgarassa pārabhūtāni cāti katvā ‘‘orapāra’’nti vuccati.
再者,若有人能平息已生起的嗔怒,犹如以药平息扩散的蛇毒,这位比丘便以第三道彻底调伏了嗔怒,安住于不还果,舍弃此岸与彼岸。其中,“此岸”指自身之身,“彼岸”指他人之身。或说“此岸”为六内处,“彼岸”为六外处。同样,“此岸”指人界,“彼岸”指天界;“此岸”指欲界,“彼岸”指色界与无色界;“此岸”指欲有与色有,“彼岸”指无色有;“此岸”指自己的身体,“彼岸”指令身体快乐的资具。如此,关于此岸与彼岸,以第四道断除欲贪者,即被称为“舍弃此岸与彼岸”。在此,虽说不还者因已断欲贪,确实不再有对今生自体等处的欲贪,但为了彰显其功德,将这一切此岸、彼岸的分类都统摄起来,以断除对它们的欲贪而说为“舍弃此岸与彼岸”。显示巴利原文
Atha vā yo uppatitaṃ vineti kodhaṃ visaṭaṃ sappavisaṃva osadhehi, so tatiyamaggena sabbaso kodhaṃ vinetvā anāgāmiphale ṭhito bhikkhu jahāti orapāraṃ. Tattha oranti sakattabhāvo. Pāranti parattabhāvo. Oraṃ vā cha ajjhattikāni āyatanāni, pāraṃ cha bāhirāyatanāni. Tathā oraṃ manussaloko, pāraṃ devaloko. Oraṃ kāmadhātu, pāraṃ rūpārūpadhātu. Oraṃ kāmarūpabhavo, pāraṃ arūpabhavo. Oraṃ attabhāvo, pāraṃ attabhāvasukhupakaraṇāni. Evametasmiṃ orapāre catutthamaggena chandarāgaṃ pajahanto ‘‘jahāti orapāra’’nti vuccati. Ettha ca kiñcāpi anāgāmino kāmarāgassa pahīnattā idhattabhāvādīsu chandarāgo eva natthi, apica kho panassa vaṇṇappakāsanatthaṃ sabbametaṃ orapārabhedaṃ saṅgahetvā tattha chandarāgappahānena ‘‘jahāti orapāra’’nti vuttaṃ.
今为显明其义,举喻说明:“如蛇蜕去旧皮”。此处,以胸而行者名为“urago”(蛇),这是蛇的异名。蛇有两种:有欲色者与无欲色者。有欲色者又分两种:水生与陆生。水生者唯于水中得欲色,于陆地则不得,如《僧伽波罗本生》中的僧伽波罗龙王;陆生者唯于陆地得欲色,于水中则不得。当蛇舍弃那因老朽而旧、因历时久而称为“旧皮”的皮时,以四种方式舍之:住于同类中、厌恶、依靠、用力。所谓“同类”,即蛇类、长身之体。因为蛇于五种情况不超越同类:投生时、死亡时、大小便与睡眠时、与同类交合时,以及蜕去旧皮时。因此,当它蜕皮时,必定住于同类中而舍。虽住于同类中,亦是出于厌恶而舍。所谓“厌恶而舍”,是指皮已脱去一半,另一半还挂着垂悬时,它对此感到厌离而舍。如此厌恶而舍时,也依靠树枝间、树根间或岩石间而舍。在依靠而舍时,亦生起力量、鼓起勇气,以精进力卷起尾巴,一边呼气一边昂起头而舍。如此舍弃后,便随心所欲地离去。显示巴利原文
Idāni tassatthassa vibhāvanatthāya upamaṃ āha ‘‘urago jiṇṇamivattacaṃ purāṇa’’nti. Tattha urena gacchatīti urago, sappassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. So duvidho kāmarūpī ca akāmarūpī ca. Kāmarūpīpi duvidho jalajo thalajo ca. Jalajo jale eva kāmarūpaṃ labhati, na thale saṅkhapālajātake (jā. 2.17.143 ādayo) saṅkhapālanāgarājā viya. Thalajo thale eva, na jale. So jajjarabhāvena jiṇṇaṃ, cirakālatāya purāṇañcāti saṅkhaṃ gataṃ tacaṃ jahanto catubbidhena jahati sajātiyaṃ ṭhito jigucchanto nissāya thāmenāti. Sajāti nāma sappajāti dīghattabhāvo. Uragā hi pañcasu ṭhānesu sajātiṃ nātivattanti upapattiyaṃ cutiyaṃ vissaṭṭhaniddokkamane sajātiyā methunapaṭisevane jiṇṇatacāpanayane cāti. Tasmā yadā tacaṃ jahati, tadā sajātiyaṃyeva ṭhatvā jahati. Sajātiyaṃ ṭhitopi ca jigucchanto jahati. Jigucchanto nāma yadā upaḍḍhaṭṭhāne mutto hoti, upaḍḍhaṭṭhāne amutto olambati, tadā naṃ aṭṭīyanto jahati, evaṃ jigucchantopi ca daṇḍantaraṃ vā mūlantaraṃ vā pāsāṇantaraṃ vā nissāya jahati. Nissāya jahantopi ca thāmaṃ janetvā ussāhaṃ karitvā vīriyena vaṅkaṃ naṅguṭṭhaṃ katvā passasantova phaṇaṃ karitvā jahati. Evaṃ jahitvā yenakāmaṃ pakkamati.
同样地,这位比丘若想舍弃此岸与彼岸,也以四种方式舍之:住于同类中、厌恶、依靠、用力。对比丘而言,所谓“同类”,依“已生于圣生”之说,即是戒。故有言:“具慧之人,立于戒”。如此,这位住于同类中的比丘,对于那分为自身、他身等类别的此岸与彼岸,视之如同旧皮般引生苦恼,通过处处观察过患而厌离它,依靠善知识,生起名为“增上正精进”的力量,依“日夜经行、宴坐,令心离诸障碍法”之教,将昼夜分为六时而精勤努力。恰如蛇卷起尾巴,他结跏趺坐;恰如蛇呼气,他亦于不懈怠的精进中努力;恰如蛇昂起头,他亦生起智慧的光辉;恰如蛇舍去皮,他亦舍弃此岸与彼岸。舍弃之后,犹如蛇蜕去皮后随心所欲地离去,这位卸下重担的比丘,便朝向无余涅槃界的方向而去。显示巴利原文
Evameva ayampi bhikkhu orapāraṃ jahitukāmo catubbidhena jahati sajātiyaṃ ṭhito jigucchanto nissāya thāmenāti. Sajāti nāma bhikkhuno ‘‘ariyāya jātiyā jāto’’ti (ma. ni. 2.351) vacanato sīlaṃ. Tenevāha ‘‘sīle patiṭṭhāya naro sapañño’’ti (saṃ. ni. 1.23, 192). Evametissaṃ sajātiyaṃ ṭhito bhikkhu taṃ sakattabhāvādibhedaṃ orapāraṃ jiṇṇapurāṇattacamiva taṃ dukkhaṃ janentaṃ tattha tattha ādīnavadassanena jigucchanto kalyāṇamitte nissāya adhimattasammāvāyāmasaṅkhātaṃ thāmaṃ janetvā ‘‘divasaṃ caṅkamena nisajjāya āvaraṇīyehi dhammehi cittaṃ parisodhetī’’ti (a. ni. 3.16; 4.37) vuttanayena rattindivaṃ chadhā vibhajitvā ghaṭento vāyamanto urago viya vaṅkaṃ naṅguṭṭhaṃ pallaṅkaṃ ābhujitvā urago viya passasanto ayampi asithilaparakkamatāya vāyamanto uragova phaṇaṃ karitvā ayampi ñāṇavipphāraṃ janetvā uragova tacaṃ orapāraṃ jahati, jahitvā ca urago viya ohitataco yenakāmaṃ pakkamati, ayampi ohitabhāro anupādisesanibbānadhātudisaṃ pakkamatīti.
90 “Bhavanti”一词,指那些根已深固、转为青绿色且正在生长的幼树。“Ahuvu”一词,则指那些已长大耸立的大树、灌木等。“Bhavanti”释为“出生、增长”,“Ahuvu”释为“已出生、已增长”。“Rāsī”指纯粹的八法之聚。“Bhūtānaṃ”指依此方式而得名的那些八法。即使说“众生之村落”,由于离开部分即无整体,所谓“众生”就是指那些草木、藤蔓等本身。也有说:“草木等植木,扎根于大地、呈现绿色后,为天神所守护,因为是众生的住处,故称为‘众生之村落’。”“Rukkhādīnaṃ”(树木等)中的“等”字,应知包含药草、灌木、藤蔓等。显示巴利原文
90.Bhavantīti iminā viruḷhamūle nīlabhāvaṃ āpajjitvā vaḍḍhamānake taruṇagacche dasseti. Ahuvunti iminā pana vaḍḍhitvā ṭhite mahante rukkhagacchādike dasseti. Bhavantīti imassa vivaraṇaṃ ‘‘jāyanti vaḍḍhantī’’ti, ahuvunti imassa ‘‘jātā vaḍḍhitā’’ti. Rāsīti suddhaṭṭhakadhammasamūho. Bhūtānanti tathāladdhasamaññānaṃ aṭṭhadhammānaṃ. ‘‘Bhūtānaṃ gāmo’’ti vuttepi avayavavinimuttassa samudāyassa abhāvato bhūtasaññitā teyeva tiṇarukkhalatādayo gayhanti. ‘‘Bhūmiyaṃ patiṭṭhahitvā haritabhāvamāpannā rukkhagacchādayo devatāhi pariggayhanti, tasmā bhūtānaṃ nivāsaṭṭhānatāya bhūtānaṃ gāmo’’tipi vadanti. Rukkhādīnanti ādi-saddena osadhigacchalatādayo veditabbā.
难道树木等因无心识,就不能视为生命吗?应知无心识,是由于没有活动、即使被砍断也能再生、属于不同种类,以及不包含在四生当中。然而,增长也见于珊瑚、石盐等,故不能作为有生命的理由。它们对境的执取仅是假设,如同梦中的幻象,同样,其所谓“胎愿”等也是如此。那么,为何以砍伐等因缘制立波逸提罪?是为了随顺沙门行仪,以及为了保护居住其中的众生。因此说:“愚人于树中起生命想”等。显示巴利原文
Nanu ca rukkhādayo cittarahitatāya na jīvā, cittarahitatā ca paripphandābhāvato chinnepi ruhanato visadisajātikabhāvato catuyoniapariyāpannato ca veditabbā, vuḍḍhi pana pavāḷasilālavaṇānampi vijjatīti na tesaṃ jīvabhāve kāraṇaṃ, visayaggahaṇañca nesaṃ parikappanāmattaṃ supanaṃ viya ciñcādīnaṃ, tathā dohaḷādayo, tattha kasmā bhūtagāmassa chedanādipaccayā pācittiyaṃ vuttanti? Samaṇasāruppato taṃnivāsasattānurakkhaṇato ca. Tenevāha ‘‘jīvasaññino hi moghapurisā manussā rukkhasmi’’ntiādi.
91 关于“从根出生”等,其含义在锡兰注释中以如上后文将述的方式说明,故说“虽如此……并不相符”。“Vijāta”一词在此处是省略了前缀“vi-”而示,故说“vijātāni”(已生者)。“Vijāta”一词,如同“已生产的妇女”等中的用法,是表示“已生产”的词语,故说“pasūtāni”(已生产者)。而所谓“生产”,在此是指已生出叶与根,故说“nibbattapaṇṇamūlāni”(已生出叶与根者)。以此阐明:“已生出叶与根的种子,才归入有情聚的范畴,而用于这些的‘bījajāta’(种子所生)一词,依惯用法也用于树木等。”然而,在前一种释义中,只有从种子出生的树木、藤蔓等才被称为有情聚。显示巴利原文
91. ‘‘Mūle jāyantī’’tiādīsu attho upari attanā vuccamānappakārena sīhaḷaṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttoti āha ‘‘evaṃ santepi…pe… na samentī’’ti. Vijāta-saddo idha vi-saddalopaṃ katvā niddiṭṭhoti āha ‘‘vijātānī’’ti. Vijāta-saddo ca ‘‘vijātā itthī’’tiādīsu viya pasūtavacanoti āha ‘‘pasūtānī’’ti. Pasūti ca nāmettha nibbattapaṇṇamūlatāti āha ‘‘nibbattapaṇṇamūlānī’’ti. Iminā imaṃ dīpeti ‘‘nibbattapaṇṇamūlāni bījāni bhūtagāmasaṅkhameva gacchanti, tesu ca vattamāno bījajāta-saddo ruḷhīvasena rukkhādīsupi vattatī’’ti. Purimasmiṃ atthavikappe pana bījehi jātānaṃ rukkhalatādīnaṃyeva bhūtagāmatā vuttā.
“显示它们”意指显示那些种子。在“根种子”等中,根本身就是种子,故称根种子;其余诸项同理。“果种子”即节种子。由于在众缘和合时能生起相似的果,为殊胜之因,“种子”一词通常用于具有生长能力的坚实之果。为成就此义,有时也用于根等,因此为从根等中简别,便用“种子”一词称为“种种子”,犹如说“色、色”“苦、苦”一样。由种子所生的种子被显示,这是以果的转喻来显示因,即阐明此义。显示巴利原文
Tāni dassentoti tāni bījāni dassento. Mūlabījantiādīsu mūlameva bījaṃ mūlabījaṃ. Sesesupi eseva nayo. Phaḷubījanti pabbabījaṃ. Paccayantarasamavāye sadisaphaluppattiyā visesakāraṇabhāvato viruhanasamatthe sāraphale niruḷho bīja-saddo. Tadatthasaṃsiddhiyā mūlādīsupi kesuci pavattatīti mūlādito nivattanatthaṃ ekena bījasaddena visesetvā vuttaṃ ‘‘bījabīja’’nti ‘‘rūparūpaṃ, dukkhadukkha’’nti ca yathā. Bījato nibbattena bījaṃ dassitanti kāriyopacārena kāraṇaṃ dassitanti dīpeti.
92 “于种子而作种子想”——此处为说明以因的转喻而说果,故说“其中,如同……”等。“除去草木已”意指从草木中脱离、分离。“凡是种子名为草木”是就“那些既是种子又是已生的”这一含义而说。其中,“凡是种子”指已长出叶和根的种子。“于彼种子”即于那称为草木的种子。应知,如同“种子类”一词依惯用于树木等,“种子”一词的用法也应知是依惯用。“如文”即依巴利原文。显示巴利原文
92.Bīje bījasaññīti ettha kāraṇūpacārena kāriyaṃ vuttanti dassento ‘‘tattha yathā’’tiādimāha. Bhūtagāmaparimocanaṃ katvāti bhūtagāmato mocetvā, viyojetvāti attho. Yaṃ bījaṃ bhūtagāmo nāma hotīti bījāni ca tāni jātāni cāti vuttamatthaṃ sandhāya vadati. Tattha yaṃ bījanti yaṃ nibbattapaṇṇamūlaṃ bījaṃ. Tasmiṃ bījeti tasmiṃ bhūtagāmasaññite bīje. Ettha ca bījajāta-saddassa viya ruḷhīvasena rukkhādīsu bīja-saddassapi pavatti veditabbā. Yathārutanti yathāpāḷi.
“于任何处”指在根、顶端或中部。“故意拔起则不允许”──于此,即使知道身上附着有东西而从水中站起,由于没有“我要把它拔出来”的想法,是允许的。“被拔出的”指被拔起的。说“归入种子类”是因为已从草木中脱离之故。以“无尾的”一词摄取了芥子大小的。这确实是那种苔藓类的名称。由于根与叶不完整,故说“名为不完整的草木”。“因为不是草木之根”──在此,“草木为根”指草木是它的根、因,或草木的根是因,称为草木根。因为种子类确实从草木生起,又是草木的因,而此不完整者并非如此,故说“因为不是草木之根”。由于属于那一类,故说“它为种子类所摄”。这也是基于“因为不是草木之根”中首先所述的意义而说。虽然棕榈、椰子等的树桩因不再向上生长而不是草木的因,但因其从已算作草木、已长出叶和根的种子所生,故名为从草木所生,因此归入种子类。显示巴利原文
Yattha katthacīti mūle agge majjhe vā. Sañcicca ukkhipituṃ na vaṭṭatīti ettha sacepi sarīre laggabhāvaṃ jānantova udakato uṭṭhahati, ‘‘taṃ uddharissāmī’’ti saññāya abhāvato vaṭṭati. Uppāṭitānīti uddhaṭāni. Bījagāme saṅgahaṃ gacchantīti bhūtagāmato parimocitattā vuttaṃ. Anantaka-ggahaṇena sāsapamattikā gahitā. Nāmañhetaṃ tassā sevālajātiyā . Mūlapaṇṇānaṃ asampuṇṇattā ‘‘asampuṇṇabhūtagāmo nāmā’’ti vuttaṃ. Abhūtagāmamūlattāti ettha bhūtagāmo mūlaṃ kāraṇaṃ etassāti bhūtagāmamūlo, bhūtagāmassa vā mūlaṃ kāraṇanti bhūtagāmamūlaṃ. Bījagāmo hi nāma bhūtagāmato sambhavati, bhūtagāmassa ca kāraṇaṃ hoti, ayaṃ pana tādiso na hotīti ‘‘abhūtagāmamūlattā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tatraṭṭhakattā vuttaṃ ‘‘so bījagāmena saṅgahito’’ti. Idañca ‘‘abhūtagāmamūlattā’’ti ettha paṭhamaṃ vuttaatthasambhavato vuttaṃ. Kiñcāpi hi tālanāḷikerādīnaṃ khāṇu uddhaṃ avaḍḍhanato bhūtagāmassa kāraṇaṃ na hoti, tathāpi bhūtagāmasaṅkhyupagatanibbattapaṇṇamūlabījato sambhūtattā bhūtagāmato uppanno nāma hotīti bījagāmena saṅgahaṃ gacchati.
说了“于绿色嫩芽”之后,便阐明“当蓝绿色显现时”,意为当生起与蓝绿色叶片相似的颜色时。或者也应取“当蓝色显现时”的读法。“归入无根的草木类”,这是就椰子特有的情形而说。他们说:“饮水罐等外壁所生的苔藓,因不立于水中,又随顺种子类,故成为恶作事之因。”“即便是耳状的,也微不足道”,指即使是蓝绿色的,也微不足道。“Seleyyaka”是一种从石而生的芳香种类。他们说:“由于说到‘破坏树皮’,所以树上所生的一切菌类,若不破坏树皮而从顶端截取,是可以拿取的。”“从树脱离而站立”——在此他们说:“即使少许附着在树上而站立,但若拿取时不破坏树皮,是许可的。”“从活树则不允许”——在此也应知,若不破坏树皮而从顶端削取,是许可的。“以手的不安分”指以手的无节制、手的轻率。“饮水不应存放”,这是就为自己取用的水而说。但若最初是为未受具足戒者取用,之后从他那里得到,便没有“不应存放”的限制。他们说:“由于经中说‘哪些树的枝条能生根’,因此,对于那些枝条不能生根的树,没有作净的必要。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Aṅkure harite’’ti vatvā tameva vibhāveti ‘‘nīlapaṇṇavaṇṇe jāte’’ti, nīlapaṇṇassa vaṇṇasadise vaṇṇe jāteti attho. ‘‘Nīlavaṇṇe jāte’’ti vā pāṭho gahetabbo. Amūlakabhūtagāme saṅgahaṃ gacchatīti nāḷikerassa āveṇikaṃ katvā vadati. ‘‘Pānīyaghaṭādīnaṃ bahi sevālo udake aṭṭhitattā bījagāmānulomattā ca dukkaṭavatthū’’ti vadanti. Kaṇṇakampi abbohārikamevāti nīlavaṇṇampi abbohārikameva. Seleyyakaṃ nāma silāya sambhūtā ekā sugandhajāti. ‘‘Rukkhattacaṃ vikopetīti vuttattā rukkhe jātaṃ yaṃ kiñci chattakaṃ rukkhattacaṃ avikopetvā matthakato chinditvā gahetuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti vadanti. Rukkhato muccitvā tiṭṭhatīti ettha ‘‘yadipi kiñcimattaṃ rukkhe allīnā hutvā tiṭṭhati, rukkhato gayhamāno pana rukkhacchaviṃ na vikopeti, vaṭṭatī’’ti vadanti. Allarukkhato na vaṭṭatīti etthāpi rukkhattacaṃ avikopetvā matthakato tacchetvā gahetuṃ vaṭṭatīti veditabbaṃ. Hatthakukkuccenāti hatthānaṃ asaṃyatabhāvena, hatthacāpallenāti vuttaṃ hoti. Pānīyaṃ na vāsetabbanti idaṃ attano atthāya nāmitaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Kevalaṃ anupasampannassa atthāya nāmite pana pacchā tato labhitvā na vāsetabbanti natthi. ‘‘Yesaṃ rukkhānaṃ sākhā ruhatīti vuttattā yesaṃ sākhā na ruhati, tattha kappiyakaraṇakiccaṃ natthī’’ti vadanti.
93 93.“以五种沙门净法”:指以五种沙门的惯用方式。虽然种子仅被火触及、仅被指甲等刮划,并不失去能生长的性质,然而如此行作之后,对沙门即成为净,因此“火烧”等便被称为沙门惯用方式。所以,意思是:我允许以这些沙门惯用方式为手段而受用果实。即使是非种子和已除去种子的种子,由于是施设的规定,也仅以“沙门惯用方式”之名而被称呼。或者,应知此处的意思是:正因为火烧等五种是净的方式,所以我允许以这五种称为沙门净法的因缘而受用果实。在“火烧”等语中,也有读作“paricita”的。“非种子”指嫩芒果等果实。“已除去种子的种子”指芒果、菠萝蜜等,即除去种子、分开后可以受用的。“说了‘净’之后才应做”——由于这是对作净者所应做方式的说明,因此不应理解为比丘即使不说也可以做。又因为“应令作净”的使役形式首先被说到,所以应理解为:只有在比丘说了“作净吧”之后,未受具足戒者说了“净”之后,才应作火烧等。他们说:“‘净’这个词可以用任何语言来说。”由“说了‘净’之后才应做”一句可知,应先说“净”,再作以火等触等。显示巴利原文
93.Pañcahisamaṇakappehīti pañcahi samaṇavohārehi. Kiñcāpi hi bījānaṃ agginā phuṭṭhamattena nakhādīhi vilikhanamattena ca aviruḷhīdhammatā na hoti, tathāpi evaṃ kateyeva samaṇānaṃ kappatīti aggiparijitādayo samaṇavohārā nāma jātā, tasmā tehi samaṇavohārehi karaṇabhūtehi phalaṃ paribhuñjituṃ anujānāmīti adhippāyo. Abījanibbaṭṭabījānipi samaṇānaṃ kappantīti paññattapaṇṇattibhāvato samaṇavohārāicceva saṅkhaṃ gatāni. Atha vā aggiparijitādīnaṃ pañcannaṃ kappiyabhāvatoyeva pañcahi samaṇakappiyabhāvasaṅkhātehi kāraṇehi phalaṃ paribhuñjituṃ anujānāmīti evamettha adhippāyo veditabbo. Aggiparijitantiādīsu ‘‘paricita’’ntipi paṭhanti. Abījaṃ nāma taruṇambaphalādi. Nibbaṭṭabījaṃ nāma ambapanasādi, yaṃ bījaṃ nibbaṭṭetvā visuṃ katvā paribhuñjituṃ sakkā hoti. ‘‘Kappiya’’nti vatvāva kātabbanti yo kappiyaṃ karoti, tena kattabbākārasseva vuttattā bhikkhunā avuttepi kātuṃ vaṭṭatīti na gahetabbaṃ. Puna ‘‘kappiyaṃ kāretabba’’nti kārāpanassa paṭhamameva kathitattā bhikkhunā ‘‘kappiyaṃ karohī’’ti vutteyeva anupasampannena ‘‘kappiya’’nti vatvā aggiparijitādi kātabbanti gahetabbaṃ. ‘‘Kappiyanti vacanaṃ pana yāya kāyaci bhāsāya vattuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti vadanti. ‘‘Kappiyanti vatvāva kātabba’’nti vacanato paṭhamaṃ ‘‘kappiya’’nti vatvā pacchā aggiādinā phusanādi kātabbanti veditabbaṃ. ‘‘Paṭhamaṃ aggiṃ nikkhipitvā nakhādinā vā vijjhitvā taṃ anuddharitvāva ‘kappiya’nti vattumpi vaṭṭatī’’ti vadanti.
在“一粒种子”等句中,他们说:“即便意图是‘我只做一粒’,由于整体连贯性,一切也都成为已做。”在“刺穿木材”中,他们说:“即使明知而刺穿,或令刺穿,也是可以的。”在“刺穿饭粒”中,同理。他们说:“刺穿那饭粒则不可,因为绳等被归入容器类。”在“与胡椒等混合”中,应知整体连贯性是依与饭粒的关联,而非依果实彼此之间的关联。“令破开后,应使作净”,是因为从种子脱离的壳属于容器类。显示巴利原文
Ekasmiṃ bīje vātiādīsu ‘‘ekaṃyeva kāremīti adhippāye satipi ekābaddhattā sabbaṃ katameva hotī’’ti vadanti. Dāruṃ vijjhatīti ettha ‘‘jānitvāpi vijjhati vā vijjhāpeti vā, vaṭṭatiyevā’’ti vadanti. Bhattasitthe vijjhatīti etthāpi eseva nayo. ‘‘Taṃ vijjhati, na vaṭṭatīti rajjuādīnaṃ bhājanagatikattā’’ti vadanti. Maricapakkādīhi missetvāti ettha bhattasitthasambandhavasena ekābaddhatā veditabbā, na phalānaṃyeva aññamaññaṃ sambandhavasena. Bhindāpetvā kappiyaṃ kārāpetabbanti bījato muttassa kaṭāhassa bhājanagatikattā vuttaṃ.
“令出”即令那位比丘出去。“若此于彼为随顺”,可能的意图是:即便是为守护住处而开许的施火等,自己也可为之,仅此便是“此于彼为随顺”,其用意或在于此。施火与作护卫,为护自己或他人的住处,确实可行。因此,若经文于此为随顺,则“自己不可,他人方可”的差别又从何而来?故说“自己不可……不可得”。此处其余内容显而易见。而“有生命的植物、有生命植物想、破坏或令破坏”是此处的三支。显示巴利原文
Nikkhāmetunti taṃ bhikkhuṃ nikkhāmetuṃ. ‘‘Sace etassa anuloma’’nti senāsanarakkhaṇatthāya anuññātampi paṭaggidānādiṃ attanāpi kātuṃ vaṭṭatīti ettakeneva idampi etassa anulomanti evamadhippāyo siyā. Paṭaggidānaṃ parittakaraṇañca attano parassa vā senāsanarakkhaṇatthāya vaṭṭatiyeva. Tasmā sace tassa suttassa etaṃ anulomaṃ siyā, attano na vaṭṭati, aññassa vaṭṭatīti ayaṃ viseso kuto labbhatīti āha ‘‘attano na vaṭṭati…pe… na sakkā laddhu’’nti. Sesamettha uttānameva. Bhūtagāmo, bhūtagāmasaññitā, vikopanaṃ vā vikopāpanaṃ vāti imāni panettha tīṇi aṅgāni.
2. 异语学处解释显示巴利原文
2. Aññavādakasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
94-98 94-98. 于第二(学处),“以他语”是指:以与举罪者向被举罪者说明过失的言语不同的其他言语来回避。或者,“以他事回避他事”意为以其他理由回避其他理由,此处应如是解:举罪者向被举罪者指出过失的理由,对方却以显示举罪无据的其他理由来回拒,此即所说之义。“回避”即依覆藏而行、转起的意思。又或,“行”一词因词根多义,本身即具覆藏义,故说“覆藏”。“犯了何罪?”等,巴利中显示不解答举罪,而以扰乱方式,以他事回避他事。此外,尚应了知一种超出巴利文的以他事回避他事:解答举罪后,以将话题转向外方的方式转起。例如,被问“你犯了某罪”时,答“我去过华氏城”;再被诘“非问汝华氏城之行,乃问罪”时,答“从彼处我去了王舍城”;被言“去王舍城或婆罗门家,你犯有罪”时,答“于彼处我得猪肉”等,如是向外散乱话题者,即名为“以他事回避他事”。显示巴利原文
94-98. Dutiye aññaṃ vacananti yaṃ codakena cuditakassa dosavibhāvanavacanaṃ vuttaṃ, taṃ tato aññeneva vacanena paṭicarati. Atha vā aññenaññaṃ paṭicaratīti aññena kāraṇena aññaṃ kāraṇaṃ paṭicaratīti evamettha attho veditabbo, yaṃ codakena cuditakassa dosavibhāvanakāraṇaṃ vuttaṃ, tato aññena codanāya amūlakabhāvadīpakena kāraṇena paṭicaratīti vuttaṃ hoti. Paṭicaratīti ca paṭicchādanavasena carati, pavattatīti attho. Paṭicchādanattho eva vā carati-saddo anekatthattā dhātūnaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘paṭicchādetī’’ti. Ko āpannotiādinā pāḷiyaṃ codanaṃ avissajjetvā vikkhepāpajjanavasena aññena aññaṃ paṭicaraṇaṃ dassitaṃ. Aparampi pana codanaṃ vissajjetvā bahiddhā kathāapanāmavasena pavattaṃ pāḷimuttakaṃ aññenaññaṃ paṭicaraṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. ‘‘Itthannāmaṃ āpattiṃ āpannosī’’ti puṭṭho ‘‘pāṭaliputtaṃ gatomhī’’ti vatvā puna ‘‘na tava pāṭaliputtagamanaṃ pucchāma, āpattiṃ pucchāmā’’ti vutte ‘‘tato rājagahaṃ gatomhī’’ti vatvā ‘‘rājagahaṃ vā yāhi brāhmaṇagahaṃ vā, āpattiṃ āpannosī’’ti vutte ‘‘tattha me sūkaramaṃsaṃ laddha’’ntiādīni vatvāva kathaṃ bahiddhā vikkhipantopi hi ‘‘aññenaññaṃ paṭicarati’’cceva saṅkhaṃ gacchati.
那种以他事回避他事的方式而转起的言语,即搁置所问之义而说其他,故称“异语者”,因此说“此是以他事回避他事之名”。“此是默然者之名”即是默然之名,或此即原本文句。“令承担异语者”即令其承担异语者羯磨,或令承担现在正被执行之羯磨所成立的异语者性,此为义趣。“令承担恼害者”中,亦应视为令承担恼害者羯磨或恼害者性,如是可解其义。显示巴利原文
Yadetaṃ aññena aññaṃ paṭicaraṇavasena pavattavacanaṃ, tadeva pucchitamatthaṃ ṭhapetvā aññaṃ vadatīti aññavādakanti āha ‘‘aññenaññaṃ paṭicaraṇassetaṃ nāma’’nti. Tuṇhībhūtassetaṃ nāmanti tuṇhībhāvassetaṃ nāmaṃ, ayameva vā pāṭho. Aññavādakaṃ āropetūti aññavādakakammaṃ āropetu, aññavādakattaṃ vā idāni kariyamānena kammena āropetūti attho. Vihesakaṃ āropetūti etthāpi vihesakakammaṃ vihesakabhāvaṃ vā āropetūti evamattho daṭṭhabbo.
当比丘尚未被确立为异语者时所犯的恶作,适用于巴利中所载以他事回避他事的情形。而依注释书所载、超越巴利文本的以他事回避他事的情形,若尚未被确立为异语者,则以妄语犯波逸提;若已被确立,便以此学处犯波逸提,应当如此了知。然而,有些长老说:“在已被确立为异语者时,既犯妄语波逸提,又犯此学处之波逸提,共犯两个波逸提。”此说应经审察后予以采纳。至于“最初犯者无犯”一句,也应视为是针对巴利中所载以他事回避他事的情形而说,或为显明依此学处不犯的情况。其余文义,显而易见。通过如法羯磨而被确立、正就罪或事被质问、以覆藏之心而以他事回避他事或保持沉默,是构成此处的三个条件。显示巴利原文
Anāropite aññavādake vuttadukkaṭaṃ pāḷiyaṃ āgataaññenaññaṃpaṭicaraṇavasena yujjati . Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ āgatena pana pāḷimuttakaaññenaññaṃpaṭicaraṇavasena anāropite aññavādake musāvādena pācittiyaṃ, āropite imināva pācittiyanti veditabbaṃ. Keci pana ‘‘āropite aññavādake musāvādena iminā ca pācittiyadvayaṃ hotī’’ti vadanti, taṃ vīmaṃsitvā gahetabbaṃ. Yā sā ādikammikassa anāpatti vuttā, sāpi pāḷiyaṃ āgataaññenaññaṃpaṭicaraṇavasena vuttāti daṭṭhabbā, iminā sikkhāpadena anāpattidassanatthaṃ vā. Sesaṃ uttānameva. Dhammakammena āropitatā, āpattiyā vā vatthunā vā anuyuñjiyamānatā, chādetukāmatāya aññenaññaṃ paṭicaraṇaṃ vā tuṇhībhāvo vāti imāni panettha tīṇi aṅgāni.
3. 嫌责学处注释显示巴利原文
3. Ujjhāpanakasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
103 103. 第三学处中,《词根读本》将“jhe”音列为“思惟”义,因此说“令思惟为低劣”等。而且,由于词根多义,应知此处也有“观察”之义。正如在“以字母令读诵”等处(波逸提第46条)那样,此处的“chandāya”是因性别的颠倒而如此表述,实际意义即“以chandena”(以欲)。显示巴利原文
103. Tatiye dhātupāṭhe jhe-saddo cintāyaṃ paṭhitoti āha ‘‘lāmakato vā cintāpentī’’tiādi. Ayameva ca anekatthattā dhātūnaṃ olokanatthopi hotīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. ‘‘Akkharāya vācetī’’tiādīsu (pāci. 46) viya ‘‘chandāyā’’ti liṅgavipallāsavasena vuttanti āha ‘‘chandenā’’ti.
105 105. “以何言语”是指以“某某人出于欲而做此事”等这样的言语。“又以何而嫌责”是指以“某某人出于欲……”等这样的言语,于各处比丘们所能听见的范围内站立,而广为宣扬其过失。显示巴利原文
105.Yena vacanenāti yena ‘‘chandāya itthannāmo idaṃ nāma karotī’’tiādivacanena. Yena ca khiyyantīti yena ‘‘chandāya itthannāmo’’tiādivacanena tattha tattha bhikkhūnaṃ savanūpacāre ṭhatvā avaṇṇaṃ pakāsenti.
106 “令其他未受具足戒者嫌责”是指借助其他未受具足戒者而令其嫌责。“或在其面前嫌责他”是指在那位未受具足戒者面前,嫌责那位被僧团认可为受具足戒者,或宣说其过失。“未受具足戒者被僧团认可”中,曾受认可者被称为受认可。因此说“虽然”等。由于嫌责与抱怨正是基于妄语而生起,所以最初犯者不犯,应知这是为了显示在波逸提处和恶作处依此学处亦无犯。如此,令嫌责者与抱怨者于一刹那各犯二罪,此义已成立。或者,应知此学处是先于妄语而制定的。此处其余内容容易明了。对象由如法羯磨而受认可、已受具足戒、无恶行,欲说其过失,并在受具足戒者面前嫌责或抱怨,是为此处的六支。显示巴利原文
106.Aññaṃ anupasampannaṃ ujjhāpetīti aññena anupasampannena ujjhāpeti. Tassa vā taṃ santike khiyyatīti tassa anupasampannassa santike taṃ saṅghena sammataṃ upasampannaṃ khiyyati, avaṇṇaṃ vadanto vā pakāseti. Anupasampannaṃ saṅghena sammatanti ettha sammatapubbo sammatoti vutto. Tenāha ‘‘kiñcāpī’’tiādi. Yasmā ujjhāpanaṃ khiyyanañca musāvādavaseneva pavattaṃ, tasmā ādikammikassa anāpattīti pācittiyaṭṭhāne dukkaṭaṭṭhāne ca imināva anāpattidassanatthaṃ vuttanti gahetabbaṃ. Evañca katvā ujjhāpentassa khiyyantassa ca ekakkhaṇe dve dve āpattiyo hontīti āpannaṃ. Atha vā īdisaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ musāvādato paṭhamaṃ paññattanti gahetabbaṃ. Sesamettha uttānameva. Dhammakammena sammatatā, upasampannatā, agatigamanābhāvo , tassa avaṇṇakāmatā, yassa santike vadati, tassa upasampannatā, ujjhāpanaṃ vā khiyyanaṃ vāti imāni panettha cha aṅgāni.
4. 第一坐卧处学处的解释显示巴利原文
4. Paṭhamasenāsanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
108-110 第四学处中,“冬季雨”即指冬季之雨。“未知”意为不熟悉、不著名。“在棚舍或树下”的说法,三部《结句》都说“在露地也可以放置”。“行于行处”即前往行处。“八个月”——以此说明,即使雨季的四个月天不下雨,亦属禁止,故说“由‘八个月’之说……不可放置”。其中,“四个月”指雨季的四个月。以“冬季雨之约定”说明:即使在开许的八个月中,若某地冬季下雨,则另外四个月也被禁止,故说“由‘冬季雨之约定’之说”等。由此阐明:若某地冬季下雨,则该处禁止八个月、开许四个月;若某地仅在雨季下雨,则该处禁止四个月、开许八个月。显示巴利原文
108-110. Catutthe himavassenāti himameva vuttaṃ. Apaññāteti appatīte, appasiddheti attho. ‘‘Maṇḍape vā rukkhamūle vāti vacanato vivaṭaṅgaṇepi nikkhipituṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti tīsupi gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ. Gocarappasutāti gocaraṭṭhānaṃ paṭipannā. ‘‘Aṭṭha māse’’ti iminā vassānaṃ cātumāsaṃ cepi devo na vassati, paṭikkhittamevāti āha ‘‘aṭṭha māseti vacanato…pe… nikkhipituṃ na vaṭṭatiyevā’’ti. Tattha cattāro māseti vassānassa cattāro māse. Avassikasaṅketeti iminā anuññātepi aṭṭha māse yattha hemante devo vassati, tattha aparepi cattāro māsā paṭikkhittāti āha ‘‘avassikasaṅketeti vacanato’’tiādi. Iminā imaṃ dīpeti ‘‘yasmiṃ dese hemante devo vassati, tattha aṭṭha māse paṭikkhipitvā cattāro māsā anuññātā. Yattha pana vassāneyeva vassati, tattha cattāro māse paṭikkhipitvā aṭṭha māsā anuññātā’’ti.
依此理趣,应知在中部地区,凡冬季有雪雨之处,同样禁止八个月。因此,雨季时不得在自然露地、漏雨棚舍及树下铺设;冬季时则可在自然露地、漏雨棚舍等处铺设。然而,这仅适用于冬季雪雨不会淋湿坐卧处的地方;热季时也可在自然露地等处铺设,但仅限非时云雨未现之时。至于乌鸦等常栖之树根处,任何时候都不可铺设。于此应如此了知抉择。显示巴利原文
Imināva nayena majjhimapadese yattha hemante himavassaṃ vassati, tatthāpi aṭṭheva māsā paṭikkhittāti veditabbā. Tasmā vassānakāle pakatiajjhokāse ovassakamaṇḍape rukkhamūle ca santharituṃ na vaṭṭati, hemantakāle pakatiajjhokāse ovassakamaṇḍapādīsupi vaṭṭati. Tañca kho yattha himavassena senāsanaṃ na temati, gimhakālepi pakatiajjhokāsādīsu vaṭṭatiyeva, tañca kho akālameghādassane, kākādīnaṃ nibaddhavāsarukkhamūle pana kadācipi na vaṭṭatīti evamettha vinicchayo veditabbo.
然而,世尊已了知此殊胜义理,于最初便制定了学处,故未另说补充制。正因如此,《本母注》(《疑惑度脱》注·第一坐卧处学处释)中说:‘如是,凡于何处、何时不应铺设者,彼一切于此皆归入露地之列。’或者,既然已全面禁止在露地铺设及令铺设,则仅以‘于如是时节、如是处所可安置’的开许便已足够,因此不应理解为学处中另有单独的补充制被提出。然而,在《附随》(《附随》65-67)中,因为是随顺此学处的义理而制,故说‘有一补充制’。显示巴利原文
Imañca pana atthavisesaṃ gahetvā bhagavatā paṭhamameva sikkhāpadaṃ paññattanti visuṃ anupaññatti na vuttā. Teneva hi mātikāṭṭhakathāyaṃ (kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. paṭhamasenāsanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā) vuttaṃ ‘‘iti yattha ca yadā ca santharituṃ na vaṭṭati, taṃ sabbamidha ajjhokāsasaṅkhameva gata’’nti. Atha vā avisesena ajjhokāse santharaṇasantharāpanāni paṭikkhipitvā ‘‘īdise kāle īdise ca padese ṭhapethā’’ti anujānanamatteneva alanti na sikkhāpade visuṃ anupaññatti uddhaṭāti veditabbā. Parivāre (pari. 65-67) pana imasseva sikkhāpadassa anurūpavasena paññattattā ‘‘ekā anupaññattī’’ti vuttaṃ.
“新织者不易速坏”,故说“或新织者”。“覆皮者”指以皮覆盖者。“上等露地住者”——这仅是显示其内心思惟而已,并非说上等露地住者不可拥有衣舍。所谓“随身性”,是指比丘就地将衣物存置。以此说明,唯于彼时无犯;若从衣舍出而往他处,乃至入村乞食者,则有犯。“然而,若施主在布施时即说‘将此价值千金的毯子用作擦脚布’,便可如是用之;因此,若施主施与床、椅等坐卧具时说‘此坐卧具,即便在露地亦可随意使用’,则于一切时皆可放置于露地。”诸师如是说。“应遣使而往”——这是指应说:“若有比丘来此住处安住,便施与他”,然后遣使前往。显示巴利原文
Navavāyimo sīghaṃ na nassatīti āha ‘‘navavāyimo vā’’ti. Onaddhakoti cammena onaddho. Ukkaṭṭhaabbhokāsikoti idaṃ tassa parivitakkadassanamattaṃ, ukkaṭṭhaabbhokāsikassa pana cīvarakuṭi na vaṭṭatīti natthi. Kāyānugatikattāti bhikkhuno tattheva sannihitabhāvaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Iminā ca tasmiṃyeva kāle anāpatti vuttā, cīvarakuṭito nikkhamitvā pana aññattha gacchantassa piṇḍāya pavisantassapi āpattiyeva. ‘‘Yasmā pana dāyakehi dānakāleyeva sahassagghanakampi kambalaṃ ‘pādapuñchaniṃ katvā paribhuñjathā’ti dinnaṃ tatheva paribhuñjituṃ vaṭṭati, tasmā ‘imaṃ mañcapīṭhādisenāsanaṃ abbhokāsepi yathāsukhaṃ paribhuñjathā’ti dāyakehi dinnaṃ ce, sabbasmimpi kāle abbhokāse nikkhipituṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti vadanti. Pesetvā gantabbanti ettha ‘‘yo bhikkhu imaṃ ṭhānaṃ āgantvā vasati, tassa dethā’’ti vatvā pesetabbaṃ.
“了知云层尚未生起的状态”——以此应知,这也表明:即使在热季,若生起了云层,则任何坐卧具如床、椅等,皆不可放置于露地。有人释“面向脚置处”为“面向坐着的人脚落地之处”;另有人释为“面向扫地者脚置之处”;还有人释为“面向脚置处以取沙,为了不使沙向外散落而取沙,故说应取沙”。用手将垃圾取出弃于外——以此表明,不可为了丢弃垃圾而把沙也倒掉。显示巴利原文
Valāhakānaṃ anuṭṭhitabhāvaṃ sallakkhetvāti iminā ca gimhānepi meghe uṭṭhite mañcapīṭhādiṃ yaṃkiñci senāsanaṃ ajjhokāse nikkhipituṃ na vaṭṭatīti dīpitanti veditabbaṃ. ‘‘Pādaṭṭhānābhimukhāti nisīdantānaṃ pādapatanaṭṭhānābhimukha’’nti keci. ‘‘Sammajjantassa pādaṭṭhānābhimukha’’nti apare. ‘‘Bahi vālukāya agamananimittaṃ pādaṭṭhānābhimukhā vālikā haritabbāti vutta’’nti eke . Kacavaraṃ hatthehi gahetvā bahi chaṭṭetabbanti iminā kacavaraṃ chaḍḍessāmīti vālikā na chaḍḍetabbāti dīpeti.
111 “内卷而缚”是指:用芦苇叶等编为辫,再以该辫在两侧展开处大量缠绕,由此处至中部,采用向内抽拉的方式卷缠,于中间收拢后,再横向于各处绑束而成。“得许可而往”是指依前述措辞获得许可而前往。因为依长老之命前往者无犯。“依前所说方式”即如前述“坐已,自行前往”等方式。“往他处”是指越过该道路而前往他处。因立于投石距离之外,故说“应以举足令作”;前往他处时,首举足为恶作,第二举足为波逸提,此为这里的含义。“未恢复原状”即未收摄归位。“于中间集会”指在各各中间处集会。显示巴利原文
111.Anto saṃveṭhetvā baddhanti erakapattādīhi veṇiṃ katvā tāya veṇiyā ubhosu passesu vitthataṭṭhānesu bahuṃ veṭhetvā tato paṭṭhāya yāva majjhaṭṭhānaṃ, tāva anto ākaḍḍhanavasena veṭhetvā majjhe saṅkhipitvā tiriyaṃ tattha tattha bandhitvā kataṃ. Kappaṃ labhitvāti gacchāti vuttavacanena kappaṃ labhitvā. Therassa hi āṇattiyā gacchantassa anāpatti. Purimanayenevāti ‘‘nisīditvā sayaṃ gacchanto’’tiādinā pubbe vuttanayeneva. Aññattha gacchatīti taṃ maggaṃ atikkamitvā aññattha gacchati. Leḍḍupātupacārato bahi ṭhitattā ‘‘pāduddhārena kāretabbo’’ti vuttaṃ, aññattha gacchantassa paṭhamapāduddhāre dukkaṭaṃ, dutiyapāduddhāre pācittiyanti attho. Pākatikaṃ akatvāti appaṭisāmetvā. Antarasannipāteti antarantarā sannipāte.
“仅属常住者的障碍”此处意指:即使客来比丘到来后,什么也不说便坐于彼处,障碍也仅属于常住者。然而在《大护持》论中说:“于其他比丘到来并坐下时”——这是指不论他们是否曾言明“这是我们的”而坐下。《大注释》论中说“犯”即指波逸提罪。但在《大护持》中,由于铺设或令铺设时若未作指示,依据未指示而制戒,故言为恶作。为显示“这是属于诵经者的,这是属于说法者的”这般分别制戒,所以即使在未指示而铺设的情况下,也应以波逸提罪论处,基于此意旨而说“当那人到来并坐下时,障碍属于他”。然而有一些人说:“即使在未指示而铺设的情况下,以说法者理应不被令起立故,应作波逸提罪;而客来比丘中,后至的年长者应被令起立,所以说为恶作。”显示巴利原文
Āvāsikānaṃyeva palibodhoti ettha āgantukehi āgantvā kiñci avatvā tattha nisinnepi āvāsikānaṃyeva palibodhoti adhippāyo. Mahāpaccarivāde pana ‘‘aññesu āgantvā nisinnesū’’ti idaṃ amhākanti vatvā vā avatvā vā nisinnesūti adhippāyo. Mahāaṭṭhakathāvāde ‘‘āpattī’’ti pācittiyameva vuttaṃ. Mahāpaccariyaṃ pana santharaṇasantharāpane sati pācittiyena bhavitabbanti anāṇattiyā paññattattā dukkaṭaṃ vuttaṃ. ‘‘Idaṃ ussārakassa, idaṃ dhammakathikassā’’ti visuṃ paññattattā anāṇattiyā paññattepi pācittiyeneva bhavitabbanti adhippāyena ‘‘tasmiṃ āgantvā nisinne tassa palibodho’’ti vuttaṃ. Keci pana vadanti ‘‘anāṇattiyā paññattepi dhammakathikassa anuṭṭhāpanīyattā pācittiyena bhavitabbaṃ, āgantukassa pana pacchā āgatehi vuḍḍhatarehi uṭṭhāpetabbattā dukkaṭaṃ vutta’’nti.
112 “应铺设于地面”指:若有毡毯,则铺于毡毯之上;若无,则应铺在干净的地面上。应当了知,关于狮皮等的禁止,仅限携带——显示巴利原文
112.Bhūmiyaṃ attharitabbāti cimilikāya sati tassā upari, asati suddhabhūmiyaṃ attharitabbā. Sīhacammādīnaṃ pariharaṇeyeva paṭikkhepo veditabboti iminā –
诸比丘,不应持有大兽皮,即狮皮、虎皮、豹皮。若持者,犯恶作。显示巴利原文
‘‘Na , bhikkhave, mahācammāni dhāretabbāni sīhacammaṃ byagghacammaṃ dīpicammaṃ, yo dhāreyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti (mahāva. 255) –
如此阐明《犍度》圣典所说之意趣。其意为:“床内有所铺设,床外亦有所铺设”——在此事缘中,由于学处的制立,禁止的是铺设于床座后使用,而作为铺地物使用则未被禁止。若如此,为何说“禁止仅限于携带”?为了说明:如同依“诸比丘,我允许一切殿堂受用物”(《小品》320)之语,即便在个人住所中,依住所受用而开许的金瓶等物,虽可受用,却绝不可将其完全据为己有后受用;同样,此物虽可作为铺地物受用,但不可将其据为己有后带往各寺院受用,故说“应知禁止仅限于携带”。木制凳,即木板所制的凳子。脚踏板,即放置未洗之脚者。于露地煮染料后……应收起:在此,若染料工作已完成而无剩余,则应收起。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ vuttāya khandhakapāḷiyā adhippāyaṃ vibhāveti. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – ‘‘antopi mañce paññattāni honti, bahipi mañce paññattāni hontī’’ti imasmiṃ vatthusmiṃ sikkhāpadassa paññattattā mañcapīṭhesu attharitvā paribhogoyeva paṭikkhitto, bhūmattharaṇavasena paribhogo pana appaṭikkhittoti. Yadi evaṃ ‘‘pariharaṇeyeva paṭikkhepo’’ti idaṃ kasmā vuttanti? Yathā ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, sabbaṃ pāsādaparibhoga’’nti (cūḷava. 320) vacanato puggalikepi senāsane senāsanaparibhogavasena niyamitaṃ suvaṇṇaghaṭādikaṃ paribhuñjituṃ vaṭṭamānampi kevalaṃ attano santakaṃ katvā paribhuñjituṃ na vaṭṭati, evamidaṃ bhūmattharaṇavasena paribhuñjiyamānampi attano santakaṃ katvā taṃ taṃ vihāraṃ haritvā paribhuñjituṃ na vaṭṭatīti dassanatthaṃ ‘‘pariharaṇeyeva paṭikkhepo veditabbo’’ti vuttaṃ. Dārumayapīṭhanti phalakamayameva pīṭhaṃ vuttaṃ. Pādakathalikanti adhotapādaṭṭhapanakaṃ. Ajjhokāse rajanaṃ pacitvā…pe… paṭisāmetabbanti ettha theve asati rajanakamme niṭṭhite paṭisāmetabbaṃ.
113 113. 有人说:“因为说‘比丘、沙弥或净人是有惭者’,故不可向无惭者告辞而离去。”关于“晒晾时离去”,在此有人说:“虽然对于‘应走多远’并无限定,但仍不应超过一掷土块的距离而走得太远。”其余在此是显而易见的。然而,在此有五项要素:床座等为僧物、在所描述特征的处所铺设或令铺设、无障碍、无危难、超过一掷土块之距。显示巴利原文
113.‘‘Bhikkhu vā sāmaṇero vā ārāmiko vā lajjī hotīti vuttattā alajjiṃ āpucchitvā gantuṃ na vaṭṭatī’’ti vadanti. Otāpento gacchatīti ettha ‘‘kiñcāpi ‘ettakaṃ dūraṃ gantabba’nti paricchedo natthi, tathāpi leḍḍupātaṃ atikkamma nātidūraṃ gantabba’’nti vadanti. Sesamettha uttānameva. Mañcādīnaṃ saṅghikatā, vuttalakkhaṇe dese santharaṇaṃ vā santharāpanaṃ vā, apalibuddhatā, āpadāya abhāvo, leḍḍupātātikkamoti imāni panettha pañca aṅgāni.
《本母注释》(即《疑惑度释》中《第一坐卧处学处注释》)在解释“或不告辞而离去”时说:“如果有比丘、沙弥或净人具足惭愧,而且把那样的人视作自己的障碍,他不向此人告辞,也不将坐卧处交付给他,便无牵无挂地离去,超出中等体力男子一掷土块的距离——若一只脚越过掷土块之距,犯恶作;两只脚都越过,则犯波逸提。”其后,在要素中也说连同“无牵挂”共有六项要素。然而,在圣典及注释中,并未见到“无牵挂地离去”这一区分。“晒晾时离去”也只是针对晒晾的场合,说“有牵挂地离去”无犯。如果其他情况下有牵挂地离去同样无犯,那就应当不加分别地说“无犯:有牵挂者离去”,因此,应审察之后采取更为合理的说法。显示巴利原文
Mātikāṭṭhakathāyaṃ (kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. paṭhamasenāsanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā) pana anāpucchaṃ vā gaccheyyāti ettha ‘‘yo bhikkhu vā sāmaṇero vā ārāmiko vā lajjī hoti, attano palibodhaṃ viya maññati, tathārūpaṃ anāpucchitvā taṃ senāsanaṃ tassa aniyyātetvā nirapekkho gacchati, thāmamajjhimassa purisassa leḍḍupātaṃ atikkameyya, ekena pādena leḍḍupātātikkame dukkaṭaṃ, dutiyapādātikkame pācittiya’’nti vatvā aṅgesupi nirapekkhatāya saddhiṃ cha aṅgāni vuttāni. Pāḷiyaṃ pana aṭṭhakathāyañca ‘‘nirapekkho gacchatī’’ti ayaṃ viseso na dissati. ‘‘Otāpento gacchatī’’ti ca otāpanavisaye eva sāpekkhagamane anāpatti vuttā. Yadi aññatthāpi sāpekkhagamane anāpatti siyā, ‘‘anāpatti sāpekkho gacchatī’’ti avisesena vattabbaṃ bhaveyya, tasmā vīmaṃsitvā yuttataraṃ gahetabbanti.
5. 第二坐卧处学处的解释显示巴利原文
5. Dutiyasenāsanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
116 116. 在第二坐卧处学处中,注释书说:“仅有这些。”而三篇《结文》则说:“这是为了显示注释书中如此说的情形而说,其他类似铺在床座上的物品也仅仅是铺具。”但是,《本母注释》限定说:“所谓铺具,是指外衣、毛毯,仅有这些。”因此,《结文》的讲述与此不符,应审察后采纳。从坐卧处:即从最后的所有坐卧处。任何人:指其亲属或非亲属,任何人。显示巴利原文
116. Dutiyasenāsanasikkhāpade ettakameva vuttanti aṭṭhakathāsu vuttaṃ. ‘‘Idañca aṭṭhakathāsu tathāvuttabhāvadassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ, aññampi tādisaṃ mañcapīṭhesu attharitaṃ paccattharaṇamevā’’ti tīsupi gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ. Mātikāṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘paccattharaṇaṃ nāma pāvāro kojavoti ettakamevā’’ti niyametvā vuttaṃ, tasmā gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ iminā na sameti, vīmaṃsitvā gahetabbaṃ. Senāsanatoti sabbapacchimasenāsanato. Yo kocīti tassa ñātako vā aññātako vā yo koci.
117 117. 周廊,指每一座寺院围墙以内的范围。为了特别显示《库伦达注》中所说的意义,而引出“虽说”等语。“在无遮蔽的殿堂中”应单独连接。正因如此,《本母注释》(《疑惑度释·第二坐卧处学处注释》)中说:“在无遮蔽的殿堂,或有遮蔽、大众集会之处。”在食堂中,这一差别同样可得。无余事可说:即没有任何特别的事可说。坏灭:即毁坏。若失坏:即因盗贼等而失坏。显示巴利原文
117.Pariveṇanti ekekassa vihārassa parikkhepabbhantaraṃ. Kurundaṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttamevatthaṃ savisesaṃ katvā dassetuṃ ‘‘kiñcāpi vutto’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. ‘‘Aparicchanne maṇḍape’’ti visuṃ yojetabbaṃ. Teneva mātikāṭṭhakathāyaṃ (kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. dutiyasenāsanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā) ‘‘aparicchannamaṇḍape vā paricchanne vāpi bahūnaṃ sannipātabhūte’’ti vuttaṃ. Bhojanasālāyampi ayaṃ viseso labbhatiyeva. Vattabbaṃ natthīti visesetvā kiñci vattabbaṃ natthi. Palujjatīti vinassati. Nasseyyāti corādīhi vinasseyya.
118 编织床或椅子所用的材料,称为床椅编织物。“石窟中”的住处,即石窟中的住所,指山洞。依“住处被白蚁啃食”这一事缘而制定,因此注释书说,若无疑惧白蚁之虞,则无罪。在《仪轨品》中,世尊制定远行仪轨时说道:“应告知住处”,此处说“而告知是义务”,仅是为了显示应行之事的行相,并非为了显示若违越义务则有恶作。正因如此,《暗部注释书》中说:“在‘应告知住处’这一句中,若住处是建于石板或石柱之上、白蚁无法攀爬之处,即使不告知也无罪。”因此,在《结文》中所说的“对于那样的住处,不告知而离去者,无波逸提;但依远行仪轨,不告知而离去者违越义务,故得恶作”,此说不可取。显示巴利原文
118. Yena mañcaṃ vā pīṭhaṃ vā vinanti, taṃ mañcapīṭhakavānaṃ. Siluccayaleṇanti siluccaye leṇaṃ, pabbataguhāti attho. ‘‘Senāsanaṃ upacikāhi khāyita’’nti imasmiṃ vatthusmiṃ paññattattā vatthuanurūpavasena aṭṭhakathāyaṃ upacikāsaṅkāya abhāve anāpatti vuttā. Vattakkhandhake gamikavattaṃ paññapentena ‘‘senāsanaṃ āpucchitabba’’nti vuttattā kevalaṃ itikattabbākāramattadassanatthaṃ ‘‘āpucchanaṃ pana vatta’’nti vuttaṃ, na pana vattabhedena dukkaṭanti dassanatthaṃ. Teneva andhakaṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘senāsanaṃ āpucchitabba’’nti ettha ‘‘yaṃ pāsāṇapiṭṭhiyaṃ vā pāsāṇatthambhesu vā katasenāsanaṃ yattha upacikā nārohanti, taṃ anāpucchantassapi anāpattī’’ti vakkhati, tasmā yaṃ vuttaṃ gaṇṭhipade ‘‘tādise senāsane anāpucchā gacchantassa pācittiyaṃ natthi, gamikavattavasena pana anāpucchā gacchato vattabhedo hoti, tasmā dukkaṭaṃ āpajjatī’’ti, taṃ na gahetabbaṃ.
“最后者出于回护而无解脱”,是指他身后已无其他跟随之人,故如此说。“应委托一人后,方可离去”在此处,若未告知而从生起离去之心处离开,于第二脚抬起时犯波逸提。虽然在此未单独说明将床或椅子置于露天便离去者犯戒,但应知若非时在露天铺设床椅后离去,出投石所及范围时依前一条学处犯波逸提,出围栏范围时则依此条犯恶作。以“于帐幕下或树根下”一语,露天也被包含在内,故于此处也有恶作,应视为在此处已说。然而,将卧具铺于露天而离去者,依两者皆犯恶作。有人说:“在僧团住处,将僧团的卧具铺好后离去者,说犯波逸提;因此在两者中,每一处对于僧团物皆犯恶作。”其余在此处易解。所述特征的卧具、其僧团性、于所述特征的住处铺设或令铺设、无牵挂、无灾祸、不顾念而朝异方离去、越过近行界,这些为此处的七项要素。显示巴利原文
Pacchimassa ābhogena mutti natthīti tassa pacchato gacchantassa aññassa abhāvato vuttaṃ. Ekaṃ vā pesetvā āpucchitabbanti ettha gamanacittassa uppannaṭṭhānato anāpucchitvā gacchato dutiyapāduddhāre pācittiyaṃ. Kiñcāpi mañcaṃ vā pīṭhaṃ vā ajjhokāse nikkhipitvā gacchantassa idha visuṃ āpatti na vuttā, tathāpi akāle ajjhokāse mañcapīṭhāni paññapetvā gacchantassa leḍḍupātātikkame purimasikkhāpadena pācittiyaṃ, parikkhepātikkame iminā dukkaṭanti veditabbaṃ. ‘‘Maṇḍape vā rukkhamūle vā’’ti iminā ajjhokāsopi saṅgahitoyevāti tatthāpi dukkaṭaṃ idha vuttamevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Seyyaṃ pana ajjhokāse santharitvā gacchantassa ubhayenapi dukkaṭameva. ‘‘Saṅghike vihāre saṅghikaṃyeva seyyaṃ santharitvā pakkamantassa pācittiyaṃ vuttanti ubhosu ekekasmiṃ saṅghike dukkaṭa’’nti vadanti. Sesamettha uttānameva. Vuttalakkhaṇaseyyā, tassā saṅghikatā, vuttalakkhaṇe vihāre santharaṇaṃ vā santharāpanaṃ vā, apalibuddhatā, āpadāya abhāvo, anapekkhassa disāpakkamanaṃ, upacārasīmātikkamoti imāni panettha satta aṅgāni.
6. 挤入住处学处的解释显示巴利原文
6. Anupakhajjasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
119-121 第六,“不进入而进入”,即不请而入、靠近身边。他观察多所饶益与功德殊胜,即观察库房管理者的多所饶益与说法者等的功德殊胜。“四周各一肘半”,是就中间所铺设的床椅而说。显示巴利原文
119-121. Chaṭṭhe anupavisitvāti samīpaṃ pavisitvā. Bahūpakārataṃ guṇavisiṭṭhatañca sallakkhentoti bhaṇḍāgārikassa bahūpakārataṃ dhammakathikādīnaṃ guṇavisiṭṭhatañca sallakkhento. Samantā diyaḍḍho hatthoti majjhe paññattamañcapīṭhaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ.
122 “除近行处外”即除去所述特征的近行处。“同一住处”即同一坐卧处。“同一院落”即该住处的围墙范围内。三部《结文》中都说:“‘病人进入’等,由于存在无罪的理由,以生病等状态想‘我要进入’而进入近行处者,即使有排挤的意图,也说不犯。”如果这样的话,非病等状态也应当单独在要素中说明,而《本母注释书》(《疑惑度释·挤入学处注释》)中只说:“僧团住处的状态、了知不可令起的状态、有排挤的意图、在近行处坐下或卧下,这些为此处的四项要素。”因此应加审察。显示巴利原文
122.Upacāraṃṭhapetvāti vuttalakkhaṇaṃ upacāraṃ ṭhapetvā. Ekavihāreti ekasmiṃ senāsane. Ekapariveṇeti tassa vihārassa parikkhepabbhantare. ‘‘Gilāno pavisatītiādīsu anāpattikāraṇasabbhāvato gilānāditāya pavisissāmīti upacāraṃ pavisantassa satipi sambādhetukāmatāya anāpatti vuttāyevā’’ti tīsupi gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ. Evañca sati agilānādibhāvopi visuṃ aṅgesu vattabbo siyā, mātikāṭṭhakathāyaṃ (kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. anupakhajjasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā) pana ‘‘saṅghikavihāratā, anuṭṭhāpanīyabhāvajānanaṃ, sambādhetukāmatā, upacāre nisīdanaṃ vā nipajjanaṃ vāti imāni panettha cattāri aṅgānī’’ti ettakameva vuttaṃ, tasmā vīmaṃsitabbaṃ.
七、「驱赶学处」注释显示巴利原文
7. Nikkaḍḍhanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
126 第七,门房,即门楼。有人说:“即使听到‘出去’的话,若依自己的意愿出去,不犯。”显示巴利原文
126. Sattame koṭṭhakānīti dvārakoṭṭhakāni. ‘‘Nikkhamāti vacanaṃ sutvāpi attano ruciyā nikkhamati, anāpattī’’ti vadanti.
128 在“驱赶无耻者”等中,起初因对方无耻等状态,想着“我要驱赶他”而进行驱赶的人,由于心念转变轻快,即使生起忿怒也不犯。其余的在此容易理解。僧团住处、被驱赶者并非具足比丘且非制造纷争等状态、以忿怒驱赶或教人驱赶,这些为此处的三项要素。显示巴利原文
128.Alajjiṃ nikkaḍḍhatītiādīsu paṭhamaṃ alajjīādibhāvena nikkaḍḍhissāmīti cintetvā nikkaḍḍhantassa cittassa lahuparivattitāya kope uppannepi anāpatti. Sesamettha uttānameva. Saṅghikavihāro, upasampannassa bhaṇḍanakārakabhāvādivinimuttatā, kopena nikkaḍḍhanaṃ vā nikkaḍḍhāpanaṃ vāti imāni panettha tīṇi aṅgāni.
八、「高架小屋学处」注释显示巴利原文
8. Vehāsakuṭisikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
129-131 第八:因上层地面未铺设板条,故说“上层未覆盖地面”。如前所述之法,即依《挤入学处》中所说之理。余者易晓。僧团精舍、不触头的空中楼阁、下方有受用物,以及在未铺设脚踏板的悬空床上坐卧,此即此处之四缘。显示巴利原文
129-131. Aṭṭhame uparimatale padarānaṃ asantharitattā ‘‘upariacchannatalāyā’’ti vuttaṃ. Pubbe vuttanayenevāti anupakhajjasikkhāpade vuttanayeneva. Sesaṃ suviññeyyameva. Saṅghiko vihāro , asīsaghaṭṭā vehāsakuṭi , heṭṭhā saparibhogatā, apaṭāṇidinne āhaccapādake nisīdanaṃ vā nipajjanaṃ vāti imāni panettha cattāri aṅgāni.
九、「大型住处学处」注释显示巴利原文
9. Mahallakavihārasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
135 第九:由于提到“大住处乃有主之住处”,故乞求所造小屋无罪。“乃至二肘半”一语,是依最高限度为说,与律典相符,故称“此说为善”。有言:“律典与注释乃依最高限度开示二肘半量之空间,是故门扇虽可小于或大于此量,然正中须有二肘半量之空间。”显示巴利原文
135. Navame ‘‘mahallako nāma vihāro sasāmiko’’ti vuttattā saññācikāya kuṭiyā anāpatti. ‘‘Aḍḍhateyyahatthampī’’ti ukkaṭṭhaparicchedena vuttavacanaṃ pāḷiyā sametīti āha ‘‘taṃ suvutta’’nti. ‘‘Pāḷiyaṃ aṭṭhakathāyañca ukkaṭṭhaparicchedena aḍḍhateyyahatthappamāṇassa okāsassa dassitattā kavāṭaṃ aḍḍhateyyahatthavitthārato ūnakaṃ vā hotu adhikaṃ vā, aḍḍhateyyahatthappamāṇaṃyeva okāso’’ti vadanti.
所谓“于其正中”,即于该精舍之中央。“即便无完整界域”,意谓门扇开启时所触之墙,其周即便未预留门宽量之空间,亦无妨。“透光隙”即采光与遮蔽之缝隙。他们云:“因此事中‘令反复覆盖、令反复涂抹’之过患而制学处,虽开许涂抹,然唯许于门框周边二肘半量内反复涂抹。是故,于他处反复涂抹或令涂抹,乃至墙体泥工事毕后,再涂第四层泥者,犯波逸提。”然于《结文》中,此三事皆言:“除所定量度外,反复涂抹仅遮止而未说犯波逸提,故犯恶作方为妥当。”显示巴利原文
Yassa vemajjheti yassa vihārassa vemajjhe. Sā aparipūraupacārāpi hotīti vivariyamānaṃ kavāṭaṃ yaṃ bhittiṃ āhanati, sā samantā kavāṭavitthārappamāṇaupacārarahitāpi hotīti attho. Ālokaṃ sandheti pidhetīti ālokasandhi. ‘‘Punappunaṃ chādāpesi, punappunaṃ limpāpesīti imasmiṃ vatthusmiṃ uppannadosena sikkhāpadassa paññattattā lepaṃ anujānantena ca dvārabandhassa samantā aḍḍhateyyahatthappamāṇeyeva padese punappunaṃ lepassa anuññātattā tato aññattha punappunaṃ limpentassa vā limpāpentassa vā bhittiyaṃ mattikāya kattabbakiccaṃ niṭṭhāpetvā puna catutthalepe dinne pācittiyena bhavitabba’’nti vadanti. Gaṇṭhipadesu pana tīsupi ‘‘punappunaṃ lepadānassa vuttappamāṇato aññattha paṭikkhittamattaṃ ṭhapetvā pācittiyassa avuttattā dukkaṭaṃ anurūpa’’nti vuttaṃ.
“应确定”的意思是“应当安排”。“非绿色处”中的“非”字,如同“少欲”等词中的用法,表示“无有”之义,因此注释说“在无绿色处”。“坠落之处”意指,因为那里有坠落之虞,站在那里的比丘上方可能掉下东西。若站在绿色植物处作确定,则犯恶作——这句话表明:如果精舍周围在所述量度范围内没有谷物等植物,便应在该处建造;若在有植物处令人建造,则犯恶作。显示巴利原文
Adhiṭṭhātabbanti saṃvidhātabbaṃ. Appahariteti ettha appa-saddo ‘‘appiccho’’tiādīsu viya abhāvatthoti āha ‘‘aharite’’ti. Patanokāsoti patanokāsattā tatra ṭhitassa bhikkhuno upari pateyyāti adhippāyo. Sace harite ṭhito adhiṭṭheti, āpatti dukkaṭassāti vacanena imamatthaṃ dīpeti – sace vihārassa samantā vuttappamāṇe paricchede pubbaṇṇādīni na santi, tattha vihāro kāretabbo. Yattha pana santi, tattha kārāpentassa dukkaṭanti.
136 为了说明“将每一道笔直地设立后,顺道覆盖即称为以道覆盖”,故说“以道覆盖者”。依此方法,当整个精舍被覆盖一次时,那一次覆盖被视为“一道”,由此而有“两道”等说法。三处《结文》都说:“以轮次覆盖时,也应依此方法理解。”这与“他让人反复覆盖”的巴利经文,以及“所有这些覆盖,应理解为覆盖之上再覆盖”的注释文句相符。因此,“确定两道,嘱咐第三道后便应离去”应这样理解:确定两层覆盖之后,嘱咐第三层说“如此覆盖”,然后便应离去。显示巴利原文
136. Ekekaṃ maggaṃ ujukameva uṭṭhapetvā chādanaṃ maggena chādanaṃ nāma hotīti dassetuṃ ‘‘maggena chādentassā’’ti vuttaṃ. Iminā pana nayena sabbasmiṃ vihāre ekavāraṃ chādite taṃ chadanaṃ ekamagganti gahetvā ‘‘dve magge’’tiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Pariyāyena chādanepi imināva nayena yojetabba’’nti tīsupi gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ, taṃ ‘‘punappunaṃ chādāpesī’’ti imāya pāḷiyā ‘‘sabbampi cetaṃ chadanaṃ chadanūpari veditabba’’nti iminā aṭṭhakathāvacanena ca sameti, tasmā dve magge adhiṭṭhahitvā tatiyāya maggaṃ āṇāpetvā pakkamitabbanti ettha dve chadanāni adhiṭṭhahitvā tatiyaṃ chadanaṃ ‘‘evaṃ chādehī’’ti āṇāpetvā pakkamitabbanti evamattho gahetabbo.
然而,有些人主张:“首先,一次性完全覆盖后,再绑上覆盖的木条,第二次也照样覆盖;当第三、第四次到来时,确定两道,嘱咐之后便离去。”另一些人则说:“在第一次覆盖时,即可确定三道,从第四次开始犯波逸提。”但这两说都与巴利经文和注释不符。“第三道”中的“第三”是目的格,用作受格,意为“第三道”。“三道”指以道次覆盖的三层覆盖;“三轮”也是如此。而“于第四道或第四轮时”,是指正在覆盖者的第四次覆盖本身。其余文义是明显的。在此,大精舍性、自己居住的房屋性以及进一步确定,是这里的三个构成要素。显示巴利原文
Keci pana ‘‘paṭhamaṃ tāva ekavāraṃ aparisesaṃ chādetvā puna chadanadaṇḍake bandhitvā dutiyavāraṃ tatheva chādetabbaṃ, tatiyavāracatutthavāre sampatte dve magge adhiṭṭhahitvā āṇāpetvā pakkamitabba’’nti vadanti. Apare pana ‘‘paṭhamavāreyeva tayopi magge adhiṭṭhātuṃ vaṭṭati, catutthato paṭṭhāya āpatti pācittiya’’nti vadanti. Tadubhayampi pāḷiyā aṭṭhakathāya ca na sameti. Tatiyāya magganti ettha tatiyāyāti upayogatthe sampadānavacanaṃ, tatiyaṃ magganti attho. Tiṇṇaṃ maggānanti maggavasena chāditānaṃ tiṇṇaṃ chadanānaṃ. Tiṇṇaṃ pariyāyānanti etthāpi eseva nayo. Catutthe magge vā pariyāye vāti ca tathā chādentānaṃ catutthaṃ chādanameva vuttaṃ. Sesaṃ uttānameva. Mahallakavihāratā, attano vāsāgāratā, uttari adhiṭṭhānanti imāni panettha tīṇi aṅgāni.
十、有生物(水)学处的解释显示巴利原文
10. Sappāṇakasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
140 于第十条中,当知:“若浇洒或令浇洒”这一学处,是依外用而首先制定的;而“饮用有生物之水”学处,则是依自己沐浴、饮用等自用而制定的。又,即使前者本身也是依自用而首先制定的,此学处的再次制定,应理解为是专依外用而制的。显示巴利原文
140. Dasame imassa sikkhāpadassa ‘‘siñceyya vā siñcāpeyya vā’’ti bāhiraparibhogavasena paṭhamaṃ paññattattā ‘‘sappāṇakaṃ udakaṃ paribhuñjeyyā’’ti sikkhāpadaṃ attano nahānapānādiparibhogavasena paññattanti veditabbaṃ. Tasmiṃ vā paṭhamaṃ paññattepi attano paribhogavaseneva paññattattā puna imaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ bāhiraparibhogavaseneva paññattanti gahetabbaṃ.
对于有生物想者,纵使事前已知“这些生物将因使用而死”,其浇洒或令浇洒的行为,亦如同明知“飞蛾等生物将扑入灯火而死亡”却仍点燃灯火一般,虽无杀心,也构成犯戒,因此说这是“制戒罪”。其余文义明显。水中有生物、知道“因浇洒,生物会死”、水确实如此,以及并非出于杀意,而是为了某种需要才浇洒草木等——这是此处的四个构成要素。显示巴利原文
Sappāṇakasaññissa ‘‘paribhogena pāṇakā marissantī’’ti pubbabhāge jānantassapi siñcanasiñcāpanaṃ ‘‘padīpe nipatitvā paṭaṅgādipāṇakā marissantī’’ti jānantassa padīpujjalanaṃ viya vināpi vadhakacetanāya hotīti āha ‘‘paṇṇattivajja’’nti. Sesaṃ uttānatthameva . Udakassa sappāṇakatā, ‘‘siñcanena pāṇakā marissantī’’ti jānanaṃ, tādisameva ca udakaṃ, vinā vadhakacetanāya kenacideva karaṇīyena tiṇādīnaṃ siñcananti imāni panettha cattāri aṅgāni.
第三 教诫品显示巴利原文
3. Ovādavaggo
一、教诫学处的解释显示巴利原文
1. Ovādasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
144 在比丘尼品的第一学处中,“随顺问话而说”是指随顺那些提问者所问的“那位长老是什么戒行?什么威仪?从哪个家族出家?”等问题而随顺其问作答。“可以讲述”是指纯粹以无贪着的心来讲述。由于不能导向天界与解脱道,如同畜生般的谈论,故称为“畜生论”。因此说到“即使能导向天界之道……”等。用“即使”一词,显示更不必说能导向解脱道了。“如同畜生般”的意思是成为障碍、形成妨害,因为耽着于畜生论确实会障碍天界与解脱。“圆满”即完备。“义理连贯”即意义和合。“深奥”是由于义理深邃等而深奥。“多味”是具有意义之味等多种滋味。“与相之通达相连”是因为它能带来通达无常等相的滋味,故与相的通达相连。显示巴利原文
144. Bhikkhunivaggassa paṭhamasikkhāpade kathānusārenāti ‘‘so thero kiṃsīlo kiṃsamācāro katarakulā pabbajito’’tiādinā pucchantānaṃ pucchākathānusārena. Kathetuṃ vaṭṭantīti nirāmiseneva cittena kathetuṃ vaṭṭanti. Aniyyānikattā saggamokkhamaggānaṃ tiracchānabhūtā kathā tiracchānakathāti āha ‘‘saggamaggagamanepī’’tiādi. Api-saddena pageva mokkhamaggagamaneti dīpeti. Tiracchānabhūtanti tirokaraṇabhūtaṃ, bādhikanti vuttaṃ hoti. Laddhāsevanā hi tiracchānakathā saggamokkhānaṃ bādhikāva hoti. Samiddhoti paripuṇṇo. Sahitatthoti yuttattho. Atthagambhīratādiyogato gambhīro. Bahurasoti attharasādibahuraso. Lakkhaṇapaṭivedhasaṃyuttoti aniccādilakkhaṇapaṭivedharasaāvahanato lakkhaṇapaṭivedhasaṃyutto.
145-147 “彼处”意为另一处所,即“上方”之义。“作业者”意为在外在方面造作。所谓“巴帝摩卡”,是指分为行持与禁止的学处戒。因为此戒保护持守者,使其从地狱等苦中解脱,故称为“巴帝摩卡”。“防护”即约束,指关闭身、语二门;因为藉由它,身语门得以被约束、被关闭,故称为“防护”,这是身语不违犯的称谓。以巴帝摩卡防护而约束的人,即身语门被巴帝摩卡防护所关闭。而处于这种状态的人就称为具足者,因此说“具足”。“转起”是指令自身持续。“住”则显示了安住于巴帝摩卡防护戒之比丘的威仪住。显示巴利原文
145-147.Paratoti parattha, uttarinti attho. Karontovāti paribāhire karontoyeva. Pātimokkhoti cārittavārittappabhedaṃ sikkhāpadasīlaṃ . Tañhi yo naṃ pāti rakkhati, taṃ mokkheti moceti āpāyikādīhi dukkhehi, tasmā ‘‘pātimokkha’’nti vuccati. Saṃvaraṇaṃ saṃvaro, kāyavacīdvārānaṃ pidahanaṃ. Yena hi te saṃvutā pihitā honti, so saṃvaro, kāyikavācasikassa avītikkamassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Pātimokkhasaṃvarena saṃvutoti pātimokkhasaṃvarena pihitakāyavacīdvāro. Tathābhūto ca yasmā tena samaṅgī nāma hoti, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘samannāgato’’ti . Vattatīti attabhāvaṃ pavatteti. Viharatīti iminā pātimokkhasaṃvarasīle ṭhitassa bhikkhuno iriyāpathavihāro dassito.
为了以圣典详细阐明略说的义理,所以开始“已说”等语。其中,“分别”是指禅那分别。“戒”、“依止”等皆是巴帝摩卡的同义词。其中,“戒”——虽然这确实是连同甘马语结束而成就的巴帝摩卡的同义词,但即便如此,从法的角度而言,应知此戒是指远离杀生等、或圆满行持义务的思等诸法。然而,因为比丘以巴帝摩卡戒而安立于教法中,故称其为“依止”;或者,比丘于此安立,或诸善法于此安立,故为“依止”。此义应依据“智者依戒而安立”(相应部1.23,192)、“大王,戒是一切善法的依止”(弥兰陀问经2.1.9)、“大王,安住于戒者,一切善法不退失”等经典而了知。显示巴利原文
Saṅkhepato vuttamatthaṃ vitthārato pāḷiyā vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘vuttañheta’’ntiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha vibhaṅgeti jhānavibhaṅge. Sīlaṃ patiṭṭhātiādīni pātimokkhasseva vevacanāni. Tattha (vibha. aṭṭha. 511) sīlanti kāmañcetaṃ saha kammavācāpariyosānena ijjhanakassa pātimokkhasseva vevacanaṃ, evaṃ santepi dhammato etaṃ sīlaṃ nāma pāṇātipātādīhi vā viramantassa vattapaṭipattiṃ vā pūrentassa cetanādayo dhammā veditabbā. Yasmā pana pātimokkhasīlena bhikkhu sāsane patiṭṭhāti nāma, tasmā taṃ ‘‘patiṭṭhā’’ti vuttaṃ. Patiṭṭhahati vā ettha bhikkhu, kusaladhammā eva vā ettha patiṭṭhahantīti patiṭṭhā. Ayamattho ‘‘sīle patiṭṭhāya naro sapañño’’ti (saṃ. ni. 1.23, 192) ca ‘‘patiṭṭhā, mahārāja, sīlaṃ sabbesaṃ kusalānaṃ dhammāna’’nti (mi. pa. 2.1.9) ca ‘‘sīle patiṭṭhitassa kho, mahārāja, sabbe kusalā dhammā na parihāyantī’’ti ca ādisuttavasena veditabbo.
因此,此戒以最初生起之义而称为“始”。对此也曾有说:显示巴利原文
Tadetaṃ pubbuppattiatthena ādi. Vuttampi cetaṃ –
“因此,乌提耶,你应从最初便清净善法。何谓善法之始?即是极清净的戒与正直的见。”(相应部5.382)显示巴利原文
‘‘Tasmātiha tvaṃ, uttiya, ādimeva visodhehi kusalesu dhammesu. Ko cādi kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ? Sīlañca suvisuddhaṃ diṭṭhi ca ujukā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.382).
犹如建城者想要建造城市,先清理城址,随后再划分街道、十字路口、广场等而建造城市;同样,瑜伽行者先清净戒,随后方证得定、观、道、果、涅槃。又如洗衣者先用三种碱水洗衣,然后在洁净的衣上随意染色;亦如善巧的画师欲作画,先处理墙面,随后完成画像;同样,瑜伽行者先清净戒,随后证得止、观等法。因此,戒被称为“始”。显示巴利原文
Yathā hi nagaravaḍḍhakī nagaraṃ māpetukāmo paṭhamaṃ nagaraṭṭhānaṃ sodheti, tato aparabhāge vīthicatukkasiṅghāṭakādiparicchedena vibhajitvā nagaraṃ māpeti, evameva yogāvacaro ādimhi sīlaṃ sodheti, tato aparabhāge samādhivipassanāmaggaphalanibbānāni sacchikaroti. Yathā vā pana rajako paṭhamaṃ tīhi khārehi vatthaṃ dhovitvā parisuddhe vatthe yadicchakaṃ raṅgajātaṃ upaneti, yathā vā pana cheko cittakāro rūpaṃ likhitukāmo ādito bhittiparikammaṃ karoti, tato aparabhāge rūpaṃ samuṭṭhāpeti, evameva yogāvacaro āditova sīlaṃ visodhetvā aparabhāge samathavipassanādayo dhamme sacchikaroti. Tasmā sīlaṃ ‘‘ādī’’ti vuttaṃ.
此戒因似足行而称为“行”。“行”意指足。譬如断足之人,不会生起前往各处的打算,唯有双足具足者方可生起;同样,若戒破损、残缺、不圆满,则通往涅槃的智行便不成就;若戒不破损、不残缺、圆满,则通往涅槃的智行得以成就。因此,戒被称为“行”。显示巴利原文
Tadetaṃ caraṇasarikkhatāya caraṇaṃ. ‘‘Caraṇā’’ti pādā vuccanti. Yathā hi chinnacaraṇassa purisassa disaṃgamanābhisaṅkhāro na jāyati, paripuṇṇapādasseva jāyati, evameva yassa sīlaṃ bhinnaṃ hoti khaṇḍaṃ aparipuṇṇaṃ, tassa nibbānagamanāya ñāṇagamanaṃ na sampajjati. Yassa pana taṃ abhinnaṃ hoti akhaṇḍaṃ paripuṇṇaṃ, tassa nibbānagamanāya ñāṇagamanaṃ sampajjati. Tasmā sīlaṃ ‘‘caraṇa’’nti vuttaṃ.
此戒依约束之义而称为“律仪”,依防护之义而称为“防护”,由此二者说明了戒律仪与戒防护。此处,就词义而言,“律仪”指制止违犯的躁动,或制止人使其不因违犯而躁动,故称律仪;“防护”指闭锁、遮止违犯的入口,故称防护。“解脱”意为最上或成为入口。如同众生四种食物由口进入后遍布肢节,瑜伽行者以戒为入口,四地善法随之进入而成就义利,因此说“解脱”。于入口处为胜妙者,即“胜解脱”,意为前导、最胜、首要。应知,为证得四地善法,“胜解脱”即是前导、最胜、首要。显示巴利原文
Tadetaṃ saṃyamanavasena saṃyamo, saṃvaraṇavasena saṃvaroti ubhayenapi sīlasaṃyamo ceva sīlasaṃvaro ca kathito. Vacanattho panettha saṃyameti vītikkamavipphandanaṃ, puggalaṃ vā saṃyameti vītikkamavasena tassa vipphandituṃ na detīti saṃyamo, vītikkamassa pavesanadvāraṃ saṃvarati pidahatīti saṃvaro. Mokkhanti uttamaṃ mukhabhūtaṃ vā. Yathā hi sattānaṃ catubbidho āhāro mukhena pavisitvā aṅgamaṅgāni pharati, evaṃ yoginopi catubhūmakakusalaṃ sīlamukhena pavisitvā atthasiddhiṃ sampādeti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘mokkha’’nti. Pamukhe sādhūti pamokkhaṃ, pubbaṅgamaṃ seṭṭhaṃ padhānanti attho. Kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ samāpattiyāti catubhūmakakusalānaṃ paṭilābhatthāya pamokkhaṃ pubbaṅgamaṃ seṭṭhaṃ padhānanti veditabbaṃ.
“身不违犯”指三种身善行。“语不违犯”指四种语善行。“身语不违犯”指此两者。以此总括显示了活命第八戒。“约束”即关闭,意为根门被护闭、被遮止。如同门户紧闭的屋宅称为“闭户”,同样,此处根门被护闭者称为“约束”。“以巴帝摩卡防护”指以巴帝摩卡而防护。“具足”等词彼此同义。显示巴利原文
Kāyiko avītikkamoti tividhaṃ kāyasucaritaṃ. Vācasikoti catubbidhaṃ vacīsucaritaṃ. Kāyikavācasikoti tadubhayaṃ. Iminā ājīvaṭṭhamakasīlaṃ pariyādāya dasseti. Saṃvutoti pihito, saṃvutindriyo pihitindriyoti attho. Yathā hi saṃvutadvāraṃ gehaṃ ‘‘saṃvutagehaṃ pihitageha’’nti vuccati, evamidha saṃvutindriyo ‘‘saṃvuto’’ti vutto. Pātimokkhasaṃvarenāti pātimokkhasaṅkhātena saṃvarena. Upetotiādīni sabbāni aññamaññavevacanāni.
以“行”等七句,解说了安住于巴帝摩卡防护戒的比丘之威仪住。其中,“行”是指由于具备四种威仪中的某一种而称为行。凭借此四种威仪,犹如车身运转一般运行。以另一种威仪截断某一种威仪所带来的苦,因长久安住而守护身体,故称为“守护”;不滞留于一种威仪,于一切威仪中运转,故称为“维持”;以种种威仪如此这般地维持身体,故称为“令维持”;因长久运转,故称为“行”;以威仪交替截断而维持生命,故称为“住”。显示巴利原文
Iriyatītiādīhi sattahipi padehi pātimokkhasaṃvarasīle ṭhitassa bhikkhuno iriyāpathavihāro kathito. Tattha iriyatīti catunnaṃ iriyāpathānaṃ aññatarasamaṅgibhāvato iriyati. Tehi iriyāpathacatukkehi kāyasakaṭavattanena vattati. Ekaṃ iriyāpathadukkhaṃ aparena iriyāpathena vicchinditvā ciraṭṭhitibhāvena sarīrarakkhaṇato pāleti. Ekasmiṃ iriyāpathe asaṇṭhahitvā sabbairiyāpathe vattanato yapeti. Tena tena iriyāpathena tathā tathā kāyassa yāpanato yāpeti. Cirakālavattāpanato carati. Iriyāpathena iriyāpathaṃ vicchinditvā jīvitaharaṇato viharati.
所谓“以遮止邪命”——显示巴利原文
Micchājīvapaṭisedhakenāti –
“在此,有人以施竹、施钵、施花、施果、施沐浴、施齿木,或以谄媚、以豆汤般的奉迎、以抚育般的姿态、以跑腿差使,或以其他某种佛陀所呵斥的邪命而谋生,这便称为非行。”(《分别论》513)显示巴利原文
‘‘Idhekacco veḷudānena vā pattadānena vā puppha phala sinānadantakaṭṭhadānena vā cāṭukamyatāya vā muggasūpyatāya vā pāribhaṭayatāya vā jaṅghapesanikena vā aññataraññatarena vā buddhapaṭikuṭṭhena micchāājīvena jīvikaṃ kappeti, ayaṃ vuccati anācāro’’ti (vibha. 513) –
如是所说,是以对治名为“不正行”的邪命的方式。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ vuttaanācārasaṅkhātamicchājīvapaṭipakkhena.
“非以竹施等之行”——显示巴利原文
Na veḷudānādinā ācārenāti –
“于此,有人不以竹施、不以叶施、不以花施、不以果施、不以沐浴、不以齿木、不以谄媚、不以豆汤、不以侍奉、不以走使,不以任何佛陀所呵斥的邪命而谋生,此名为‘正行’。”(《分别论》513)显示巴利原文
‘‘Idhekacco na veḷudānena na patta na puppha na phala na sināna na dantakaṭṭha na cāṭukamyatāya na muggasūpyatāya na pāribhaṭayatāya na jaṅghapesanikena na aññataraññatarena buddhapaṭikuṭṭhena micchāājīvena jīvikaṃ kappeti, ayaṃ vuccati ācāro’’ti (vibha. 513) –
如此说来,并非那种竹施等的行为。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ vuttena na veḷudānādinā ācārena.
舍弃以妓女等为非行境之后——显示巴利原文
Vesiyādiagocaraṃ pahāyāti –
在此,有人或以妓女为行境,或以寡妇、成年少女、黄门、比丘尼、酒肆为行境;与国王、大臣、外道、外道弟子有不随顺的交往而共住。再者,那些无信、无净信心、非应饮水之处、好辱骂诽谤、意图不利、意图无益、意图不安、行不安事的家族,若有比丘、比丘尼、优婆塞、优婆夷亲近、交往、敬奉这样的家族,这便称为非行境。显示巴利原文
‘‘Idhekacco vesiyagocaro vā hoti vidhava thullakumāri paṇḍaka bhikkhuni pānāgāragocaro vā, saṃsaṭṭho viharati rājūhi rājamahāmattehi titthiyehi titthiyasāvakehi ananulomikena saṃsaggena, yāni pana tāni kulāni assaddhāni appasannāni anopānabhūtāni akkosakaparibhāsakāni anatthakāmāni ahitakāmāni aphāsukakāmāni ayogakkhemakāmāni bhikkhūnaṃ bhikkhunīnaṃ upāsakānaṃ upāsikānaṃ, tathārūpāni kulāni sevati bhajati payirupāsati, ayaṃ vuccati agocaro’’ti (vibha. 514) –
如是,他舍离了所至的妓女等非行境。显示巴利原文
Evamāgataṃ vesiyādiagocaraṃ pahāya.
“具足信心的家族等”:此处的“等”字含摄依止行境等。行境有三种:依止行境、守护行境、系缚行境。什么是依止行境?具足十论事功德的善友,依止此人,便能听闻所未闻,令已闻之教法清净,断除疑惑,使见解正直,令心净信;又或随学此人,而令信心增长、持戒增长、多闻增长、布施增长、智慧增长——这便是依止行境。什么是守护行境?于此,比丘进入村落,行于街道,垂目唯见一轭之远,防护而行;不瞻望象、马、车、步兵,不瞻望女人、男人;不向上看、不向下看、不环顾四方而行——这便是守护行境。什么是系缚行境?即四念处,心系缚于此。世尊曾说:“诸比丘,什么是比丘自己的、祖传的行境?即是四念处。”(《相应部》5.372)这便是系缚行境。如此,当知此处的“等”字即含摄这三种行境。显示巴利原文
Saddhāsampannakulādināti ettha ādi-saddena upanissayagocarādiṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Tividho hi gocaro upanissayagocaro ārakkhagocaro upanibandhagocaroti. Katamo upanissayagocaro? Dasakathāvatthuguṇasamannāgato kalyāṇamitto, yaṃ nissāya asutaṃ suṇāti, sutaṃ pariyodapeti, kaṅkhaṃ vitarati, diṭṭhiṃ ujuṃ karoti, cittaṃ pasādeti. Yassa vā pana anusikkhamāno saddhāya vaḍḍhati, sīlena sutena cāgena paññāya vaḍḍhati, ayaṃ upanissayagocaro. Katamo ārakkhagocaro? Idha bhikkhu antaragharaṃ paviṭṭho vīthiṃ paṭipanno okkhittacakkhu yugamattadassāvī saṃvuto gacchati, na hatthiṃ olokento, na assaṃ, na rathaṃ, na pattiṃ, na itthiṃ, na purisaṃ olokento, na uddhaṃ olokento, na adho olokento, na disāvidisaṃ vipekkhamāno gacchati, ayaṃ ārakkhagocaro. Katamo upanibandhagocaro? Cattāro satipaṭṭhānā, yattha cittaṃ upanibandhati. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā ‘‘ko ca, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno gocaro sako pettiko visayo? Yadidaṃ cattāro satipaṭṭhānā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.372), ayaṃ upanibandhagocaro. Iti ayaṃ tividho gocaro idha ādi-saddena saṅgahitoti daṭṭhabbo.
于微细罪中:即于无意违犯的众学法、不善心生起等种种罪中。具见怖畏戒者:即具有将微尘般大小的罪过视为如六十八万由旬高的须弥山那样的见性,或具有将极轻微的恶说视同波罗夷罪一般的见性。正持:即正确地、恭敬地、或全面地受持。显示巴利原文
Appamattakesu vajjesūti asañcicca āpannasekhiyaakusalacittuppādādibhedesu vajjesu. Bhayato dassanasīloti paramāṇumattaṃ vajjaṃ aṭṭhasaṭṭhiyojanasatasahassubbedhasinerupabbatasadisaṃ katvā dassanasabhāvo, sabbalahukaṃ vā dubbhāsitamattaṃ pārājikasadisaṃ katvā dassanasabhāvo. Sammā ādāyāti sammadeva sakkaccaṃ sabbaso vā ādiyitvā.
因为是从轮回之苦中希求出离者所应听闻的,所以称为“闻”,也就是教法。持受此闻者,名为“持闻者”,成为闻的承载者。如果有人在此处所取者,转瞬便从他处消失,如同破瓶中的水无法存留,于大众中不能讲说、不能诵出一经或一本生,这个人就不能称为持闻者。如果有人所领受的佛语,如同领受时一样,即使经过十年、二十年不诵习也不会消失,这个人即可称作持闻者。因此说“凡彼所有”等。即使一句、一字也不坏失而积聚,故为“积聚”;闻的积聚在于此人,所以说“闻已积聚在此人者,为闻积聚者”。如果一个人的闻,如同刻在石上的铭文,又如置于金瓶中的狮子油,善巧地安住于心匣之中,这个人就称为闻积聚者。因此说“以此……显示不坏”。显示巴利原文
Vaṭṭadukkhanissaraṇatthikehi sotabbato sutaṃ, pariyattidhammo. Taṃ dhāretīti sutadharo, sutassa ādhārabhūto. Yassa hi ito gahitaṃ etto palāyati, chiddaghaṭe udakaṃ viya na tiṭṭhati, parisamajjhe ekaṃ suttaṃ vā jātakaṃ vā kathetuṃ vā vācetuṃ vā na sakkoti, ayaṃ na sutadharo nāma. Yassa pana uggahitaṃ buddhavacanaṃ uggahitakālasadisameva hoti, dasapi vīsatipi vassāni sajjhāyaṃ akarontassa na nassati, ayaṃ sutadharo nāma. Tenevāha ‘‘yadassa ta’’ntiādi. Ekapadampi ekakkharampi avinaṭṭhaṃ hutvā sanniciyatīti sannicayo, sutaṃ sannicayo etasminti sutasannicayoti āha ‘‘sutaṃ sannicitaṃ asminti sutasannicayo’’ti. Yassa hi sutaṃ hadayamañjusāyaṃ sannicitaṃ silāya lekhā viya suvaṇṇaghaṭe pakkhittā sīhavasā viya ca sādhu tiṭṭhati, ayaṃ sutasannicayo nāma. Tenāha ‘‘etena…pe… avināsaṃ dassetī’’ti.
“已持”即熟练、已能上口。有一类人,所领受的佛语并非恒常随用,当有人对他说“请讲某经或某本生”时,他便答:“待我诵习、与他人核对、再透过遍问深入义理之后,我才能明了。”另一类人则已纯熟,因为无有间断,如同恒河之流、如同有分流,自然任运而生起,若有人对他说“请讲某经或某本生”,当场便能举出而讲说。正是对此,而说“已持”。以语熟练而作:即依十经、十品、十五、五十等,以言语诵习,标记“十经过、十品过”等而以口诵习。此处并非仅指对部分经或单经的语熟,而是依品等而说。以意随观:即以意随随观察,也就是部分地审虑、思惟。转向者:即当以语诵习佛语、以意思惟之时。善通达者:即除去缠结、无有丛刺,如实地善通达。显示巴利原文
Dhātāti paguṇā vācuggatā. Ekassa hi uggahitabuddhavacanaṃ niccakālikaṃ na hoti, ‘‘asukasuttaṃ vā jātakaṃ vā kathehī’’ti vutte ‘‘sajjhāyitvā aññehi saṃsanditvā paripucchāvasena atthaṃ ogāhitvā jānissāmī’’ti vadati. Ekassa paguṇaṃ pabandhavicchedābhāvato gaṅgāsotasadisaṃ bhavaṅgasotasadisañca akittimaṃ sukhappavatti hoti, ‘‘asukasuttaṃ vā jātakaṃ vā kathehī’’ti vutte uddharitvā tameva katheti. Taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘dhātā’’ti. Vācāya paguṇā katāti suttadasakavaggadasakapaṇṇāsadasakavasena vācāya sajjhāyitā, dasa suttāni gatāni, dasa vaggāni gatānītiādinā sallakkhetvā vācāya sajjhāyitāti attho. Suttekadesassa hi suttamattassa ca vacasā paricayo idha nādhippeto, atha kho vaggādivaseneva. Manasā anupekkhitāti manasā anu anu pekkhitā, bhāgaso nijjhāyitā cintitāti attho. Āvajjantassāti vācāya sajjhāyituṃ buddhavacanaṃ manasā cintentassa. Suṭṭhu paṭividdhāti nijjaṭaṃ niggumbaṃ katvā suṭṭhu yāthāvato paṭividdhā.
“两种本母”指比丘本母与比丘尼本母。“能诵持者”是前者的同义词。“三种随喜”指:僧团供食时与布施功德相关的随喜;寺院等庆典时的吉祥经等随喜;亡者供食等不吉祥时的墙外经等随喜——这是三种随喜。“业与非业的决断”指《附随》末尾《业品》中所说的决断。“以观修习而学习者,应以四界差别为门而学”,这在三本《结文》中都有说。由于在四方无碍,所以它拥有四方,称为“四方者”;“四方者”本身即是“遍四方者”;或者,它能胜任四方,或在四方当中为善巧,所以称为“遍四方者”。显示巴利原文
Dve mātikāti bhikkhumātikā bhikkhunīmātikā ca. Vācuggatāti purimasseva vevacanaṃ. Tisso anumodanāti saṅghabhatte dānānisaṃsapaṭisaṃyuttaanumodanā, vihārādimaṅgale maṅgalasuttādianumodanā, matakabhattādiavamaṅgale tirokuṭṭādianumodanāti imā tisso anumodanā . Kammākammavinicchayoti parivārāvasāne kammavagge vuttavinicchayo. ‘‘Vipassanāvasena uggaṇhantena catudhātuvavatthānamukhena uggahetabba’’nti tīsupi gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ. Catūsu disāsu appaṭihatattā catasso disā etassāti catuddiso, catuddisoyeva cātuddiso, catasso vā disā arahati, catūsu vā disāsu sādhūti cātuddiso.
“增上律”指整部律藏。“调伏”意指教导、训练。他们说:“‘两部分别应熟练、能背诵’这句话,也是针对通过遍问而学习而言的。”因为一人所记会忘失,另一人则熟练,所以说“应与三人一起达到堪能轮诵”。“增上法”指名色之辨别。或者,“下方三品”指从大品往下的有偈品、因缘品、蕴品这三品。由于《大灯》中说“法句连同本事也可以学习”,因此,即使已学了带义疏的本生,持本生者也仍应学法句连同本事。显示巴利原文
Abhivinayeti sakale vinayapiṭake. Vinetunti sikkhāpetuṃ. ‘‘Dve vibhaṅgā paguṇā vācuggatā kātabbāti idaṃ paripucchāvasena uggahaṇampi sandhāya vutta’’nti vadanti. Ekassa pamuṭṭhaṃ, itarassa paguṇaṃ hotīti āha ‘‘tīhi janehi saddhiṃ parivattanakkhamā kātabbā’’ti. Abhidhammeti nāmarūpaparicchede. Heṭṭhimā vā tayo vaggāti mahāvaggato heṭṭhā sagāthakavaggo nidānavaggo khandhakavaggoti ime tayo vaggā. ‘‘Dhammapadampi saha vatthunā uggahetuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti mahāpaccariyaṃ vuttattā jātakabhāṇakena sāṭṭhakathaṃ jātakaṃ uggahetvāpi dhammapadampi saha vatthunā uggahetabbameva.
“善语者”指具有美妙、圆满词句之语者。因此说“具足轻音、重音等……之语”。其中,“圆满词句”是指:由于发音部位与发音方式的成就、及修学的成就,于任何处都无欠缺,因此其字、词、句皆圆满,故称“圆满词句”;或者,词本身因能表达义理而称为“词句”,在令字音圆满、不缺失轻音、重音等十种音声觉知后而说出,即称为圆满。因为字音圆满,词句才有圆满性。因此说“以如法说出轻音、重音等的方式”。“圆满词句”即其词句是圆满的。或者,“词”是藉以了知义理者,如名词等;“句”是能表达所欲之义者,即语句。由于它们的圆满,故称“圆满词句”。显示巴利原文
Kalyāṇā sundarā parimaṇḍalapadabyañjanā vācā assāti kalyāṇavāco. Tenāha ‘‘sithiladhanitādīnaṃ…pe… vācāya samannāgato’’ti. Tattha parimaṇḍalapadabyañjanāyāti ṭhānakaraṇasampattiyā sikkhāsampattiyā ca katthacipi anūnatāya parimaṇḍalapadāni byañjanāni akkharāni etissāti parimaṇḍalapadabyañjanā, padameva vā atthassa byañjanato padabyañjanaṃ, taṃ akkharapāripūriṃ katvā sithiladhanitādidasavidhaṃ byañjanabuddhiṃ aparihāpetvā vuttaṃ parimaṇḍalaṃ nāma hoti. Akkharapāripūriyā hi padabyañjanassa parimaṇḍalatā. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘sithiladhanitādīnaṃyathāvidhānavacanenā’’ti, parimaṇḍalaṃ padabyañjanaṃ etissāti parimaṇḍalapadabyañjanā. Atha vā pajjati ñāyati attho etenāti padaṃ, nāmādi. Yathādhippetamatthaṃ byañjetīti byañjanaṃ, vākyaṃ. Tesaṃ paripuṇṇatāya parimaṇḍalapadabyañjanā.
再者,若有比丘在众中说法时,搁置一部经或本生,却引用另一部能作难诘的经,为其作譬喻,将其义趣引入此处,像这样执取此而弃舍彼,偏执一边,知时而起身,那么被搁置的经就只是被搁置而已,他的说法因义理不圆满而称为“不圆满”。然而,若比丘在搁置一部经或本生后,不向外驰逸一步,唯依所搁置之经的义理而解释,即使引入其他经文,也顾全圣典的衔接与前后次第,立于师授的轨则,如同用笔划分界限一般,将一一义理善加确定而显示,如同将水导入深渠一般令深义流布,如良马以碎步踏节一般逐词推敲,以多种方式反复解释同一词句,则他的说法因法、义、衔接、前后次第、师承所学等一切圆满而称为“圆满”。正是针对这样的说法,才说“圆满词句”。显示巴利原文
Apica yo bhikkhu parisati dhammaṃ desento suttaṃ vā jātakaṃ vā nikkhipitvā aññaṃ upārambhakaraṃ suttaṃ āharati, tassa upamaṃ katheti, tadatthaṃ otāreti, evaṃ idaṃ gahetvā ettha khipanto ekapasseneva pariharanto kālaṃ ñatvā vuṭṭhahati, nikkhittasuttaṃ pana nikkhittamattameva hoti, tassa kathā aparimaṇḍalā nāma hoti atthassa aparipuṇṇabhāvato. Yo pana suttaṃ vā jātakaṃ vā nikkhipitvā bahi ekapadampi agantvā yathānikkhittassa suttassa atthasaṃvaṇṇanāvaseneva suttantarampi ānento pāḷiyā anusandhiñca pubbāparañca apekkhanto ācariyehi dinnanaye ṭhatvā tulikāya paricchindanto viya taṃ taṃ atthaṃ suvavatthitaṃ katvā dassento gambhīramātikāya udakaṃ pesento viya gambhīramatthaṃ gamento vaggihārigatiyā pade padaṃ koṭṭento sindhavājānīyo viya ekaṃyeva padaṃ anekehi pariyāyehi punappunaṃ saṃvaṇṇanto gacchati, tassa kathā parimaṇḍalā nāma hoti dhammato atthato anusandhito pubbāparato ācariyuggahatoti sabbaso paripuṇṇabhāvato. Evarūpampi kathaṃ sandhāya ‘‘parimaṇḍalapadabyañjanāyā’’ti vuttaṃ.
“城市语”指:因功德圆满而先存,故称“城市语”,意思是:那位比丘应说此语,因其义理功德圆满而先已圆满存在。或者,因先存故,与城市妇女的柔美相似,故称“城市语”,意思是:如城市中成长的女子般柔和。或者,“城市语”即属于城市者,意思是:属于城市者即城市居民的话语。因为城市居民说话得体,称父亲般年纪者为“父”,称兄弟般年纪者为“兄”。这样的语言为众人所喜爱、可意,因此称为“城市语”。显示巴利原文
Guṇaparipuṇṇabhāvena pure bhavāti porī, tassa bhikkhuno tenetaṃ bhāsitabbaṃ atthassa guṇaparipuṇṇabhāvena pure puṇṇabhāve bhavāti attho. Pure vā bhavattā poriyā nāgarikitthiyā sukhumālattanena sadisāti porī, pure saṃvaḍḍhanārī viya sukumārāti attho. Purassa esātipi porī, purassa esāti nagaravāsīnaṃ kathāti attho. Nagaravāsino hi yuttakathā honti pitimattaṃ ‘‘pitā’’ti, bhātimattaṃ ‘‘bhātā’’ti vadanti. Evarūpī hi kathā bahuno janassa kantā hoti manāpā, tāya poriyā.
“vissaṭṭhā”:指不被胆汁、痰等所障碍,远离了可见的迟疑等过失的言语。或者,不过快、不过慢、不间断,成就一味之后,随顺大众意乐而说法者的言语,名为vissaṭṭhā。若比丘说法时,一开始讲经或本生,便从起始就急急忙忙,犹如钻木取火者、犹如咀嚼热食者,对巴利语的前后文脉,已把握的当作已把握,未把握的当作未把握,如同在枯叶间驱赶蜥蜴般到处敲打,然后停下起身离去。因为蜥蜴在枯叶间爬行时,时而可见,时而不见;同样,某些人的义理解释也时而可见,时而不见。又有说法者,时而快,时而慢,时而声低,时而声大,时而声小,犹如饿鬼口中出火,时而燃烧,时而熄灭,如是者名为“饿鬼说法者”;当大众欲起身时,他又重新开始。又有说法者,处处展开,却因缺乏辩才而陷入困境,如同因某种疾病而呻吟、哭泣般说法。所有这些人的说法,都不能称为vissaṭṭhā,因为不能安乐地流转。然而,若有人引用经文,安住于诸阿阇梨所传授的方法,不舍阿阇梨之教导,如同阿阇梨们注释彼彼经文那样,以同样的方法注释,不过快、不过显示巴利原文
Vissaṭṭhāyāti pittasemhādīhi apalibuddhāya sandiṭṭhavilambitādidosarahitāya. Atha vā nātisīghaṃ nātisaṇikaṃ nirantaraṃ ekarasañca katvā parisāya ajjhāsayānurūpaṃ dhammaṃ kathentassa vācā vissaṭṭhā nāma. Yo hi bhikkhu dhammaṃ kathento suttaṃ vā jātakaṃ vā ārabhitvā āraddhakālato paṭṭhāya turitaturito araṇiṃ manthento viya uṇhakhādanīyaṃ khādanto viya pāḷiyā anusandhipubbāparesu gahitaṃ gahitameva, aggahitaṃ aggahitameva katvā purāṇapaṇṇantaresu caramānaṃ godhaṃ uṭṭhāpento viya tattha tattha paharanto osāpetvā uṭṭhāya gacchati . Purāṇapaṇṇantaresu hi paripātiyamānā godhā kadāci dissati kadāci na dissati, evamekaccassa atthavaṇṇanā katthaci dissati katthaci na dissati. Yopi dhammaṃ kathento kālena sīghaṃ, kālena saṇikaṃ, kālena mandaṃ, kālena mahāsaddaṃ, kālena khuddakasaddaṃ karoti, yathā nijjhāmataṇhikapetassa mukhato niccharaṇakaaggi kālena jalati kālena nibbāyati, evaṃ petadhammakathiko nāma hoti, parisāya uṭṭhātukāmāya puna ārabhati. Yopi kathento tattha tattha vitthāyati, appaṭibhānatāya āpajjati, kenaci rogena nitthunanto viya kandanto viya katheti, imesaṃ sabbesampi kathā vissaṭṭhā nāma na hoti sukhena appavattabhāvato. Yo pana suttaṃ āharitvā ācariyehi dinnanaye ṭhito ācariyuggahaṃ amuñcanto yathā ca ācariyā taṃ taṃ suttaṃ saṃvaṇṇesuṃ, teneva nayena saṃvaṇṇento nātisīghaṃ nātisaṇikantiādinā vuttanayena kathāpabandhaṃ avicchinnaṃ katvā nadīsoto viya pavatteti, ākāsagaṅgāto bhassamānaudakaṃ viya nirantarakathaṃ pavatteti, tassa kathā vissaṭṭhā nāma hoti. Taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘vissaṭṭhāyā’’ti.
“无涎语”:即远离涎语。若有人说话时,涎液流出,或唾沫飞溅,其言语便称为涎语;此处意指与此相反。“能令人了知其义”:其言语能将义理的始、中、终都清晰地呈现,具有令闻者了知所说之义的能力,足以成办令人知义之事。显示巴利原文
Anelagaḷāyāti elagaḷavirahitāya. Kassaci hi kathentassa elaṃ gaḷati, lālā paggharati, kheḷaphusitāni vā nikkhamanti, tassa vācā elagaḷā nāma hoti, tabbiparītāyāti attho. Atthassa viññāpaniyāti ādimajjhapariyosānaṃ pākaṭaṃ katvā bhāsitatthassa viññāpanasamatthatāya atthañāpane sādhanāya.
“Vācāva karaṇan”即“vākkaraṇaṃ”,意为言语音声。“Kalyāṇaṃ madhuraṃ vākkaraṇaṃ assā”故称“kalyāṇavākkaraṇo”(具善妙言语者)。因此说“madhurassaro”(音声柔美)。“Hīḷetī”指轻视。“Mātugāmo”为关联词。“Manaṃ apāyati vaḍḍhetī”故为“manāpo”(令心生欢喜者)。因此说“manavaḍḍhanako”(令心增长者)。“以轮回之怖畏而震慑”者,意思是:以轮回之怖畏,令那些沉醉于青春骄慢等的比丘尼心生恐惧。“于己尚在俗家之时”者,指自己还处于在俗家时的状态。“若与比丘尼行淫法,则为玷污比丘尼者”,这仅就其与比丘尼发生身体接触而言。然而,若对在学尼及沙弥尼行淫法,则不构成“玷污比丘尼者”,故此处说“在学尼、沙弥尼,淫法”。由“身着袈裟者”此语,应知:凡先前已对犯戒的比丘尼、在学尼、沙弥尼行过重法者,即已被遮止。即使该比丘尼不在场,凡听闻其言语的女人,也都同样作此认知,因此说“女人则……”等。显示巴利原文
Vācāva karaṇanti vākkaraṇaṃ, udāhāraghoso. Kalyāṇaṃ madhuraṃ vākkaraṇaṃ assāti kalyāṇavākkaraṇo. Tenevāha ‘‘madhurassaro’’ti. Hīḷetīti avajānāti. Mātugāmoti sambandho. Manaṃ apāyati vaḍḍhetīti manāpo. Tenāha ‘‘manavaḍḍhanako’’ti. Vaṭṭabhayena tajjetvāti yobbanamadādimattā bhikkhuniyo saṃsārabhayena tāsetvā. Gihikāleti attano gihikāle. Bhikkhuniyā methunena bhikkhunīdūsako hotīti bhikkhuniyā kāyasaṃsaggameva vadati. Sikkhamānāsāmaṇerīsu pana methunenapi bhikkhunīdūsako na hotīti āha ‘‘sikkhamānāsāmaṇerīsu methunadhamma’’nti. ‘‘Kāsāyavatthavasanāyā’’ti vacanato dussīlāsu bhikkhunīsikkhamānāsāmaṇerīsu garudhammaṃ ajjhāpannapubbo paṭikkhittoyevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tassā bhikkhuniyā abhāvepi yā yā tassā vacanaṃ assosuṃ, tā tā tatheva maññantīti āha ‘‘mātugāmo hī’’tiādi.
今为总摄八项条件而作开示,故说“ettha ca”等。然而,若以白四甘马任命那些不具足此八项条件者,羯磨师犯恶作罪,但该比丘仍被视为已被如法任命。显示巴利原文
Idāni aṭṭha aṅgāni samodhānetvā dassetuṃ ‘‘ettha cā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Imehi pana aṭṭhahaṅgehi asamannāgataṃ ñatticatutthena kammena sammannento dukkaṭaṃ āpajjati, bhikkhu pana sammatoyeva hoti.
148 “Garukehī”指应受尊重恭敬者。“Ekatoupasampannāyā”是于受词之义而用依格。或者,当“ovadatī”或“vadatī”取其“言说”之义时,也可用为与格。所谓在比丘僧团前受具足戒的“upasampannā”,指的是舍俗易形者,或指五百释迦族女等。显示巴利原文
148.Garukehīti garukātabbehi. Ekatoupasampannāyāti upayogatthe bhummavacanaṃ. ‘‘Ovadatī’’ti vā imassa ‘‘vadatī’’ti atthe sati sampadānavacanampi yujjati. Bhikkhūnaṃ santike upasampannā nāma parivattaliṅgā vā pañcasatasākiyāniyo vā.
149 “敷设座位”——于此,三处结文中均说:“若地面令人满意,亦可不敷设座位。”以“女人”一词,比丘尼亦被包含,故说“为说法、为免罪”。因为所有比丘尼皆须前往受委派比丘处,于布萨日求教诫,故以“诸姐妹,你们齐集了吗?”这句话询问是否一切皆已到来,所以说“一切皆已来到”。对于因病未至者,因病人未至已获开许,而凡能来者已悉数来到,故可说“我们齐集了”。“在村落内”等——若在某处无法将五体投地于地面行礼,则可于站立处弯身向前,合掌说“顶礼,圣尼”,然后离去,这亦是可行的。“于室内”——在某些地方,从城门门槛以内称为村落内;在某些地方,从宅门以内称为室内。而此处既然另说了“在村落内”,则“于室内”当理解为指室内。“无论在何处”,即村落内等任何处所。显示巴利原文
149.Āsanaṃ paññapetvāti ettha ‘‘sace bhūmi manāpā hoti, āsanaṃ apaññāpetumpi vaṭṭatī’’ti tīsupi gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ. Mātugāmaggahaṇena bhikkhunīpi saṅgahitāti āha ‘‘dhammadesanāpattimocanattha’’nti. Sammatassa bhikkhuno santikaṃ pāṭipade ovādatthāya sabbāhi bhikkhunīhi āgantabbato ‘‘samaggāttha bhaginiyo’’ti iminā sabbāsaṃ āgamanaṃ pucchatīti āha ‘‘sabbā āgatātthā’’ti. Gilānāsu anāgatāsupi gilānānaṃ anāgamanassa anuññātattā āgantuṃ samatthāhi ca sabbāhi āgatattā ‘‘samaggāmhayyā’’ti vattuṃ vaṭṭati. Antogāme vātiādīsu yattha pañca aṅgāni bhūmiyaṃ patiṭṭhāpetvā vandituṃ na sakkā hoti, tattha ṭhitāya eva kāyaṃ purato nāmetvā ‘‘vandāmi ayyā’’ti añjaliṃ paggayha gantumpi vaṭṭati. Antaragharanti katthaci nagaradvārassa bahiindakhīlato paṭṭhāya antogāmo vuccati, katthaci gharummārato paṭṭhāya antogehaṃ. Idha pana ‘‘antogāme vā’’ti visuṃ vuttattā ‘‘antaraghare vā’’ti antogehaṃ sandhāya vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Yattha katthacīti antogāmādīsu yattha katthaci.
“可以居住”的意思是:相信“请住下,圣尼们,我们将带比丘们来”这句话而住下,是许可的。“并非受了邀请而想去”的意思是:并非因受到人们邀请而想去,意在说明她们是想就在那里入雨安居。“从那里”指从比丘尼的住处。“请求后”是指请求说:“我们就依你们带来的教诫而住。”“在那里”指在那个比丘尼住处。“应依来者的教诫而住”是指应以随后的方式入雨安居。“在无比丘的住处居住者有犯戒”——这是通过举罪的方式,从一般情况指出犯戒的可能,但并非她真的犯了此戒。“即使破雨安居而去者也有犯戒”是指未入雨安居的根本犯戒。由于另一犯戒存在无犯的理由,所以说“应守护它”,意思是应守护那未入雨安居的根本犯戒,意在说明在无比丘的住处,遇到这样的灾厄时也应入雨安居。因此说:“因为在灾厄中……说为无犯。”然而对于另一犯戒,则是无犯;在没有理由的情况下,也不应以随后的方式入雨安居。因为若有比丘在而不入雨安居,则有犯戒。“应去那里并邀请”此处,是因为若不邀请则有犯戒的可能。如果比丘们的住处即使很远,但能在初九日前往邀请,则应去那里邀请。但如果显示巴利原文
Vaṭṭatīti ‘‘vasatha ayye, mayaṃ bhikkhū ānessāmā’’ti vuttavacanaṃ saddahantīhi vasituṃ vaṭṭati. Na nimantitā hutvā gantukāmāti manussehi nimantitā hutvā gantukāmā na hontīti attho, tattheva vassaṃ upagantukāmā hontīti adhippāyo. Yatoti bhikkhunupassayato. Yācitvāti ‘‘tumhehi ānītaovādeneva mayampi vasissāmā’’ti yācitvā. Tatthāti tasmiṃ bhikkhunupassaye. Āgatānaṃ santike ovādena vasitabbanti pacchimikāya vassaṃ vasitabbaṃ. Abhikkhukāvāse vasantiyā āpattīti codanāmukhena sāmaññato āpattippasaṅgaṃ vadati, na pana tassā āpatti. Vassacchedaṃ katvā gacchantiyāpi āpattīti vassānupagamamūlaṃ āpattiṃ vadati. Itarāya āpattiyā anāpattikāraṇasabbhāvato ‘‘sā rakkhitabbā’’ti vuttaṃ, sā vassānupagamamūlā āpatti rakkhitabbāti attho, abhikkhukepi āvāse īdisāsu āpadāsu vassaṃ upagantabbanti adhippāyo. Tenāha ‘‘āpadāsu hi…pe… anāpatti vuttā’’ti. Itarāya pana āpattiyā anāpatti, kāraṇe asati pacchimikāyapi vassaṃ na upagantabbaṃ. Santesu hi bhikkhūsu vassaṃ anupagacchantiyā āpatti. Tattha gantvā pavāretabbanti ettha apavārentīnaṃ āpattisambhavato. Sace dūrepi bhikkhūnaṃ vasanaṭṭhānaṃ hoti, sakkā ca hoti navamiyaṃ gantvā pavāretuṃ, tattha gantvā pavāretabbaṃ. Sace pana navamiyaṃ nikkhamitvā sampāpuṇituṃ na sakkā hoti, agacchantīnaṃ anāpatti.
询问布萨称为“布萨问”,该词通过省略音节、缩短元音而被称为“布萨问者”,故注释中说“布萨问”。应询问布萨,即应问:“圣尼,布萨在何时?”比丘也应回答:“姊妹,布萨在明天。”比丘们有时因某种原因将十五日的布萨改为十四日,或将十四日的布萨改为十五日,而比丘尼们应在比丘们举行布萨的同一天举行布萨,以此意趣,故说“就在半月的十三日前往”等。如此询问时,如果比丘们在十四日举行布萨,比丘应说:“是十四日的,姊妹。”如果在十五日举行,则应告知:“是十五日的,姊妹。”“为教诫”是指为了请求教诫。从初一开始,为听闻佛法而应前往,即在初一为接受教诫,从初二起应间或前往听闻佛法。接受教诫也无差别地被说为“听闻佛法”。“无间断地前往寺院”是就大多数前往的情况而说。通过“因为已说”等文,为说明“我们将依教奉行”,所有比丘尼皆前往,这是引用经文。“去教诫”是指去请求教诫。“二、三”是指两个、三个。此处是业格用作主格。显示巴利原文
Uposathassa pucchanaṃ uposathapucchā, sāyeva ka-ppaccayaṃ rassattañca katvā uposathapucchakanti vuttāti āha ‘‘uposathapucchana’’nti. Uposatho pucchitabboti ‘‘kadā, ayya, uposatho’’ti pucchitabbo. Bhikkhunāpi ‘‘sve, bhagini, uposatho’’ti vattabbaṃ. Bhikkhū kadāci kenaci kāraṇena pannarasikaṃ vā cātuddasīuposathaṃ, cātuddasikaṃ vā pannarasīuposathaṃ karonti, yasmiñca divase bhikkhūhi uposatho kato, tasmiṃyeva bhikkhunīhipi uposatho kātabboti adhippāyena ‘‘pakkhassa terasiyaṃyeva gantvā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Evaṃ pucchitena bhikkhunā sace cātuddasiyaṃ uposathaṃ karonti, ‘‘cātuddasiko bhaginī’’ti vattabbaṃ. Sace pana pannarasiyaṃ karonti, ‘‘pannarasiko bhaginī’’ti ācikkhitabbaṃ. Ovādatthāyāti ovādayācanatthāya. Pāṭipadadivasato pana paṭṭhāya dhammasavanatthāya gantabbanti pāṭipadadivase ovādaggahaṇatthāya dutiyadivasato paṭṭhāya antarantarā dhammasavanatthāya gantabbaṃ. Ovādaggahaṇampi hi ‘‘dhammasavanamevā’’ti abhedena vuttaṃ. Nirantaraṃ vihāraṃ upasaṅkamiṃsūti yebhuyyena upasaṅkamanaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Vuttañhetantiādinā yathānusiṭṭhaṃ paṭipajjissāmāti sabbāsaṃyeva bhikkhunīnaṃ upasaṅkamanadīpanatthaṃ pāḷi nidassitā. Ovādaṃ gacchatīti ovādaṃ yācituṃ gacchati. Dve tissoti dvīhi tīhi. Karaṇatthe cetaṃ paccattavacanaṃ.
“以令人欢喜的”是指以能生起净信、无过失的身业等。“令成就”是指成就三种学。如果比丘尼们只见到诵戒者而请求了教诫,那么应当如何处理?在布萨堂中比丘僧团聚集时,依前行事务问“是否有比丘尼请求教诫”时,接受教诫者应说“应这样说”,由另一比丘转述后,诵戒者应亲自说出应说的话,然后再亲自去告知比丘尼们,或者由另一比丘在那一天让他诵戒。这里所说的“她们”是用了复数形式。显示巴利原文
Pāsādikenāti pasādajanakena niddosena kāyakammādinā. Sampādetūti tividhaṃ sikkhaṃ sampādetu. Sace pātimokkhuddesakaṃyeva disvā tāhi bhikkhunīhi ovādo yācito bhaveyya, tena kiṃ kātabbanti? Uposathagge sannipatite bhikkhusaṅghe pubbakiccavasena ‘‘atthi kāci bhikkhuniyo ovādaṃ yācamānā’’ti pucchiyamāne ‘‘evaṃ vadehī’’ti ovādapaṭiggāhakena vattabbavacanaṃ aññena bhikkhunā kathāpetvā pātimokkhuddesakena vattabbavacanaṃ attanā vatvā puna sayameva gantvā bhikkhunīnaṃ ārocetabbaṃ, aññena vā bhikkhunā tasmiṃ divase pātimokkhaṃ uddisāpetabbaṃ. Etaṃ vuttanti ‘‘tāhī’’ti etaṃ bahuvacanaṃ vuttaṃ.
“一位比丘尼”:这是针对从众多比丘尼住处而来、仅由一位比丘尼接受消息的情形而说,并非指没有同伴。“由众多比丘尼住处”是指在途中或就在那个村庄的众多比丘尼住处。“比丘尼僧团、圣尼们和比丘尼”这句话显示了从不同住处接受消息后回来的比丘尼应当说的话。这仅是作为一种方式的示例而说,实际上在各个比丘尼住处,应观待比丘尼的人数,以相应的方法来说。“致比丘僧团、圣者们、圣者”这是简略的说法。显示巴利原文
Ekā bhikkhunī vāti idaṃ bahūhi bhikkhunupassayehi ekāya eva bhikkhuniyā sāsanapaṭiggahaṇaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, na pana dutiyikāya abhāvaṃ sandhāya. Bahūhi bhikkhunupassayehīti antarāmagge vā tasmiṃyeva vā gāme bahūhi bhikkhunupassayehi. ‘‘Bhikkhunisaṅgho ca ayya bhikkhuniyo ca bhikkhunī cā’’ti iminā nānāupassayehi sāsanaṃ gahetvā āgatabhikkhuniyā vattabbavacanaṃ dasseti. Idañca ekena pakārena mukhamattanidassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ, tasmiṃ tasmiṃ pana bhikkhunupassaye bhikkhunīnaṃ pamāṇaṃ sallakkhetvā tadanurūpena nayena vattabbaṃ. Bhikkhusaṅghassa ayyānaṃ ayyassāti idaṃ saṅkhipitvā vuttaṃ.
“诵戒者也”这句话是仅就僧团布萨而说。然而,在三个或两个比丘的住处,如果没有诵戒,在那里也应由负责提出动议者或其他比丘依此方式来说。即使只有一个人,在布萨日接受了教诫请求后,对在月朔日到来的比丘尼们,也应说“没有人”等。如果他自己就是被选任者,则应说“我是被选任的”。不知此法者,在这里被称为愚者。显示巴利原文
Pātimokkhuddesakenapīti idaṃ saṅghuposathavaseneva dassitaṃ. Yattha pana tiṇṇaṃ dvinnaṃ vā vasanaṭṭhāne pātimokkhuddeso natthi, tatthāpi ñattiṭhapanakena itarena vā bhikkhunā imināva nayena vattabbaṃ. Ekapuggalenapi uposathadivase ovādayācanaṃ sampaṭicchitvā pāṭipade āgatānaṃ bhikkhunīnaṃ ‘‘natthi kocī’’tiādi vattabbameva. Sace sayameva, ‘‘sammato aha’’nti vattabbaṃ. Imaṃ vidhiṃ ajānanto idha bāloti adhippeto.
150 在“非法行为中,作非法行为想,而对别众的比丘尼僧团施以教诫,并认为是别众,犯波逸提”等情形中,虽然也存在以别众等为因的恶作罪,但经典中各处都只说以非法行为为根本的波逸提。因此注释中说:“就非法行为而言,依两类九种情况,共有十八个波逸提。”此处其余内容容易了解。在此,未获选任、比丘尼圆满受具足戒、以教诫的方式宣说八敬法,是构成此罪的三个要素。显示巴利原文
150.Adhammakamme adhammakammasaññī vaggaṃ bhikkhunisaṅghaṃ vaggasaññī ovadati, āpatti pācittiyassātiādīsu vijjamānesupi vaggādibhāvanimittesu dukkaṭesu adhammakammamūlakaṃ pācittiyameva pāḷiyaṃ sabbattha vuttanti āha ‘‘adhammakamme dvinnaṃ navakānaṃ vasena aṭṭhārasa pācittiyānī’’ti. Sesamettha uttānameva. Asammatatā, bhikkhuniyā paripuṇṇūpasampannatā, ovādavasena aṭṭhagarudhammabhaṇananti imāni panettha tīṇi aṅgāni.
二、日没学处注释显示巴利原文
2. Atthaṅgatasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
153 第二,“对善法的持续实践”是就前行阶段的修行而说的。“牟尼”意为“了知”。“以彼智慧”即是以称为阿罗汉果慧的智慧。“于诸道”即于方便道。由于阿罗汉已圆满学处,故说“此亦……云云”。或者,“不放逸者”与“学者”这些词应视为表达原因之义:以不放逸为因、以学为因,而令心增上,这是其义。“忧”即心的热恼。在此应知:以“增上心”指增上心学,以“不放逸”指增上戒学,以“牟尼于牟尼道中学”指增上慧学;或者,以“牟尼”指增上慧学,以“于牟尼道中学”指出世间学的前行修习,而以“无忧”等句,则开示了学处圆满的功德。显示巴利原文
153. Dutiye kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ sātaccakiriyāyāti pubbabhāgappaṭipattivasena vuttaṃ. Munātīti jānāti. Tena ñāṇenāti tena arahattaphalapaññāsaṅkhātena ñāṇena. Pathesūti upāyamaggesu. Arahato pariniṭṭhitasikkhattā āha ‘‘idañca…pe… vutta’’nti. Atha vā ‘‘appamajjato sikkhato’’ti imesaṃ padānaṃ hetuatthatā daṭṭhabbā, tasmā appamajjanahetu sikkhanahetu ca adhicetasoti attho. Sokāti cittasantāpā. Ettha ca adhicetasoti iminā adhicittasikkhā, appamajjatoti iminā adhisīlasikkhā, munino monapathesu sikkhatoti etehi adhipaññāsikkhā, muninoti vā etena adhipaññāsikkhā, monapathesu sikkhatoti etena tāsaṃ lokuttarasikkhānaṃ pubbabhāgappaṭipadā, sokā na bhavantītiādīhi sikkhāpāripūriyā ānisaṃsā pakāsitāti veditabbaṃ.
“Kokanuda”是莲花的修饰语,如同“kokāsaya”一样。据说那种莲花叶子繁多、色彩鲜明,且极为芳香。也有人称“名为Kokanuda的即是白莲花”。“Pāto”意为清晨。此处的意思是:正如名为Kokanuda的莲花,在清晨日出时分绽放盛开,芬芳不散,光彩照人;同样地,请你看那位以身体之香与功德之香而芬芳、秋季时在空中犹如太阳般以自身光辉照耀、因肢节放光而称为Angīrasa的正自觉者。显示巴利原文
Kokanudanti padumavisesanaṃ yathā ‘‘kokāsaya’’nti, taṃ kira bahupattaṃ vaṇṇasampannaṃ ativiya sugandhañca hoti. ‘‘Kokanudaṃ nāma setapaduma’’ntipi vadanti. Pātoti pageva. Ayañhettha attho – yathā kokanudasaṅkhātaṃ padumaṃ pāto sūriyuggamanavelāyaṃ phullaṃ vikasitaṃ avītagandhaṃ siyā virocamānaṃ, evaṃ sarīragandhena guṇagandhena ca sugandhaṃ saradakāle antalikkhe ādiccamiva attano tejasā tapantaṃ aṅgehi niccharaṇajutitāya aṅgīrasaṃ sammāsambuddhaṃ passāti.
“不能”的含义是:此教法以修行为核心,修行又以教理学习为根本,而你无力学习教理,因此说“不能”,这是它的意旨。“一块干净的布片”指以神通化作的清净布片。据说那时世尊说:“不能诵习者,并非不能住于我的教法中,比丘,莫忧愁!”便执其手臂领入寺院,以神通化作一块布片交给他,说:“来,比丘,你一边擦拭此布,一边反复诵习‘除尘、除尘’。”他由于往昔的宿缘,在那里……显示巴利原文
Abhabboti paṭipattisāramidaṃ sāsanaṃ, paṭipatti ca pariyattimūlikā, tvañca pariyattiṃ uggahetuṃ asamattho, tasmā abhabboti adhippāyo. Suddhaṃ pilotikakhaṇḍanti iddhiyā abhisaṅkhataṃ parisuddhaṃ coḷakhaṇḍaṃ. Tadā kira bhagavā ‘‘na sajjhāyaṃ kātuṃ asakkonto mama sāsane abhabbo nāma hoti, mā soci bhikkhū’’ti taṃ bāhāyaṃ gahetvā vihāraṃ pavisitvā iddhiyā pilotikakhaṇḍaṃ abhinimminitvā ‘‘handa, bhikkhu, imaṃ parimajjanto ‘rajoharaṇaṃ rajoharaṇa’nti punappunaṃ sajjhāyaṃ karohī’’ti vatvā adāsi tattha pubbekatādhikārattā.
据说他过去世曾为国王,右绕城市巡行之时,额头出汗,便用一块干净的布擦拭额头,布被弄脏了。他心想:“依于这个身体,这块原本清净的布竟失去了它的清净而变脏,诸行确实无常!”由此获得了无常想。以此因缘,那块除尘布便成了他的助缘。“除尘”即除去尘垢。生起悚惧感:即通过引发不净想与无常想而生起悚惧感。当他如理作意擦拭之时,思惟:“布是清净的,这里没有过失;这是自身的过失。”从而获得了不净想与无常想,随后将智慧投入五蕴,通过名色把握等方法,依聚思维等次第增长观智,从生灭智等逐步将观智推进至随顺智、种姓智的近处。关于此,说“他开始了观修”。“说示光耀偈”:即说示了以光耀为答的偈颂,称为光耀偈,他宣说了此偈,这是其含义。显示巴利原文
So kira pubbe rājā hutvā nagaraṃ padakkhiṇaṃ karonto nalāṭato sede muccante parisuddhena sāṭakena nalāṭaṃ puñchi, sāṭako kiliṭṭho ahosi . So ‘‘imaṃ sarīraṃ nissāya evarūpo parisuddhasāṭako pakatiṃ jahitvā kiliṭṭho jāto, aniccā vata saṅkhārā’’ti aniccasaññaṃ paṭilabhati, tena kāraṇenassa rajoharaṇameva paccayo jāto. Rajaṃ haratīti rajoharaṇaṃ. Saṃvegaṃ paṭilabhitvāti asubhasaññaṃ aniccasaññañca upaṭṭhapento saṃvegaṃ paṭilabhitvā. So hi yoniso ummajjanto ‘‘parisuddhaṃ vatthaṃ, natthettha doso, attabhāvassa panāyaṃ doso’’ti asubhasaññaṃ aniccasaññañca paṭilabhitvā nāmarūpapariggahādinā pañcasu khandhesu ñāṇaṃ otāretvā kalāpasammasanādikkamena vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā udayabbayañāṇādipaapāṭiyā vipassanaṃ anulomagotrabhusamīpaṃ pāpesi. Taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘vipassanaṃ ārabhī’’ti. Obhāsagāthaṃ abhāsīti obhāsavissajjanapubbakabhāsitagāthā obhāsagāthā, taṃ abhāsīti attho.
这里所说的“以‘增上心’说示了此光耀偈”,正是此处的意思。而在《清净道论》(清净道论 2.386)、《法句经注》(法句经注 1.周利般陀伽长老事)和《长老偈注》(长老偈注 2.566)中:显示巴利原文
Ettha ca ‘‘adhicetasoti imaṃ obhāsagāthaṃ abhāsī’’ti idheva vuttaṃ. Visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 2.386) pana dhammapadaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (dha. pa. aṭṭha. 1.cūḷapanthakattheravatthu) theragāthāsaṃvaṇṇanāyañca (theragā. aṭṭha. 2.566) –
‘‘Rāgo rajo na ca pana reṇu vuccati;
所谓‘尘垢’,乃是贪欲的增上语;显示巴利原文
Rāgassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ rajoti;
痴是尘垢,并非所谓的微尘;
‘尘垢’是愚痴的增上语;
智者舍断此尘垢后,
安住于离尘垢者的教法中。
显示巴利原文 Etaṃ rajaṃ vippajahitvā paṇḍitā; Viharanti te vigatarajassa sāsane. ‘‘Doso…pe… sāsane. ‘‘Moho rajo na ca pana reṇu vuccati; Mohassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ rajoti; Etaṃ rajaṃ vippajahitvā paṇḍitā; Viharanti te vigatarajassa sāsaneti. –
他说了这三首光耀偈。而“增上心”这首偈颂,是周利般陀伽长老的优陀那偈,这在此巴利本中已有记载。然而在《长老偈》中,并未将这首偈列入周利般陀伽长老的优陀那偈,而是在那里说:“这是一优陀那长老的优陀那偈”(《长老偈注》1.一优陀那长老偈注释)。话虽如此,既然此巴利本及注疏中皆如此记载,故应理解为:这首优陀那偈同样出自周利般陀伽长老,并且是世尊作为光耀偈而宣说的。他证得了阿罗汉:即具足神通与无碍解的阿罗汉。从“你不能”等语来看,出于悲悯而将共住弟子等驱出僧园,似乎是无罪的。因为这位长老并非有意为之,又或许是在驱出学处尚未制定时长老那样做的,应如此理解。显示巴利原文
Imā tisso obhāsagāthā abhāsī’’ti vuttaṃ. Adhicetasoti ca ayaṃ cūḷapanthakattherassa udānagāthāti imissāyeva pāḷiyā āgataṃ. Theragāthāyaṃ pana cūḷapanthakattherassa udānagāthāsu ayaṃ anāruḷhā, ‘‘ekudāniyattherassa pana ayaṃ udānagāthā’’ti (theragā. aṭṭha. 1.ekudāniyattheragāthāvaṇṇanā) tattha vuttaṃ. Evaṃ santepi imissā pāḷiyā aṭṭhakathāya ca evamāgatattā cūḷapanthakattherassapi ayaṃ udānagāthā obhāsagāthāvasena ca bhagavatā bhāsitāti gahetabbaṃ. Arahattaṃ pāpuṇīti abhiññāpaṭisambhidāparivāraṃ arahattaṃ pāpuṇi. Abhabbo tvantiādivacanato anukampāvasena saddhivihārikādiṃ saṅghikavihārā nikkaḍḍhāpentassa anāpatti viya dissati. Abhabbo hi thero sañcicca taṃ kātuṃ, nikkaḍḍhanasikkhāpade vā apaññatte therena evaṃ katanti gahetabbaṃ.
156 第156条,教诫者的波逸提:即日落后,以重法或其他法教诫比丘尼者,即便是已受指派的,亦犯波逸提。其余内容此处易解。日落、对方是具足戒的比丘尼、教诫,这是此处的三项要素。显示巴利原文
156.Ovadantassa pācittiyanti atthaṅgate sūriye garudhammehi vā aññena vā dhammeneva ovadantassa sammatassapi pācittiyaṃ. Sesamettha uttānameva. Atthaṅgatasūriyatā, paripuṇṇūpasampannatā, ovadananti imāni panettha tīṇi aṅgāni.
三、比丘尼住所学处注释显示巴利原文
3. Bhikkhunupassayasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
162 第162条,第三项意义易解。前往比丘尼住处、对方是具足戒的比丘尼、非适当时间、以重法教诫,这是此处的四项要素。显示巴利原文
162. Tatiyaṃ uttānatthameva. Upassayūpagamanaṃ, paripuṇṇūpasampannatā, samayābhāvo, garudhammehi ovadananti imāni panettha cattāri aṅgāni.
四、利养学处注释显示巴利原文
4. Āmisasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
164 第四项中,“对已受具足戒者……比丘尼教诫者”与“欲使其羞愧”相关联。依“欲说其坏话、欲使其名誉扫地”之义,“已受具足戒者”等词应变为“对已受具足戒者”的对格,故说“其义应依说嫌责者中所说的方法来理解”。若说“以衣服为由而教诫”等语,每说一句即犯波逸提。根据巴利经文“对未受僧团认可的已受具足戒者”及注释书所言“由受认可者或由僧团托付责任而任命者”,应知:具足八支的受认可者,或因即将远行而请求“在我回来之前,责任由你承担”并受任命者,在其缺席时,或由僧团同样托付责任而任命者,可以八敬法或其他法作教诫。因此,“若比丘教诫未受认可的比丘尼,犯波逸提”这句话,是对事先未托付责任而任命者说的。显示巴利原文
164. Catutthe ‘‘upasampannaṃ…pe… bhikkhunovādaka’’nti imesaṃ ‘‘maṅkukattukāmo’’ti iminā sambandho. ‘‘Avaṇṇaṃ kattukāmo ayasaṃ kattukāmo’’ti imesaṃ pana vasena ‘‘upasampanna’’ntiādīsu ‘‘upasampannassā’’ti vibhattivipariṇāmo kātabboti imamatthaṃ sandhāya ‘‘ujjhāpanake vuttanayenevattho veditabbo’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Cīvarahetu ovadatī’’tiādinā bhaṇantassa ekekasmiṃ vacane niṭṭhite pācittiyaṃ veditabbaṃ. ‘‘Upasampannaṃ saṅghena asammata’’nti pāḷivacanato ‘‘sammatena vā saṅghena vā bhāraṃ katvā ṭhapito’’ti aṭṭhakathāvacanato ca aṭṭhahi aṅgehi samannāgato sammatena vā vippavasitukāmena ‘‘yāvāhaṃ āgamissāmi, tāva te bhāro hotū’’ti yācitvā ṭhapito tassābhāvato saṅghena vā tatheva bhāraṃ katvā ṭhapito aṭṭhahi garudhammehi aññena vā dhammena ovadituṃ labhatīti veditabbaṃ. Tasmā ‘‘yo pana, bhikkhu, asammato bhikkhuniyo ovadeyya, pācittiya’’nti idaṃ pageva bhāraṃ katvā aṭṭhapitaṃ sandhāya vuttanti gahetabbaṃ.
168 无犯:若针对原本以衣服为由……的教诫者而说。此处,对以物质利益为由而教诫者,若以“他以物质利益为由而教诫”的想法而说,无犯;若心想“他并非以物质利益为由而教诫”,则犯恶作。对并非以物质利益为由而教诫者,若以“他以物质利益为由而教诫”的想法而说,亦无犯,因为此学处依心念而定。其余易解。已受具足戒、依法获得认可、无物质利益动机、怀欲说坏话之心而这样说,是此处的四支。显示巴利原文
168.Anāpatti pakatiyā cīvarahetu…pe… ovadantaṃ bhaṇatīti ettha āmisahetu ovadantaṃ ‘‘āmisahetu ovadatī’’ti saññāya evaṃ bhaṇantassa anāpatti, ‘‘na āmisahetu ovadatī’’ti saññino pana dukkaṭaṃ, na āmisahetu ovadantaṃ pana ‘‘āmisahetu ovadatī’’ti saññāya bhaṇantassapi anāpatti sacittakattā sikkhāpadassa. Sesamettha uttānameva. Upasampannatā, dhammena laddhasammutitā, anāmisantaratā, avaṇṇakāmatāya evaṃ bhaṇananti imāni panettha cattāri aṅgāni.
169 第五项,其义易解。显示巴利原文
169. Pañcamaṃ uttānatthameva.
六、令缝衣学处的注释显示巴利原文
6. Cīvarasibbāpanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
175 第六项中,若那位比丘尼从一开始就披上那件衣,其他比丘尼看见后可能会生嫌责,她心想“大众将看不到了”,便说出“如同把收集来的东西拿走并存放起来”等语。显示巴利原文
175. Chaṭṭhe sace sā bhikkhunī taṃ cīvaraṃ āditova pārupeyya, aññā bhikkhuniyo disvā ujjhāpeyyuṃ, tato mahājano passituṃ na labhatīti maññamāno ‘‘yathāsaṃhaṭaṃ haritvā nikkhipitvā’’tiādimāha.
176 “取出”是指一次取出。“那些依附他们的人”与此相关联。所谓“裁缝义务”,是指依“应为同梵行者做”的应作性而做针线活。对戒师与依止师犯恶作,是由于受用了不如法之物。所谓欺骗,即不说“为了你的亲属”,而只说“为某位比丘尼”。听了“为某位比丘尼”之后,他们或许会以为是其亲属,故说“因被指使做不如法之事”。即使未说“这是你母亲的衣”等语,若以清净心说“请缝此衣”而令人缝制,则无犯。显示巴利原文
176.Nīharatīti sakiṃ nīharati. Yepi tesaṃ nissitakāti sambandho. Kathinavattanti ‘‘sabrahmacārīnaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti itikattabbatāvasena sūcikammakaraṇaṃ. Ācariyupajjhāyānaṃ dukkaṭanti akappiyasamādānavasena dukkaṭaṃ. Vañcetvāti ‘‘tava ñātikāyā’’ti avatvā ‘‘ekissā bhikkhuniyā’’ti ettakameva vatvā. ‘‘Ekissā bhikkhuniyā’’ti sutvā te aññātikasaññino bhaveyyunti āha ‘‘akappiye niyojitattā’’ti . ‘‘Idaṃ te mātu cīvara’’ntiādīni avatvāpi ‘‘idaṃ cīvaraṃ sibbehī’’ti suddhacittena sibbāpentassapi anāpatti.
179 “鞋袋等”中的“等”字,涵盖了那些不能用来下着或上披的衣,这些也包含在内。其余此处易解。衣属于非亲里比丘尼所有、可作下着或上披之用、依前述方式缝制或令人缝制,这是此处的三支。显示巴利原文
179.Upāhanatthavikādinti ādi-saddena yaṃ cīvaraṃ nivāsetuṃ vā pārupituṃ vā na sakkā hoti, tampi saṅgaṇhāti. Sesamettha uttānameva. Aññātikāya bhikkhuniyā santakatā, nivāsanapārupanūpagatā, vuttanayena sibbanaṃ vā sibbāpanaṃ vāti imāni panettha tīṇi aṅgāni.
七、约定安排学处的注释显示巴利原文
7. Saṃvidahanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
181 第七项中,“盗贼抢走了走在后面者的……”此处经文异读作“衣钵”,因此说“走在后面者的衣钵”。那些比丘尼,即走在后面的比丘尼们。此处须知,“走在后面者”是通过格变化建立关联。在巴利经文中,若以比丘为先而约定,则说:“我们走吧,姐妹;我们走吧,圣尼”;若以比丘尼为先,则说:“我们走吧,圣者;我们走吧,姐妹”。“同一段路程”是指一段可称为路程的道路,或者共同走一段路程。“昨天”是指明天。“后天”是指第三天。显示巴利原文
181. Sattame ‘‘pacchā gacchantīnaṃ corā acchindiṃsū’’ti ettha ‘‘pattacīvara’’nti pāṭhasesoti āha ‘‘pacchā gacchantīnaṃ pattacīvara’’nti. Tā bhikkhuniyoti pacchā gacchantiyo bhikkhuniyo. ‘‘Pacchā gacchantīna’’nti ca vibhattivipariṇāmenettha sambandho veditabbo. Pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘gacchāma bhagini, gacchāma ayyā’’ti bhikkhupubbakaṃ saṃvidhānaṃ vuttaṃ, ‘‘gacchāma ayya, gacchāma bhaginī’’ti bhikkhunīpubbakaṃ. Ekaddhānamagganti ekaṃ addhānasaṅkhātaṃ maggaṃ, ekato vā addhānamaggaṃ. Hiyyoti suve. Pareti tatiyadivase.
182-183 所谓两种所说的方式,是指依步行方式或依派别方式而说的两种类别。四条道路的交汇处称为四叉路口,三条道路的交汇处称为三叉路口。“于村与村之间”这一句中,另一个村称为村间,因此说“出村时无犯……比丘犯波逸提”。由于巴利经文中的“约定后”一词没有简别说明,因此说“既不符经文”;又因为说“在此范围内即使约定,比丘也犯恶作”,因此说“亦不符其余注释书”。超过半由旬,是指在无村之地超过半由旬。凡在半由旬范围内没有其他村庄之处,该处即指无村的林野;若半由旬内有村庄,则按村间计数而犯。显示巴利原文
182-183.Dvidhā vuttappakāroti pādagamanavasena pakkhagamanavasena vāti dvidhā vuttappabhedo . Catunnaṃ maggānaṃ sambandhaṭṭhānaṃ catukkaṃ, tiṇṇaṃ maggānaṃ sambandhaṭṭhānaṃ siṅghāṭakaṃ. ‘‘Gāmantare gāmantare’’ti ettha añño gāmo gāmantaranti āha ‘‘nikkhamane anāpatti…pe… bhikkhuno pācittiya’’nti. ‘‘Saṃvidhāyā’’ti pāḷiyaṃ avisesena vuttattā ‘‘neva pāḷiyā sametī’’ti vuttaṃ, ‘‘etthantare saṃvidahitepi bhikkhuno dukkaṭa’’nti vuttattā ‘‘na sesaaṭṭhakathāya sametī’’ti vuttaṃ. Addhayojanaṃ atikkamantassāti asati gāme addhayojanaṃ atikkamantassa. Yattha hi addhayojanabbhantare añño gāmo na hoti, taṃ idha agāmakaṃ araññanti adhippetaṃ, addhayojanabbhantare pana gāme sati gāmantaragaṇanāya eva āpatti.
185 185. “国土分裂”指国土遭掠夺。“登上轮”指登上行路之轮或车轮。其余易解。两人约定后上路、非约定地点、无适当因缘、非灾祸时、进入村间或超过半由旬,此为此处的五支。与单方受具足戒者等同行者,则以有关妇女的学处而犯。显示巴利原文
185.Raṭṭhabhedeti raṭṭhavilope. Cakkasamāruḷhāti iriyāpathacakkaṃ sakaṭacakkaṃ vā samāruḷhā. Sesaṃ uttānameva. Dvinnampi saṃvidahitvā maggappaṭipatti , avisaṅketaṃ, samayābhāvo, anāpadā, gāmantarokkamanaṃ vā addhayojanātikkamo vāti imāni panettha pañca aṅgāni. Ekatoupasampannādīhi saddhiṃ gacchantassa pana mātugāmasikkhāpadena āpatti.
八、登船学处的注释显示巴利原文
8. Nāvābhiruhanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
188 第八条中,以世间滋味与交友亲近为缘,而以游戏为先导相约——这一差别依“如是……与比丘尼们同船游戏”及“向上游或向下游”而成立。显示巴利原文
188. Aṭṭhame lokassādamittasanthavavasena kīḷāpurekkhārā saṃvidahitvāti ayaṃ viseso ‘‘evamime…pe… bhikkhunīhi saddhiṃ nāvāya kīḷantī’’ti iminā ‘‘uddhaṃgāminiṃ vā adhogāminiṃ vā’’ti iminā ca siddho.
189 关于“河流从何处至他乡”,有说:“于某河流”等。“以其有聚落的河岸……乃至半由旬计算”,这是仅就沿着每一岸行走而言;若有人沿如此河流的中央而行,他们说,以聚落间计算及以半由旬计算,皆会犯戒。以“一切注释书中”等语,论证自宗之义。(他们说:)“由于以游戏为先导而与比丘尼相约乘船,在河流中即犯波逸提;因此,在湖泊、大海等处,若以游戏为先导,唯犯恶作,不犯波逸提。”有人因“以世间利养、交友亲近为缘,以游戏为先导而相约”这句话,说“此学处属不善心、世间罪”,此不应采纳。因为即使以游戏为先导登船后,在进入聚落间或超过半由旬时,即使具足善心或无记心,也会犯戒。若彼生起悚惧感而证得阿罗汉果,或入睡,或作意业处而行,他哪里还有不善心俱,而称此学处为不善心、世间罪呢?因此,成立为“制立罪、三心”。其余此处易明。显示巴利原文
189. Nadiyā kuto gāmantaranti āha ‘‘yassā nadiyā’’tiādi. ‘‘Tassā sagāmakatīrapassena…pe… addhayojanagaṇanāyāti ekekapasseneva gamanaṃ sandhāya vuttattā tādisikāya nadiyā majjhena gacchantassa gāmantaragaṇanāya addhayojanagaṇanāya ca āpattī’’ti vadanti. Sabbaaṭṭhakathāsūtiādinā attanā vuttamevatthaṃ samattheti. ‘‘Kīḷāpurekkhāratāya bhikkhuniyā saddhiṃ saṃvidhāya nāvaṃ abhiruhantassa nadiyaṃyeva pācittiyassa vuttattā vāpisamuddādīsu kīḷāpurekkhāratāya dukkaṭameva, na pācittiya’’nti vadanti. ‘‘Lokassādamittasanthavavasena kīḷāpurekkhārā saṃvidahitvā’’ti vacanato keci ‘‘imaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ akusalacittaṃ lokavajja’’nti vadanti, taṃ na gahetabbaṃ. Kīḷāpurekkhāratāya hi abhiruhitvāpi gāmantarokkamane addhayojanātikkame vā kusalābyākatacittasamaṅgīpi hutvā āpattiṃ āpajjati . Yadi hi so saṃvegaṃ paṭilabhitvā arahattaṃ vā sacchikareyya, niddaṃ vā okkameyya, kammaṭṭhānaṃ vā manasi karonto gaccheyya, kuto tassa akusalacittasamaṅgitā, yenidaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ akusalacittaṃ lokavajjanti vuccati, tasmā paṇṇattivajjaṃ ticittanti siddhaṃ. Sesamettha uttānameva.
九、煮食学处之解释显示巴利原文
9. Paripācitasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
194 第九条中,“已准备”指为比丘们而准备之物。“若是亲属或已邀请者”:在此,即使比丘一方的施主是非亲属、未邀请者,而比丘尼一方的施主是亲属、已邀请者,亦可行。显示巴利原文
194. Navame paṭiyāditanti bhikkhūnaṃ atthāya sampāditaṃ. Ñātakā vā honti pavāritā vāti ettha sacepi bhikkhuno aññātakā appavāritā ca siyuṃ, bhikkhuniyā ñātakā pavāritā ce, vaṭṭati.
197 此学处乃为断绝恶比丘的同党而制定,因此唯在五种主食上结罪。至于“除五种主食外,一切处无犯”,这是为了显示依此学处不犯的情形。因为若食用通过乞求所得者,依他处所说之理,犯恶作。其余易明。比丘尼已煮食、明知、非居士筹备、属于米饭等之一、吞咽,此为此处五要素。显示巴利原文
197. Pāpabhikkhūnaṃ pakkhupacchedāya idaṃ paññattaṃ, tasmā pañcabhojaneyeva āpatti vuttā. Pañca bhojanāni ṭhapetvā sabbattha anāpattīti idaṃ pana iminā sikkhāpadena anāpattidassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Viññattiyā uppannaṃ paribhuñjantassa hi aññattha vuttanayena dukkaṭaṃ. Sesaṃ uttānameva. Bhikkhuniparipācitabhāvo, jānanaṃ, gihisamārambhābhāvo, odanādīnaṃ aññataratā, tassa ajjhoharaṇanti imāni panettha pañca aṅgāni.
十、独坐学处之解释显示巴利原文
10. Rahonisajjasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
198 第十条中,“以乌巴难达的第四学处”指的是与女人在无覆盖处共独坐学处。虽然它在裸形衣品中是第五学处,但因在以乌巴难达长老为缘而制的学处中位居第四,故说“以乌巴难达的第四学处”。由于此学处的事缘比第四学处的事缘先生起,此学处便先被制定。又当知:此学处仅制定了与比丘尼独坐的犯戒,之前与女人共独坐的犯戒是另行制定的。显示巴利原文
198. Dasame upanandassa catutthasikkhāpadenāti appaṭicchanne mātugāmena saddhiṃ rahonisajjasikkhāpadaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Kiñcāpi taṃ acelakavagge pañcamasikkhāpadaṃ hoti, upanandattheraṃ ārabbha paññattesu pana catutthabhāvato ‘‘upanandassa catutthasikkhāpadenā’’ti vuttaṃ. Catutthasikkhāpadassa vatthuto imassa sikkhāpadassa vatthuno paṭhamaṃ uppannattā idaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ paṭhamaṃ paññattaṃ. Iminā ca sikkhāpadena kevalaṃ bhikkhuniyā eva rahonisajjāya āpatti paññattā, upari mātugāmena saddhiṃ rahonisajjāya āpatti visuṃ paññattāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
第四 饮食品显示巴利原文
4. Bhojanavaggo
一、住处施食学处的解释显示巴利原文
1. Āvasathapiṇḍasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
206 于《食相应》之初学处中,“能行半由旬或一由旬”:在此,即使有能力行如是之远,若行如是之远而未得食,从此处取食亦无不可。“唯这些”即唯指这些外道。“此许数”指于此外道中,为此所许之数。“一日应食”意为一日唯应食一次。然而,不应因“一日应食”之语,便认为一日之中可反复取食。从最初饮食之后,即便是在先前已曾进食之处,亦不得再食,此即显示不得再食。显示巴利原文
206. Bhojanavaggassa paṭhamasikkhāpade addhayojanaṃ vā yojanaṃ vā gantuṃ sakkotīti ettha tattakaṃ gantuṃ sakkontassapi tāvatakaṃ gantvā aladdhabhikkhassa ito bhuñjituṃ vaṭṭati. Imesaṃyevāti imesaṃ pāsaṇḍānaṃyeva. Ettakānanti imasmiṃ pāsaṇḍe ettakānaṃ. Ekadivasaṃ bhuñjitabbanti ekadivasaṃ sakiṃyeva bhuñjitabbaṃ. ‘‘Ekadivasaṃ bhuñjitabba’’nti vacanato pana ekasmiṃ divase punappunaṃ bhuñjituṃ vaṭṭatīti na gahetabbaṃ. Puna ādito paṭṭhāya bhuñjituṃ na vaṭṭatīti iminā paṭhamaṃ bhuttaṭṭhānesu puna ekasmimpi ṭhāne bhuñjituṃ na vaṭṭatīti dasseti.
208 诸师言:“‘去时或来时’,此应依半由旬而解。”“于中途已行之处”,是就属于一人之处而言。为广释略说之义,而说“去已返回”等语,以明“来时亦同此理”。若于犯处复食,应说无罪。于去时与来时,除初食外,显示了于中途一日所行处及一日停留处可反复食;然于去日与来日,若心存“我将去”“我将来”而食,乃是可行。纵以净信心反复食,于反复食亦无犯。凡为他人所指定施设者,比丘根本不应取,故言“唯为比丘众”。其余于此易解。住处所施之食性、无病、未居住而食,此乃此处之三要素。显示巴利原文
208.‘‘Gacchanto vā āgacchanto vāti idaṃ addhayojanavasena gahetabba’’nti vadanti. Antarāmagge gataṭṭhāneti ekasseva santakaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. ‘‘Āgacchantepi eseva nayo’’ti saṅkhepena vuttamevatthaṃ vibhāvento ‘‘gantvā paccāgacchanto’’tiādimāha. Āpattiṭṭhāneyeva puna bhuñjantassa anāpatti vattabbāti gamane āgamane ca paṭhamaṃ bhojanaṃ avatvā antarāmagge ekadivasaṃ gataṭṭhāne ca ekadivasanti punappunaṃ bhojanameva dassitaṃ, gamanadivase pana āgamanadivase ca ‘‘gamissāmi āgamissāmī’’ti bhuñjituṃ vaṭṭatiyeva. Suddhacittena punappunaṃ bhuñjantassapi punappunaṃ bhojane anāpatti. Aññassatthāya uddisitvā paññattaṃ bhikkhuno gahetumeva na vaṭṭatīti āha ‘‘bhikkhūnaṃyeva atthāyā’’ti. Sesamettha uttānameva. Āvasathapiṇḍatā, agilānatā, anuvasitvā bhojananti imāni panettha tīṇi aṅgāni.
二、众食学处的解释显示巴利原文
2. Gaṇabhojanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
209 于第二中,“向谋杀者”指前往并被指派来杀害世尊的弓箭手们。“隐密覆藏”意指不显露。“射”意为发射。由“岂非亦令人弑王”之语故,此学处成立于阿阇世王之时,此义得成。若如是,于后之补充制定中——显示巴利原文
209. Dutiye abhimāreti abhigantvā bhagavato māraṇatthāya niyojite dhanuddhare. Guḷhapaṭicchannoti apākaṭo. Pavijjhīti vissajjesi. Nanu rājānampi mārāpesīti vacanato idaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ ajātasattuno kāle paññattanti siddhaṃ, evañca sati parato anupaññattiyaṃ –
那时,摩揭陀国斯尼耶频婆娑罗王的一位血亲眷属在邪命外道中出家。当时,这位邪命外道前往摩揭陀国斯尼耶频婆娑罗王那里,到了之后,对摩揭陀国斯尼耶频婆娑罗王这样说……乃至……比丘们心生疑悔,不肯接受。显示巴利原文
‘‘Tena kho pana samayena rañño māgadhassa seniyassa bimbisārassa ñātisālohito ājīvakesu pabbajito hoti. Atha kho so ājīvako yena rājā māgadho seniyo bimbisāro tenupasaṅkami, upasaṅkamitvā rājānaṃ māgadhaṃ seniyaṃ bimbisāraṃ etadavoca…pe… kukkuccāyantā nādhivāsentī’’ti –
为什么这样说呢?据说,那位邪命外道从频婆娑罗王时代起便开始作此布施。后来到了阿阇世王时代,由于学处制定后比丘们心生疑悔,便不再接受此布施。因此应知,这是为了从最初说明此事的因缘。至于“那时,那位邪命外道派遣使者到比丘们那里”这句,是说此后该邪命外道时常邀请比丘并作布施,在阿阇世王时代学处制定之后,他派遣使者到比丘们那里这件事。显示巴利原文
Idaṃ kasmā vuttanti? So kira ājīvako taṃ dānaṃ dento bimbisārakālato paṭṭhāya adāsi, pacchā ajātasattukāle sikkhāpadapaññattito paṭṭhāya bhikkhū kukkuccāyantā taṃ dānaṃ na paṭiggaṇhiṃsu, tasmā ādito paṭṭhāya taṃ vatthu dassitanti veditabbaṃ. ‘‘Atha kho so ājīvako bhikkhūnaṃ santike dūtaṃ pāhesī’’ti idañca tato pabhuti so ājīvako antarantarā bhikkhū nimantetvā dānaṃ dento ajātasattukāle sikkhāpade paññatte yaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ santike dūtaṃ pāhesi, taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ.
215 215. 由于彼此殊胜,故称为无与伦比的离垢国;从那里来、或生于彼处、或住于彼处者,便称为离垢者,他们就是那些离垢者。然而,他们于族姓、行仪等方面各不相同,故说“种种离垢者”。而在注释书中,则解释为“从种种不同的他国而来”,即仅就国土而说其种种不同。显示巴利原文
215. Aññamaññavisiṭṭhattā visadisaṃ rajjaṃ virajjaṃ, tato āgatā, tattha vā jātā, bhavāti vā verajjā, te eva verajjakā. Te pana yasmā gottacaraṇādivibhāgena nānappakārā, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘nānāverajjake’’ti. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana nānāvidhehi aññarajjehi āgateti rajjānaṃyeva vasena nānappakāratā vuttā.
217-218 217-218. 此学处依“暗示乞求后而食”的事缘制定,因此“暗示乞求后的众食”从事缘本身便已明了,故在分别句中不予解说,而依邀请的方式说明众食:“众食者,即……受邀请而食”。然而,有人可能生疑:“有些学处或许与事缘不相应,但随分别句所说,仅以邀请方式便成众食。”为断此疑,故说“然而,此众食由两种方式产生”。关于“执取五种食物的名称”,此处有人说:“即使说‘请取食物’,也仍构成众食。”而在三处《结文》中说:“在下方的行路事缘和登船事缘中,当说‘尊者,请就在这里用食’时,比丘们心生疑虑而不接受,因此即使说‘请用食’,也不成众食。”然而,既然说到“执取五种食物的名称而邀请”,可知唯有执取食物名称说“请用米饭”或“请用饭食”时,方构成众食,否则不然。于“尊者,请就在这里用食”一语,也应理解为:他们是在说了“米饭”或“饭食”之后才如此邀请的。或者,因为他们是以团体被邀请,那些比丘因不知恩而生疑虑,故不接受——这是我们审慎的看法,应加斟酌后采纳更妥。显示巴利原文
217-218. Imassa sikkhāpadassa viññattiṃ katvā bhuñjanavatthusmiṃ paññattattā viññattito gaṇabhojanaṃ vatthuvaseneva pākaṭanti taṃ avatvā ‘‘gaṇabhojanaṃ nāma yattha…pe… nimantitā bhuñjantī’’ti nimantanavaseneva padabhājane gaṇabhojanaṃ vuttaṃ. ‘‘Kiñci pana sikkhāpadaṃ vatthuananurūpampi siyāti padabhājane vuttanayena nimantanavaseneva gaṇabhojanaṃ hotīti kesañci āsaṅkā bhaveyyā’’ti taṃnivattanatthaṃ ‘‘taṃ panetaṃ gaṇabhojanaṃ dvīhākārehi pasavatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Pañcannaṃ bhojanānaṃ nāmaṃ gahetvāti ettha ‘‘bhojanaṃ gaṇhathāti vuttepi gaṇabhojanaṃ hotiyevā’’ti vadanti. ‘‘Heṭṭhā addhānagamanavatthusmiṃ nāvābhiruhanavatthusmiñca ‘idheva, bhante, bhuñjathā’ti vutte yasmā kukkuccāyantā na paṭiggaṇhiṃsu, tasmā ‘bhuñjathā’ti vuttepi gaṇabhojanaṃ na hotiyevā’’ti tīsupi gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ. ‘‘Pañcannaṃ bhojanānaṃ nāmaṃ gahetvā nimantetī’’ti vuttattā pana ‘‘odanaṃ bhuñjathā’’ti vā ‘‘bhattaṃ bhuñjathā’’ti vā bhojananāmaṃ gahetvāva vutte gaṇabhojanaṃ hoti, na aññathā. ‘‘Idheva, bhante, bhuñjathā’’ti etthāpi ‘‘odana’’nti vā ‘‘bhatta’’nti vā vatvāva te evaṃ nimantesunti gahetabbaṃ. Gaṇavasena vā nimantitattā te bhikkhū apakataññutāya kukkuccāyantā na paṭiggaṇhiṃsūti ayaṃ amhākaṃ khanti, vīmaṃsitvā yuttataraṃ gahetabbaṃ.
“一起取”者,于此应解为:彼此不放开十二肘的距离而站立,即名“一起取”。据“他们可能会暗示说:‘请给我们四人饭食’”一语,以及前文“你给一位比丘饭食,你给两位”这样暗示的说法,应知:即使通过他人为自己暗示,若接受者也构成众食。关于“如此由暗示而产生”,当知:有暗示时,若取食者一起取食,则依此学处犯戒;若分别取食,则依美味食物和米饭的暗示而犯戒。显示巴利原文
Ekato gaṇhantīti ettha aññamaññassa dvādasahatthaṃ amuñcitvā ṭhitā ekato gaṇhanti nāmāti gahetabbaṃ. ‘‘Amhākaṃ catunnampi bhattaṃ dehīti vā viññāpeyyu’’nti vacanato heṭṭhā ‘‘tvaṃ ekassa bhikkhuno bhattaṃ dehi, tvaṃ dvinnanti evaṃ viññāpetvā’’ti vacanato ca attano atthāya aññehi viññattampi sādiyantassa gaṇabhojanaṃ hotiyevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Evaṃ viññattito pasavatīti ettha viññattiyā sati gaṇhantassa ekato hutvā gahaṇe iminā sikkhāpadena āpatti, visuṃ gahaṇe paṇītabhojanasūpodanaviññattīhi āpatti veditabbā.
“安排”指以五部分等方式整理。“拍打”指顺风剪断后,用手或小杖拍打。“作线”指搓线。“缠绕”指缠绕于小杖或手上。有人说:“在此,制作全新的衣名为‘衣作’,在旧衣上缝针则不名‘衣作’。”有人就此说:“依‘第四人到来则不能度过’之语,若没有其他人前来,仅四人共坐而不能度过,也是不被允许的。”显示巴利原文
Vicāretīti pañcakhaṇḍādivasena saṃvidahati. Ghaṭṭetīti anuvātaṃ chinditvā hatthena daṇḍakena vā ghaṭṭeti. Suttaṃ karotīti suttaṃ vaṭṭeti. Valetīti daṇḍake vā hatthe vā āvaṭṭeti. ‘‘Abhinavasseva cīvarassa karaṇaṃ idha cīvarakammaṃ nāma, purāṇacīvare sūcikammaṃ nāma na hotī’’ti vadanti. ‘‘Catutthe āgate na yāpentīti vacanato sace añño koci āgacchanto natthi, cattāroyeva ca tattha nisinnā yāpetuṃ na sakkonti, na vaṭṭatī’’ti vadanti.
220 由于是导致众食犯戒的邀请,故说“不净邀请”。“使进入”即令其就座。“众坏”意指僧众不犯戒。与“凡有四位比丘……而食”的巴利文相合,故说“其余者则成为满众者”。“无差别”即不区分“病人”或“作衣者”,而以通称而说。因此,即由无差别之说。“食后离去者”,在此即使尚未离去,食事完毕时取食也是可以的。而“那些食物未被他们一起取用”,是指那些不会引起疑虑的食物,那些比丘并未一起取用,而是由一人后来取用。“大长老”是就比丘众而说的。由于担心使者再次迎面过来说“请取饭食”,故说“便站在村门口”。各处前往,即前往站在各条巷弄等处的人那里。即使是为比丘们而放置在屋门前布施,也同此理。关于“请返回”一句,因为先说了“请返回”而中断,后来才说“请取饭食”,所以返回是允许的。其余在此易明。在此,众食性、无因缘、吞咽,此为三要素。显示巴利原文
220. Gaṇabhojanāpattijanakanimantanabhāvato ‘‘akappiyanimantana’’nti vuttaṃ. Sampavesetvāti nisīdāpetvā. Gaṇo bhijjatīti gaṇo āpattiṃ na āpajjatīti adhippāyo. ‘‘Yattha cattāro bhikkhū…pe… bhuñjantī’’ti imāya pāḷiyā saṃsandanato ‘‘itaresaṃ pana gaṇapūrako hotī’’ti vuttaṃ. Avisesenāti ‘‘gilāno vā cīvarakārako vā’’ti avisesetvā sabbasādhāraṇavacanena. Tasmāti avisesitattā. Bhutvā gatesūti ettha agatesupi bhojanakicce niṭṭhite gaṇhituṃ vaṭṭati . Tāni ca tehi ekato na gahitānīti yehi bhojanehi visaṅketo natthi, tāni bhojanāni tehi bhikkhūhi ekato na gahitāni ekena pacchā gahitattā. Mahāthereti bhikkhū sandhāya vuttaṃ. Dūtassa puna paṭipathaṃ āgantvā ‘‘bhattaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti vacanabhayena ‘‘gāmadvāre aṭṭhatvāvā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tattha tattha gantvāti antaravīthiādīsu tattha tattha ṭhitānaṃ santikaṃ gantvā. Bhikkhūnaṃ atthāya gharadvāre ṭhapetvā diyyamānepi eseva nayo. Nivattathāti vuttapade nivattituṃ vaṭṭatīti ‘‘nivattathā’’ti vicchinditvā pacchā ‘‘bhattaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti vuttattā vaṭṭati. Sesamettha uttānameva. Gaṇabhojanatā, samayābhāvo, ajjhoharaṇanti imāni panettha tīṇi aṅgāni.
三、相续食学处的解释显示巴利原文
3. Paramparabhojanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
221 在第三学处中,由于按家族次第不间断地施食,所以巴利文中说“饭食次第未中断”,意思是中间不停顿、相续进行。“依惯用语”即依通常的说法。因为他并非只给枣子大小的一点,而是依惯用语如此称呼。用枣粉、糖等调制的称为“枣子酱”。显示巴利原文
221. Tatiye kulapaṭipāṭiyā abbocchinnaṃ katvā nirantaraṃ diyyamānattā ‘‘bhattapaṭipāṭi aṭṭhitā hotī’’ti pāḷiyaṃ vuttaṃ, antarā aṭṭhatvā nirantaraṃ pavattāti vuttaṃ hoti. Upacāravasenāti vohāravasena. Na hi so badaramattameva deti, upacāravasena pana evaṃ vadati. Badaracuṇṇasakkharādīhi payojitaṃ ‘‘badarasāḷava’’nti vuccati.
226 仅由净施的方式,那顿饭食便名为“不存在”。因此,除随增制所设立的净施之外,只保留了依最初制立而制定的学处。然而,在《附随》中,将允许净施也视同随增制,故说“四种随增制”。随后,在讲述《大灯》等注疏中所说的方法时,由于与巴利圣典对校,他确立了唯有“当面净施”。但也有些人说:“那时,长老将食物放在自己面前,因世尊不在场,他没有作当面净施;而世尊也未单独开许当面净施,即便如此,当面净施也是可行的。”正因如此,在《本母注》中也说:“若有比丘,于五位同梵行者中的某一位面前,或当面说‘我将我的餐食期望施与您’或‘我净施’,或在背地说‘我施与某某’或‘我净施’,如此未对最初的邀请作净施,而后在后来被邀请的家中获得食物,即使吞下仅一粒米,也犯波逸提。”显示巴利原文
226. Vikappanāvaseneva taṃ bhattaṃ asantaṃ nāma hotīti anupaññattivasena vikappanaṃ aṭṭhapetvā yathāpaññattaṃ sikkhāpadameva ṭhapitaṃ. Parivāre pana vikappanāya anujānanampi anupaññattisamānanti katvā ‘‘catasso anupaññattiyo’’ti vuttaṃ. Mahāpaccariādīsu vuttanayaṃ pacchā vadanto pāḷiyā saṃsandanato parammukhāvikappanameva patiṭṭhāpesi. Keci pana ‘‘tadā attano santike ṭhapetvā bhagavantaṃ aññassa abhāvato thero sammukhāvikappanaṃ nākāsi, bhagavatā ca visuṃ sammukhāvikappanā na vuttā, tathāpi sammukhāvikappanāpi vaṭṭatī’’ti vadanti. Teneva mātikāaṭṭhakathāyampi (kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. paramparabhojanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā) ‘‘yo bhikkhu pañcasu sahadhammikesu aññatarassa ‘mayhaṃ bhattapaccāsaṃ tuyhaṃ dammī’ti vā ‘vikappemī’ti vā evaṃ sammukhā vā ‘itthannāmassa dammī’ti vā ‘vikappemī’ti vā evaṃ parammukhā vā paṭhamanimantanaṃ avikappetvā pacchā nimantitakule laddhabhikkhato ekasitthampi ajjhoharati, pācittiya’’nti vuttaṃ.
229 若有人受请五种主食中的某一种,未先对最初受请的那一餐作净施,便次第食用其他餐食——这称为‘辗转食’。故说:‘若根本邀请在下,后续的邀请依次在上,从上面开始食用者,犯戒。’将手伸入容器,抓取最底部食物时,中间的食物也成了手中之物,因此说:‘然而,将手……乃至……以任何方式取食,无罪。’由于牛奶和汤汁未与饭混合而浮在上层,故说:‘仅饮用牛奶或汤汁者,无罪。’显示巴利原文
229. Pañcahi bhojanehi nimantitassa yena yena paṭhamaṃ nimantito, tassa tassa bhojanato uppaṭipāṭiyā avikappetvā vā parassa parassa bhojanaṃ paramparabhojananti āha ‘‘sace pana mūlanimantanaṃ heṭṭhā hoti, pacchimaṃ pacchimaṃ upari, taṃ uparito paṭṭhāya bhuñjantassa āpattī’’ti. Hatthaṃ anto pavesetvā sabbaheṭṭhimaṃ gaṇhantassa majjhe ṭhitampi antohatthagataṃ hotīti āha ‘‘hatthaṃ pana…pe… yathā tathā vā bhuñjantassa anāpattī’’ti. Khīrassa rasassa ca bhattena amissaṃ hutvā upari ṭhitattā ‘‘khīraṃ vā rasaṃ vā pivato anāpattī’’ti vuttaṃ.
‘大优婆塞’指家主。在《大结节》中说:‘《大注》说“犯戒”,而《古伦地》说“可行”,两者看似矛盾,但其意旨已在《大灯》中阐明。’‘众人皆在邀请’是指以不如法的邀请而邀请。由于经中说:‘所谓辗转食,即受五种食物中某一种食物的邀请后,舍弃该邀请而食用其他五种食物中的某一种食物,这便称为辗转食。’因此,即使最初通过乞食得到了食物,只要食用彼乞食所得的食物,也说为‘犯戒’。由于未作净施,故说为‘语业’。此处余义容易了知。在此,辗转食性、无开许时节、吞咽——这三者是构成要素。显示巴利原文
Mahāupāsakoti gehasāmiko. ‘‘Mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘āpattī’ti vacanena kurundiyaṃ ‘vaṭṭatī’ti vacanaṃ viruddhaṃ viya dissati, dvinnampi adhippāyo mahāpaccariyaṃ vibhāvito’’ti mahāgaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ. Sabbe nimantentīti akappiyanimantanena nimantenti. ‘‘Paramparabhojanaṃ nāma pañcannaṃ bhojanānaṃ aññatarena bhojanena nimantito, taṃ ṭhapetvā aññaṃ pañcannaṃ bhojanānaṃ aññataraṃ bhojanaṃ bhuñjati, etaṃ paramparabhojanaṃ nāmā’’ti vuttattā satipi bhikkhācariyāya paṭhamaṃ laddhabhāve ‘‘piṇḍāya caritvā laddhabhattaṃ bhuñjati, āpattī’’ti vuttaṃ. Avikappavasena ‘‘vacīkamma’’nti vuttaṃ. Sesamettha uttānameva. Paramparabhojanatā, samayābhāvo, ajjhoharaṇanti imāni panettha tīṇi aṅgāni.
四、迦那母学处解释显示巴利原文
4. Kāṇamātāsikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
230-231 230-231. 第四项中的‘迦那之母’:迦那是那位名为‘迦那’的女孩的母亲。为何她被称为‘迦那’?故说‘据说她……’等。在她幼年时,父母出于疼爱,以‘迦那姑娘,迦那姑娘’来称呼她,她由此得名迦那,而她的母亲也就以‘迦那母’为人所知——这是他们对此缘由的说明。‘西方’指后方、西方,即面对太阳沉落的方向。显示巴利原文
230-231. Catutthe kāṇāya mātāti kāṇāti laddhanāmāya dārikāya mātā. Kasmā panesā kāṇā nāma jātāti āha ‘‘sā kirassā’’tiādi. Imissā daharakāle mātāpitaro sinehavasena ‘‘amma kāṇe, amma kāṇe’’ti vohariṃsu, sā tadupādāya kāṇā nāma jātā, tassā ca mātā ‘‘kāṇamātā’’ti pākaṭā ahosīti evamettha kāraṇaṃ vadanti. Paṭiyālokanti pacchimaṃ disaṃ, paccādiccanti vuttaṃ hoti.
233 233. 按糕饼数量计,犯波逸提:即从钵口下缘线算起,对位于上方的糕饼数量而计为波逸提。由于经中说“应接受二至三钵满”,因此只要不超过钵口下缘线,允许接受二或三钵满。显示巴利原文
233.Pūvagaṇanāya pācittiyanti mukhavaṭṭiyā heṭṭhimalekhato upariṭṭhitapūvagaṇanāya pācittiyaṃ. ‘‘Dvattipattapūrā paṭiggahetabbā’’ti hi vacanato mukhavaṭṭiyā heṭṭhimalekhaṃ anatikkante dve vā tayo vā pattapūre gahetuṃ vaṭṭati.
235 235. 然而,注疏中说“……”,这只是为了表明注疏中有这样的记载,并不是为了确立那种说法。因为注疏所说与巴利圣典不符。为了显示在额外接受时可以无罪,才说“亲属的、已受请的”。否则,既然“接受二至三钵满者无罪”这一句已经成立了按量接受无罪,便不需要再单独说“亲属的、已受请的”。如果这样,为何不说“这与巴利圣典不符”呢?因为在先前的“额外”学处中已经说过的方法,可以据此了知,所以没有再说。在那里确实说过:“然而,在注疏中,关于亲属和已受请的场合,说平时即使多量也可以行,而在断绝因缘时,仅限定量才可行,这与巴利圣典不符。”即使是以“为路粮等目的而准备”的想法而接受,也犯戒,因为此学处是无心的。以说“交到此人手中”等言语为自己接受也犯戒,故说为“语业”。其余内容容易理解。具有上述特征的糕饼,是咀嚼食、非残余、未作舍还而离去、非亲属等、额外接受,这是此处的五个构成要素。显示巴利原文
235.Aṭṭhakathāsu pana…pe… vuttanti idaṃ aṭṭhakathāsu tathā āgatabhāvamattadīpanatthaṃ vuttaṃ, na pana tassa vādassa patiṭṭhāpanatthaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāsu vuttañhi pāḷiyā na sameti. Tatuttarigahaṇe anāpattidassanatthañhi ‘‘ñātakānaṃ pavāritāna’’nti vuttaṃ. Aññathā ‘‘anāpatti dvattipattapūre paṭiggaṇhātī’’ti imināva pamāṇayuttaggahaṇe anāpattisiddhito ‘‘ñātakānaṃ pavāritāna’’nti visuṃ na vattabbaṃ. Yadi evaṃ ‘‘taṃ pāḷiyā na sametī’’ti kasmā na vuttanti? Heṭṭhā tatuttarisikkhāpade vuttanayeneva sakkā viññātunti na vuttaṃ. Vuttañhi tattha (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.526) ‘‘aṭṭhakathāsu pana ñātakapavāritaṭṭhāne pakatiyāva bahumpi vaṭṭati, acchinnakāraṇā pamāṇameva vaṭṭatīti vuttaṃ, taṃ pāḷiyā na sametī’’ti. ‘‘Apātheyyādiatthāya paṭiyādita’’nti saññāya gaṇhantassapi āpattiyeva acittakattā sikkhāpadassa. Attanoyeva gahaṇatthaṃ ‘‘imassa hatthe dehī’’ti vacanenapi āpajjanato ‘‘vacīkamma’’nti vuttaṃ. Sesaṃ uttānameva . Vuttalakkhaṇapūvamanthatā, asesakatā, apaṭippassaddhagamanatā, na ñātakāditā, atirekapaṭiggahaṇanti imāni panettha pañca aṅgāni.
五、第一受请满足学处解释显示巴利原文
5. Paṭhamapavāraṇāsikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
236 第五项:“已食者”,意为已进食的人、已用餐者,即已完成食事义务者。“已受请拒”——此处,在四种“请拒”中有“随意饱足之请拒”与“拒绝之请拒”,故说“婆罗门……以拒绝之请拒而受请拒”。请拒有四种:雨安居竟之请拒、资具之请拒、拒绝之请拒、随意饱足之请拒。其中,“诸比丘,我允许雨安居竟的比丘以三种方式行请拒”,此为雨安居竟之请拒。它是以所见等方式阻止、令僧团等分享、于食事中而作,因此称为“请拒”,是为了清净罪过而给予自白的机会。然而,由于此请拒大多由雨安居竟者所行,故称为“雨安居竟之请拒”。“尊者,我愿以四个月的药物向僧团行请拒”,以及“除非另有请拒,除非常请拒”,这是资具之请拒,即以此令人对资具生起欲求,是以衣等作邀请的别名。“所谓已受请拒者,谓可见食物、可见硬食、立于手臂距离内递上、可见拒绝,此名为已受请拒者”,这是拒绝之请拒。在此处,正是具足拒绝之请拒……显示巴利原文
236. Pañcame bhuttāvīti bhuttāvino bhuttavanto, katabhattakiccāti vuttaṃ hoti. Pavāritāti ettha catūsu pavāraṇāsu yāvadatthapavāraṇā paṭikkhepapavāraṇā ca labbhatīti āha ‘‘brāhmaṇena…pe… paṭikkhepapavāraṇāya pavāritā’’ti. Catubbidhā hi pavāraṇā vassaṃvutthapavāraṇā, paccayapavāraṇā , paṭikkhepapavāraṇā, yāvadatthapavāraṇāti. Tattha ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, vassaṃvutthānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ tīhi ṭhānehi pavāretu’’nti (mahāva. 209) ayaṃ vassaṃvutthapavāraṇā. Pakārehi diṭṭhādīhi vāreti saṅghādike bhajāpeti bhatte karoti etāyāti pavāraṇā, āpattivisodhanāya attavossaggokāsadānaṃ. Sā pana yasmā yebhuyyena vassaṃvutthehi kātabbā vuttā, tasmā ‘‘vassaṃvutthapavāraṇā’’ti vuccati. ‘‘Icchāmahaṃ, bhante, saṅghaṃ cātumāsaṃ bhesajjena pavāretu’’nti (pāci. 303) ca, ‘‘aññatra puna pavāraṇāya aññatra niccapavāraṇāyā’’ti (pāci. 306) ca ayaṃ paccayapavāraṇā pavāreti paccaye icchāpeti etāyāti katvā, cīvarādīhi upanimantanāyetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. ‘‘Pavārito nāma asanaṃ paññāyati, bhojanaṃ paññāyati, hatthapāse ṭhito abhiharati, paṭikkhepo paññāyati, eso pavārito nāmā’’ti (pāci. 239) ayaṃ paṭikkhepapavāraṇā. Vippakatabhojanatādipañcaṅgasahito bhojanapaṭikkhepoyeva hettha pakārayuttā vāraṇāti pavāraṇā. ‘‘Paṇītena khādanīyena bhojanīyena sahatthā santappesi sampavāresī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.363) ayaṃ yāvadatthapavāraṇā. Yāvadatthaṃ bhojanassa pavāraṇā yāvadatthapavāraṇā.
237 不说“ti-kāra”而说……,是可以的,这是为了显示应说的方式。然而,“即使说了‘ti-kāra’,也不名为未作”——在三部《甘提帕达》中都如此说。显示巴利原文
237.Ti-kāraṃ avatvā…pe… vattuṃ vaṭṭatīti idaṃ vattabbākāradassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. ‘‘Ti-kāre pana vuttepi akataṃ nāma na hotī’’ti tīsupi gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ.
238-239 “已请拒者”(pavārito)即被拒绝者。因为正在进食者若不愿接受侍者递上的食物而拒绝,他便由此成为“已请拒者”,也就是被拒绝者。然而,为了不拘泥于字面而仅显示其义,故说“已作请拒、已作拒绝”。由于“asana”(食物)一词本身已表达了“已食者”的意义,它没有任何单独存在的必要。因为若另有条件,请拒将具足六支——注意到这点,为了显示仅具足五支,便引用了“此亦曾说”等巴利文。然而,也有人将“于手臂距离内递上”单立为一支,而说“具足四支的请拒”。显示巴利原文
238-239.Pavāritoti paṭikkhepito. Yo hi bhuñjanto parivesakena upanītaṃ bhojanaṃ anicchanto paṭikkhipati, so tena pavārito paṭikkhepito nāma hoti. Byañjanaṃ pana anādiyitvā atthamattameva dassetuṃ ‘‘katapavāraṇo katapaṭikkhepo’’ti vuttaṃ. Yasmā ‘‘asana’’nti imināva padena ‘‘bhuttāvī’’ti imassa attho vutto, tasmā na tassa kiñci payojanaṃ visuṃ upalabbhati. Yadi hi upalabbheyya, pavāraṇā chaḷaṅgasamannāgatā āpajjeyyāti manasi katvā pañcasamannāgatattaṃyeva dassetuṃ ‘‘vuttampi ceta’’ntiādinā pāḷiṃ āharati. Keci pana ‘‘hatthapāse ṭhito abhiharatī’’ti ekameva aṅgaṃ katvā ‘‘caturaṅgasamannāgatā pavāraṇā’’tipi vadanti.
“酸乳粥等”:以“等”字包含牛乳粥等。其中,“酸乳粥”指与酪等酸味混合的浓粥;“牛乳粥”则包含与牛乳混合的粥。“不产生请拒”,即不成就构成非残食罪之缘的拒绝。即使作了拒绝,也不成为非残食罪之缘,停留在未作状态,故说“不产生请拒”。三部《甘提帕达》中说:“由于‘粥’一词也通于能产生请拒的粥,因此即使说‘请取粥’,也会产生请拒,即确实产生请拒。”这与后文“取来与饭混合的粥”处所说的理由不相符。因为那里说:“在下无粥的邀请中,针对与清水、酸粥、牛乳等混合揉捏的饭而说‘请取粥’,故产生请拒;但在‘取来与饭混合的粥’这里,由于粥是单独存在的,故不产生请拒。”因此,应依那里所说的道理,即针对与牛乳等混合揉捏的饭而说“请取粥”,且那里并无粥,故产生请拒——在此应如此说明理由。如此,则与后文注释中“因被问者存在”所说的理由也相符合,否则仅在《甘提帕达》中就会出现前后矛盾,且与注释之说也不符。“如果……可见”:以此显示所述量的鱼肉块或筋腱的仅是有无。“以那些”即指以嫩谷粒。显示巴利原文
Ambilapāyāsādīsūti ādi-saddena khīrapāyāsādiṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Tattha ambilapāyāsaggahaṇena takkādiambilasaṃyuttā ghanayāgu vuttā. Khīrapāyāsaggahaṇena khīrasaṃyuttā yāgu saṅgayhati. Pavāraṇaṃ na janetīti anatirittabhojanāpattinibandhanaṃ paṭikkhepaṃ na sādheti. Katopi paṭikkhepo anatirittabhojanāpattinibandhano na hotīti akataṭṭhāneyeva tiṭṭhatīti āha ‘‘pavāraṇaṃ na janetī’’ti. ‘‘Yāgu-saddassa pavāraṇajanakayāguyāpi sādhāraṇattā ‘yāguṃ gaṇhathā’ti vuttepi pavāraṇā hotīti pavāraṇaṃ janetiyevāti vutta’’nti tīsupi gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ, taṃ parato tattheva ‘‘bhattamissakaṃ yāguṃ āharitvā’’ti ettha vuttakāraṇena na sameti. Vuttañhi tattha ‘‘heṭṭhā ayāguke nimantane udakakañjikakhīrādīhi saddhiṃ madditaṃ bhattameva sandhāya ‘yāguṃ gaṇhathā’ti vuttattā pavāraṇā hoti, ‘bhattamissakaṃ yāguṃ āharitvā’ti ettha pana visuṃ yāguyā vijjamānattā pavāraṇā na hotī’’ti. Tasmā tattha vuttanayeneva khīrādīhi saṃmadditaṃ bhattameva sandhāya ‘‘yāguṃ gaṇhathā’’ti vuttattā yāguyā ca tattha abhāvato pavāraṇā hotīti evamettha kāraṇaṃ vattabbaṃ. Evañhi sati parato ‘‘yenāpucchito, tassa atthitāyā’’ti aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttakāraṇenapi saṃsandati, aññathā gaṇṭhipadesuyeva pubbāparavirodho āpajjati. Aṭṭhakathāvacanena ca na sameti. Sace…pe… paññāyatīti iminā vuttappamāṇassa macchamaṃsakhaṇḍassa nahāruno vā sabbhāvamattaṃ dasseti. Tāhīti puthukāhi.
“以稻、米、麦所作之炒粉”:这是依多数而言,实则七种谷物炒制后亦为炒粉。因此说:“稗子、野谷……亦归入炒粉一类。”“炒粉团”指将炒粉捏合成团而作成的未煮炒粉球。由于以五种正食之一而中断了未完成食事的状态,故说“即使口中有芥子许……亦不构成请拒”。由“拒绝不适肉,不构成请拒”之说,若知道或不知道僧团所得利养不会归于自己而拒绝,则不构成请拒,因为所拒绝者正是应拒绝之物。拒绝无惭者所属之物,亦不构成请拒。“因非事”指因不是能成就非残食罪的请拒之事。以此表明所拒绝者正是应拒绝之物。因为若某物是应拒绝的,其拒绝不成为犯行之支,故说彼为“请拒之非事”。显示巴利原文
Sālivīhiyavehi katasattūti yebhuyyanayena vuttaṃ, satta dhaññāni pana bhajjitvā katopi sattuyeva. Tenevāha ‘‘kaṅguvaraka…pe… sattusaṅgahameva gacchatī’’ti. Sattumodakoti sattuyo piṇḍetvā kato apakko sattuguḷo. Pañcannaṃ bhojanānaṃ aññataravasena vippakatabhojanabhāvassa upacchinnattā ‘‘mukhe sāsapamattampi…pe… na pavāretī’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Akappiyamaṃsaṃ paṭikkhipati, na pavāretī’’ti vacanato sace saṅghikaṃ lābhaṃ attano apāpuṇantaṃ jānitvā vā ajānitvā vā paṭikkhipati, na pavāreti paṭikkhipitabbasseva paṭikkhittattā. Alajjisantakaṃ paṭikkhipantopi na pavāreti. Avatthutāyāti anatirittāpattisādhikāya pavāraṇāya avatthubhāvato. Etena paṭikkhipitabbasseva paṭikkhittabhāvaṃ dīpeti . Yañhi paṭikkhipitabbaṃ hoti, tassa paṭikkhepo āpattiaṅgaṃ na hotīti taṃ ‘‘pavāraṇāya avatthū’’ti vuccati.
“Upanāmeti”以此表示以身递近。对于站在手距之外者,即使有欲施的递近动作,若拒绝,则因距离远而不成邀请;为了显示即使长老仅因距离远也不成邀请,故说“因长老距离远”,而非因长老有递近动作。即使持食过去后站在手距之内,但若什么也不说而站在置物处,则不名为递近,故说“因使者未递近”。三处结文皆说:“持去后,若说‘请取食’,则名为递近;因此‘若持来比丘……则成邀请’。”然而有些人说:“将钵稍递近后说‘请取此食’,应理解为递近”,这看起来似乎合理,因为此处不侧重以言语递近。显示巴利原文
Upanāmetīti iminā kāyābhihāraṃ dasseti. Hatthapāsato bahi ṭhitassa satipi dātukāmābhihāre paṭikkhipantassa dūrabhāveneva pavāraṇāya abhāvato therassapi dūrabhāvamattaṃ gahetvā pavāraṇāya abhāvaṃ dassento ‘‘therassa dūrabhāvato’’ti āha, na pana therassa abhihārasabbhāvato. Sacepi gahetvā gato hatthapāse ṭhito hoti, kiñci pana avatvā ādhārakaṭṭhāne ṭhitattā abhihāro nāma na hotīti ‘‘dūtassa ca anabhiharaṇato’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Gahetvā gatena ‘bhattaṃ gaṇhathā’ti vutte abhihāro nāma hotīti ‘sace pana gahetvā āgato bhikkhu…pe… pavāraṇā hotī’ti vutta’’nti tīsupi gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ. Keci pana ‘‘pattaṃ kiñci upanāmetvā ‘imaṃ bhattaṃ gaṇhathā’ti vuttanti gahetabba’’nti vadanti, taṃ yuttaṃ viya dissati vācābhihārassa idha anadhippetattā.
“Parivesanā”指在施食处。“已被递近”即已被施食者递近。于此,若拒绝因欲施而递近后正接受者,则成邀请;此处即使拒绝未接受者,也成邀请。何以故?因欲施而递近故。即说“因此那是已被递近”。正因如此,三处结文皆说:“当有欲施的递近时,仅仅‘我将给’的取用并不名为递近;无论对‘我将给’而接受或不接受者,欲施的递近本身即名为递近,因此在接受时或未接受时,拒绝彼皆成邀请。”现在为了显示:若没有那欲施的递近,即使在接受时拒绝也不成邀请,故说“然而若……”等。显示巴利原文
Parivesanāyāti bhattagge. Abhihaṭāva hotīti parivesakeneva abhihaṭā hoti. Tato dātukāmatāya gaṇhantaṃ paṭikkhipantassa pavāraṇā hotīti ettha agaṇhantampi paṭikkhipato pavāraṇā hotiyeva. Kasmā? Dātukāmatāya abhihaṭattā. ‘‘Tasmā sā abhihaṭāva hotī’’ti hi vuttaṃ. Teneva tīsupi gaṇṭhipadesu ‘‘dātukāmābhihāre sati kevalaṃ ‘dassāmī’ti gahaṇameva abhihāro nāma na hoti, ‘dassāmī’ti gaṇhantepi agaṇhantepi dātukāmābhihārova abhihāro nāma hoti, tasmā gahaṇasamaye vā aggahaṇasamaye vā taṃ paṭikkhipato pavāraṇā hotī’’ti vuttaṃ. Idāni asati tassa dātukāmābhihāre gahaṇasamayepi paṭikkhipato pavāraṇā na hotīti dassetuṃ ‘‘sace panā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
「请取味」——这是以不构成邀请的名称而说,因此「听闻此言而拒绝,则不成邀请」。然而,对于「鱼味、肉味」,并非仅将鱼之味理解为鱼味,而是鱼与鱼味两者,皆依「鱼味」这一能引发邀请的共通名称而被认知,因此拒绝它便成邀请。其后的「鱼汤」处,理亦相同。在「即使说『请取此』」处,须知:即使不这样说,只要拒绝任何已被递近而足以构成邀请之物,皆成邀请。显示巴利原文
‘‘Rasaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti apavāraṇajanakassa nāmaṃ gahetvā vuttattā ‘‘taṃ sutvā paṭikkhipato pavāraṇā natthī’’ti vuttaṃ. Maccharasaṃ maṃsarasanti ettha pana na kevalaṃ macchassa rasaṃ maccharasamicceva viññāyati, atha kho maccho ca maccharasañca maccharasanti evaṃ pavāraṇajanakasādhāraṇanāmavasenapi viññāyamānattā taṃ paṭikkhipato pavāraṇāva hoti. Parato macchasūpanti etthāpi eseva nayo. ‘‘Idaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti vuttepīti ettha evaṃ avatvāpi pavāraṇapahonakaṃ yaṃkiñci abhihaṭaṃ paṭikkhipato pavāraṇā hotiyevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Karambakoti missakādhivacanametaṃ. Yañhi aññenaññena missetvā karonti, so ‘‘karambako’’ti vuccati. So sacepi maṃsena missetvā katova hoti, ‘‘karambakaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti apavāraṇārahassa nāmena vuttattā paṭikkhipato pavāraṇā na hoti. ‘‘Maṃsakarambakaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti vutte pana maṃsamissakaṃ gaṇhathāti vuttaṃ hoti, tasmā pavāraṇāva hoti.
「认为是『别请所作』」——对此,有人说:「因为物品本身是如法的,以不如法想而拒绝,此学处是无心的,所以成邀请。」另有人说:「在下文不构成供奉的邀请中,针对与水和酸粥、乳等混合的饭食而说『请取粥』,因此成邀请;但在『带来与饭混合的粥』此处,因为有单独的粥存在,所以不成邀请。」所说的「此中意趣」等,正是针对上述含义而说。然而「此处理由难见」——对此,有人言:「因为所谓与粥混合者,并不仅指饭,也有乳等,因此不应如杂合物那样成邀请。若如此,当粥较多或相等时,不构成邀请;只有当粥少饭多,才构成邀请——这里面理由难以明了。」另有人说:「所谓与粥混合者,即是指饭,因此拒绝它必定成邀请。若如此,则此处成邀请与不成邀请的差别,理由亦难明了。」显示巴利原文
‘‘Uddissakata’’nti maññamānoti ettha ‘‘vatthuno kappiyattā akappiyasaññāya paṭikkhipatopi acittakattā imassa sikkhāpadassa pavāraṇā hotī’’ti vadanti. ‘‘Heṭṭhā ayāguke nimantane udakakañjikakhīrādīhi saddhiṃ madditaṃ bhattameva sandhāya ‘yāguṃ gaṇhathā’ti vuttattā pavāraṇā hoti, ‘bhattamissakaṃ yāguṃ āharitvā’ti ettha pana visuṃ yāguyā vijjamānattā pavāraṇā na hotī’’ti vadanti. Ayamettha adhippāyoti ‘‘yenāpucchito’’tiādinā vuttamevatthaṃ sandhāya vadati. Kāraṇaṃ panettha duddasanti ettha eke tāva vadanti ‘‘yasmā yāgumissakaṃ nāma bhattameva na hoti, khīrādikampi hotiyeva, tasmā karambake viya pavāraṇāya na bhavitabbaṃ. Evañca sati yāgu bahutarā vā hoti samasamā vā, na pavāreti. ‘Yāgu mandā, bhattaṃ bahutaraṃ, pavāretī’ti ettha kāraṇaṃ duddasa’’nti. Keci pana vadanti ‘‘yāgumissakaṃ nāma bhattaṃ, tasmā taṃ paṭikkhipato pavāraṇāya eva bhavitabbaṃ. Evañca sati ‘idha pavāraṇā hoti na hotī’ti ettha kāraṇaṃ duddasa’’nti.
正如此处理由难见,后文「请取混合」处,亦应知理由同样难见。因为能构成邀请之物的多少,并非邀请成否的因由,唯有能引发邀请的名称取用,才是此中标准。因此,以「此不应与杂合物等同」等所说的理由,与前面所说也不相符。若「混合」一词确实只通用于饭的混合物,则如说「请取饭混合」时,无论饭多、相等或少,皆构成邀请;同样,说「请取混合」时,即使饭少,也应成邀请,因为「混合」唯通用于饭的混合物。复注三处也说:「因为『混合』唯通用于饭的混合物,故说『此即饭混合』。」若「混合」并非通用于饭的混合物,而是针对混合饭而说「请取混合」,则如不构成供奉的邀请中,针对与乳等混合的饭食而说「请取粥」时成邀请;同样,此处针对混合饭而说「请取混合」时,无论饭少或多,皆应成邀请。所以,无论「混合」是通用于饭的混合物,还是针对而说,前后两种说法皆不相符。既然如此,何必在此推究理由?于这些处,唯应依注释书的量为准——此是我等之见。显示巴利原文
Yathā cettha kāraṇaṃ duddasaṃ, evaṃ parato ‘‘missakaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti etthāpi kāraṇaṃ duddasamevāti veditabbaṃ. Na hi pavāraṇappahonakassa appabahubhāvo pavāraṇāya bhāvābhāvanimittaṃ, kiñcarahi pavāraṇajanakassa nāmaggahaṇamevettha pamāṇaṃ, tasmā ‘‘idañca karambakena na samānetabba’’ntiādinā yampi kāraṇaṃ vuttaṃ, tampi pubbe vuttena saṃsandiyamānaṃ na sameti. Yadi hi ‘‘missaka’’nti bhattamissakeyeva ruḷhaṃ siyā, evaṃ sati yathā ‘‘bhattamissakaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti vutte bhattaṃ bahutaraṃ vā samaṃ vā appataraṃ vā hoti, pavāretiyeva, evaṃ ‘‘missakaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti vuttepi appatarepi bhatte pavāraṇāya bhavitabbaṃ missakanti bhattamissakeyeva ruḷhattā. Tathā hi ‘‘missakanti bhattamissakeyeva ruḷhavohārattā idaṃ pana ‘bhattamissakamevā’ti vutta’’nti tīsupi gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ. Atha ‘‘missaka’’nti bhattamissake ruḷhaṃ na hoti, missakabhattaṃ pana sandhāya ‘‘missakaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti vuttanti. Evampi yathā ayāguke nimantane khīrādīhi saddhiṃ madditaṃ bhattameva sandhāya ‘‘yāguṃ gaṇhathā’’ti vutte pavāraṇā hoti, evamidhāpi missakabhattameva sandhāya ‘‘missakaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti vutte bhattaṃ appaṃ vā hotu bahu vā, pavāraṇā eva siyā. Tasmā ‘‘missaka’’nti bhattamissake ruḷhaṃ vā hotu sandhāyabhāsitaṃ vā, ubhayatthāpi pubbenāparaṃ na sametīti kimettha kāraṇacintāya, īdisesu pana ṭhānesu aṭṭhakathāpamāṇeneva gantabbanti ayaṃ amhākaṃ khanti.
“分开而给”,指将饭食上层的汤汁等别别取而施与——三部复注皆作此说。然而,有说者谓:“如同紧握挤压并加以滤除,使饭粒不致散落而施与”,即便如此,仍不见有何理据。譬如,有人持掺有饭粒之粥来,言:“请取粥”,若不予与饭粒相混之食,并不构成拒绝。同样,于此,对多乳粥、多汁食等而言,若言“请取乳”等之后,无论唯施乳等,或施与混有乳等之饭食,二者皆不应构成拒绝。是故,“分开而给”乃就他们施与之方式而言,非为显示不予混杂饭食即构成拒绝。应如是理解。然而,若复注中出于“施与混杂饭粒之食时即构成拒绝”之说而释“分开而给”,则此处当以复注为依准,不应更求其他理据。显示巴利原文
‘‘Visuṃkatvā detīti bhattassa upari ṭhitaṃ rasādiṃ visuṃ gahetvā detī’’ti tīsupi gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ. Kenaci pana ‘‘yathā bhattasitthaṃ na patati, tathā gāḷhaṃ hatthena pīḷetvā parissāvetvā detī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tathāpi kāraṇaṃ na dissati. Yathā hi bhattamissakaṃ yāguṃ āharitvā ‘‘yāguṃ gaṇhathā’’ti vatvā yāgumissakaṃ bhattampi dentaṃ paṭikkhipato pavāraṇā na hoti, evamidhāpi bahukhīrarasādīsu bhattesu ‘‘khīraṃ gaṇhathā’’tiādīni vatvā khīrādīni vā detu khīrādimissakabhattaṃ vā, ubhayathāpi pavāraṇāya na bhavitabbaṃ, tasmā ‘‘visuṃ katvā detī’’ti tenākārena dentaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, na pana bhattamissakaṃ katvā diyyamānaṃ paṭikkhipato pavāraṇā hotīti dassanatthanti gahetabbaṃ. Yadi pana bhattamissakaṃ katvā diyyamāne pavāraṇā hotīti adhippāyena aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘visuṃ katvā detī’’ti vuttaṃ, evaṃ sati aṭṭhakathāyevettha pamāṇanti gahetabbaṃ, na pana kāraṇantaraṃ gavesitabbaṃ.
若是蹲坐者,纵使双脚未离开地面而坐于地上,亦名为破坏威仪。因此,为能不破坏蹲坐而安稳就坐,故说“然于其下方……应施与坐具”。“不摇动座位”,指臀部肌肉不移动与座具接触之处,即不起座之意。此处不应如不与取中那样,理解为被驱离座位——三部复注皆有此说。显示巴利原文
Sace ukkuṭikaṃ nisinno pāde amuñcitvāpi bhūmiyaṃ nisīdati, iriyāpathaṃ vikopento nāma hotīti ukkuṭikāsanaṃ avikopetvāva sukhena nisīdituṃ ‘‘tassa pana heṭṭhā…pe… nisīdanakaṃ dātabba’’nti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Āsanaṃ acāletvāti pīṭhe phuṭṭhokāsato ānisadamaṃsaṃ amocetvā, anuṭṭhahitvāti vuttaṃ hoti, adinnādāne viya ṭhānācāvanaṃ na gahetabba’’nti tīsupi gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ.
就“已作不净”而言:因已作不净者自身即非“剩余”,若不令人作净,则置入彼钵中的根、果等物即非“剩余”;然而,其余属于钵内之食物,则是“剩余”,可以食用。若欲食用他们根、果,则应从钵中取出,令人作净后,置于另一容器中,再经余食作净,方得食用。显示巴利原文
Akappiyakatanti ettha akappiyakatasseva anatirittabhāvato kappiyaṃ akārāpetvā tasmiṃ patte pakkhittamūlaphalādiyeva atirittaṃ na hoti, sesaṃ pana pattapariyāpannaṃ atirittameva hoti, paribhuñjituṃ vaṭṭati. Taṃ pana mūlaphalādiṃ paribhuñjitukāmena tato nīharitvā kappiyaṃ kārāpetvā aññasmiṃ bhājane ṭhapetvā atirittaṃ kārāpetvā bhuñjitabbaṃ.
他不能再作,是指当在同一容器中操作时,与先前所作合在一起而成为“已作”,因此他本人不能再作,而其他人可以。但在另一个容器中,由他或由他人操作则无妨。因此说:“未作者,应作;未作之物,应作。”这里的“pi”字表示不仅仅是“由他人”的意思。所谓“如此作者”,即指在另一个容器中所作。“令人送”,意指通过未受具足戒者之手送去。由于此属律仪行事,故说“不应令未受具足戒者手中的食物被作”。显示巴利原文
So puna kātuṃ na labhatīti tasmiṃyeva bhājane kariyamānaṃ paṭhamaṃ katena saddhiṃ kataṃ hotīti puna soyeva kātuṃ na labhati, añño labhati. Aññasmiṃ pana bhājane tena vā aññena vā kātuṃ vaṭṭati. Tenāha ‘‘yena akataṃ, tena kātabbaṃ. Yañca akataṃ, taṃ kātabba’’nti. Tenapīti ettha pi-saddo na kevalaṃ aññena vāti imamatthaṃ dīpeti. Evaṃ katanti aññasmiṃ bhājane kataṃ. Pesetvāti anupasampannassa hatthe pesetvā. Imassa vinayakammabhāvato ‘‘anupasampannassa hatthe ṭhitaṃ na kāretabba’’nti vuttaṃ.
然而,若与食物相杂:在此,如果口中尚含有非剩余的食物,与之相杂,应知即成波逸提。因此,已受请者即使令人作残食法后再行进食,也应将口与手洗净,以免与非剩余的食物相混。未受请者虽在食前为充饥而食用非时药等并无过失,但已受请者由于已受请的缘故,实有恶作。因此律文说:“食用非时药……吞咽时犯恶作。”显示巴利原文
Sace pana āmisasaṃsaṭṭhānīti ettha sace mukhagatenapi anatirittena āmisena saṃsaṭṭhāni honti , pācittiyamevāti veditabbaṃ. Tasmā pavāritena bhojanaṃ atirittaṃ kārāpetvā bhuñjantenapi yathā akatena missaṃ na hoti, evaṃ mukhañca hatthañca suddhaṃ katvā bhuñjitabbaṃ. Kiñcāpi appavāritassa purebhattaṃ yāmakālikādīni āhāratthāya paribhuñjatopi anāpatti, pavāritassa pana pavāraṇamūlakaṃ dukkaṭaṃ hotiyevāti ‘‘yāmakālikaṃ…pe… ajjhohāre āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti pāḷiyaṃ vuttaṃ.
241 由于以身食用、以语言指使而未作残食,由此而犯,故说“从身语”。其余此处易明。然而,此中具备三分:已受请的状态、食物未作残食、非时吞咽。显示巴利原文
241. Kāyena bhuñjanato vācāya āṇāpetvā atirittaṃ akārāpanato ca āpajjatīti ‘‘kāyavācato’’ti vuttaṃ. Sesamettha uttānameva. Pavāritabhāvo, āmisassa anatirittatā, kāle ajjhoharaṇanti imāni panettha tīṇi aṅgāni.
六、第二受请满足学处解释显示巴利原文
6. Dutiyapavāraṇāsikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
243 第六项,共通性,即与“来,比丘,请用”等所表述的受请方式共通。因论母中说“若食已,波逸提”,故于食事结束时犯,而非每一口吞咽时犯。“强劝受请,犯波逸提”,此亦应知是就食事结束时而言。余者于此易明。然而,此处有五项要素:已受请的状态、有受请想、有期望招待、以非余食强劝受请、食事结束。显示巴利原文
243. Chaṭṭhe sādhāraṇamevāti ‘‘handa bhikkhu khāda vā’’tiādinā vuttapavāraṇāya sādhāraṇaṃ. ‘‘Bhuttasmiṃ pācittiya’’nti mātikāyaṃ vuttattā bhojanapariyosāne āpatti, na ajjhohāre ajjhohāre. Abhihaṭṭhuṃ pavāreti, āpatti pācittiyassāti idañca bhojanapariyosānaṃyeva sandhāya vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Sesamettha uttānameva. Pavāritatā, pavāritasaññitā, āsādanāpekkhatā, anatirittena abhihaṭṭhuṃ pavāraṇā, bhojanapariyosānanti imāni panettha pañca aṅgāni.
七、非时食学处注释显示巴利原文
7. Vikālabhojanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
247 第七项,“最上舞会”指最殊胜的舞蹈。据说他们站在山顶,为祭祀一位天神而举行。演员们的戏剧,即“舞蹈戏剧”,如演绎抢夺悉多等情节。在戒条未制定时:指未满二十岁的戒条尚未制定之时。他们给予:是说“带回寺院后你们将吃”而给予。显示巴利原文
247. Sattame aggasamajjoti uttamaṃ naccaṃ. Taṃ kira pabbatamatthake ṭhatvā ekaṃ devataṃ uddissa karonti. Naṭānaṃ nāṭakāni naṭanāṭakāni, sītāharaṇādīni. Apaññatte sikkhāpadeti ūnavīsativassasikkhāpade apaññatte. Adaṃsūti ‘‘vihāraṃ netvā khādissathā’’ti adaṃsu.
248-249 第248–249项。根、根类等,唯依指导而了知。即使以不同的方式讲述,亦无法理解;若以不同的方式讲述,对于不知那些名称的人,只会产生迷惑,故此处不作说明。“硬食的作用”指以硬食应办之事。“不遍满”指不成就。于各各处,此处有人言:“能在某一处完成食物作用者,于他处亦不适用。”树、藤等,是将前述汇集而说。“入地内者”是就佳美的树干而说。一切净物,是指根、干、皮、叶等一切皆净。即使以其名称,亦无法显示其范围,此是连接。为显示芒果等未熟的果实是尽形寿药,故说“未熟的”。显示巴利原文
248-249. Mūlakamūlādīni upadesatoyeva veditabbāni. Na hi tāni pariyāyantarena vuccamānānipi sakkā viññātuṃ. Pariyāyantarepi hi vuccamāne taṃ taṃ nāmaṃ ajānantānaṃ sammohoyeva siyā, tasmā tattha na kiñci vakkhāma. Khādanīyatthanti khādanīyena kattabbakiccaṃ. Neva pharantīti na nipphādenti. Tesu tesu janapadesūti ettha ‘‘ekasmiṃ janapade āhārakiccaṃ sādhentaṃ sesajanapadesupi na kappatī’’ti vadanti. Rukkhavalliādīnanti heṭṭhā vuttameva sampiṇḍetvā vuttaṃ. Antopathavīgatoti sālakalyāṇīkhandhaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Sabbakappiyānīti mūlakhandhatacapattādivasena sabbaso kappiyāni. Tesampi nāmavasena na sakkā pariyantaṃ dassetunti sambandho. Acchivādīnaṃ aparipakkāneva phalāni yāvajīvikānīti dassetuṃ ‘‘aparipakkānī’’ti vuttaṃ.
“诃子等之核”:此处,诸导师说,是指包裹着果仁、终生存在的果核。也有说果仁也是终生存在的。“阿魏”指从阿魏树流出的树脂。阿魏胶等仅是阿魏的制品。其中,所谓阿魏胶,是将阿魏树的枝和叶熬煮后制成的树脂;所谓阿魏片,是将阿魏叶熬煮后制成的树脂。也有说“是混合其他东西制成的”。“乳清”指从顶端流出的汁液。“乳清叶”指从叶中流出的汁液。“乳清叶片”指在阔叶中煎煮而成的汁液。也有说“是从茎中流出的汁液”。其余诸义在此显而易见。然而,于此,非时、时限内、吞咽,这三者是此处的要素。显示巴利原文
Harītakādīnaṃ aṭṭhīnīti ettha miñjaṃ paṭicchādetvā ṭhitakapālāni yāvajīvikānīti ācariyā. Miñjampi yāvajīvikanti eke. Hiṅgūti hiṅgurukkhato paggharitaniyyāso. Hiṅgujatuādayopi hiṅguvikatiyo eva. Tattha hiṅgujatu nāma hiṅgurukkhassa daṇḍapattāni pacitvā kataniyyāso, hiṅgusipāṭikaṃ nāma hiṅgupattāni pacitvā kataniyyāso. ‘‘Aññena missetvā kato’’tipi vadanti. Takanti aggakoṭiyā nikkhantasileso. Takapattinti pattato nikkhantasileso. Takapaṇṇinti palāse bhajjitvā katasileso. ‘‘Daṇḍato nikkhantasileso tipi vadanti. Sesamettha uttānameva. Vikālatā, yāvakālikatā, ajjhoharaṇanti imāni panettha tīṇi aṅgāni.
八、蓄存食学处注释显示巴利原文
8. Sannidhikārakasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
252-3 第八条中,“此类”是指无汤无菜的食物。“任何时限内食物或夜分内食物”这句中,以“夜分内食物”一词,显示不仅对时限内食物因蓄藏而犯波逸提,对夜分内食物也是如此。然而,夜分内食物难道不是既不包含在嚼食中,也不包含在啖食中吗?正是如此,在分别句中才说:“所谓嚼食,是指除去五种啖食、夜分内食物、七日时限内食物、终生时限内食物后,所剩余者。所谓啖食,是指五种啖食。”又说:“若有比丘食用或啖食蓄藏的嚼食或啖食,犯波逸提。”既然如此,如何理解对夜分内食物也犯波逸提呢?答:在分别句中,说“除去夜分内食物”是为了阐明“嚼食”一词的含义,并非为了显示因蓄藏而无犯。因为凡是可嚼食的,都称为嚼食;而夜分内食物,其本质是饮用,并无任何可嚼食之处。因此,虽然夜分内食物未被嚼食与啖食所包含,但显示无犯时却说:“无犯者,夜分内食物于夜分内蓄藏而食用。”由此可知,若超过夜分,则因蓄藏而犯波逸提。又以此语:“诸比丘,以夜分内食物,对七日时限内食物、终生时限内食物,若当日接受,则夜分内适宜,超过夜分即不适宜。”此显示巴利原文
252-3. Aṭṭhame tādisanti asūpabyañjanaṃ. Yaṃkiñci yāvakālikaṃ vā yāmakālikaṃ vāti ettha ‘‘yāmakālika’’nti iminā na kevalaṃ yāvakālike eva sannidhipaccayā pācittiyaṃ, atha kho yāmakālikepīti dasseti. Nanu ca yāmakālikaṃ neva khādanīyesu antogadhaṃ, na bhojanīyesu. Teneva padabhājanīye ‘‘khādanīyaṃ nāma pañca bhojanāni yāmakālikaṃ sattāhakālikaṃ yāvajīvikaṃ ṭhapetvā avasesaṃ khādanīyaṃ nāma. Bhojanīyaṃ nāma pañca bhojanānī’’ti vuttaṃ, ‘‘yo pana bhikkhu sannidhikārakaṃ khādanīyaṃ vā bhojanīyaṃ vā khādeyya vā bhuñjeyya vā, pācittiya’’nti ca vuttaṃ, tasmā yāmakālike pācittiyena bhavitabbanti kathaṃ viññāyatīti? Vuccate – padabhājane khādanīya-saddassa atthadassanatthaṃ ‘‘yāmakālikaṃ ṭhapetvā’’ti vuttaṃ, na pana sannidhipaccayā anāpattidassanatthaṃ. Khāditabbañhi yaṃkiñci khādanīyanti adhippetaṃ, na ca yāmakālikesu kiñci khāditabbaṃ atthi pātabyabhāvato. Tasmā kiñcāpi yāmakālikaṃ khādanīyabhojanīyehi na saṅgahitaṃ, tathāpi anāpattiṃ dassentena ‘‘anāpatti yāmakālikaṃ yāme nidahitvā bhuñjatī’’ti vacanato yāmātikkame sannidhipaccayā pācittiyena bhavitabbanti viññāyati. ‘‘Yāmakālikena, bhikkhave, sattāhakālikaṃ yāvajīvikaṃ tadahupaṭiggahitaṃ yāme kappati, yāmātikkante na kappatī’’ti (mahāva. 305) imināpi cāyamattho siddho. Teneva bhagavato adhippāyaññūhi aṭṭhakathācariyehi yāmakālike pācittiyameva vuttaṃ.
“在执受时”是就执受本身而言。因为那只是已被执受之物,无需再行执受。因此,才说“对于以欲吞咽之心而执取者,在执受时”。而《本母注》中则只说:“对于以‘我将吞咽’之心而执取者,在执受时”。“那”是指那个钵。“显现”是指在粥的上面显现。即使钵有油色,但在无油腻的状态下,用手指摩擦时,仅因颜色而显现划痕,因此为了说明此中无犯,而说“那是无意义的”。所谓“自己执受后未舍弃的”,在第二天是不允许的。在此,若通过不关心地舍弃执受,或通过不关心地给予未受具足戒者,而舍弃了执受,才名为“已舍弃”。因此,“未舍弃”一词,是指以这两种方式都未舍弃执受。所以,应当了知:即使是他人舍弃后未给予的,若已通过不关心地舍弃执受而舍弃了执受,那么在第二天也是允许的。显示巴利原文
Paṭiggahaṇeti gahaṇameva sandhāya vuttaṃ. Paṭiggahitameva hi taṃ, puna paṭiggahaṇakiccaṃ natthi. Teneva ‘‘ajjhoharitukāmatāya gaṇhantassa paṭiggahaṇe’’ti vuttaṃ. Mātikāṭṭhakathāyaṃ (kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. sannidhikārakasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā) pana ‘‘ajjhoharissāmīti gaṇhantassa paṭiggahaṇe’’icceva vuttaṃ. Yanti yaṃ pattaṃ. Sandissatīti yāguyā upari sandissati. Telavaṇṇe patte satipi nisnehabhāve aṅguliyā ghaṃsantassa vaṇṇavaseneva lekhā paññāyati, tasmā tattha anāpattīti dassanatthaṃ ‘‘sā abbohārikā’’ti vuttaṃ. Sayaṃ paṭiggahetvā apariccattameva hi dutiyadivase na vaṭṭatīti ettha paṭiggahaṇe anapekkhavissajjanena anupasampannassa nirapekkhadānena vā vijahitapaṭiggahaṇaṃ pariccattameva hotīti ‘‘apariccatta’’nti iminā ubhayathāpi avijahitapaṭiggahaṇameva vuttaṃ. Tasmā yaṃ parassa pariccajitvā adinnampi sace paṭiggahaṇe nirapekkhavissajjanena vijahitapaṭiggahaṇaṃ hoti, tampi dutiyadivase vaṭṭatīti veditabbaṃ.
既然如此,为什么在“钵未洗净”等情况下说有罪呢?在三部《结文》中说:“在未舍执受的情况下,自己或他人将钵倒空,未妥善洗净便放置,钵中沾着的东西也属于未舍执受,因此在这情况下有罪。”然而,有些人说:“‘沙弥们舍弃’——在此章中,因为说‘未舍弃的’,所以给予未受具足戒者时,只有已舍弃的才可行,未舍弃的则不可。因此,即使以无执着之心舍弃了执受,但若未舍弃给未受具足戒者,也是不允许的。”这种说法似乎不合理。因为从舍弃执受之时起,便不再蓄藏,已舍弃执受的物品,与未执受的相似。而且,只有在执受后蓄藏的情况下,才说因蓄藏而有罪。正如所说:“这是指执受后经过一夜的意思。”显示巴利原文
Yadi evaṃ ‘‘patto duddhoto hotī’’tiādīsu kasmā āpatti vuttāti? ‘‘Paṭiggahaṇaṃ avissajjetvāva sayaṃ vā aññena vā tucchaṃ katvā na sammā dhovitvā niṭṭhāpite patte laggampi avijahitapaṭiggahaṇameva hotīti tattha āpattī’’ti tīsupi gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ. Keci pana ‘‘sāmaṇerānaṃ pariccajantīti imasmiṃ adhikāre ṭhatvā ‘apariccattamevā’ti vuttattā anupasampannassa pariccattameva vaṭṭati, apariccattaṃ na vaṭṭatīti āpannaṃ, tasmā nirālayabhāvena paṭiggahaṇe vijahitepi anupasampannassa apariccattaṃ na vaṭṭatī’’ti vadanti, taṃ yuttaṃ viya na dissati. Yadaggena hi paṭiggahaṇaṃ vijahati, tadaggena sannidhimpi na karoti vijahitapaṭiggahaṇassa appaṭiggahitasadisattā. Paṭiggahetvā nidahiteyeva ca sannidhipaccayā āpatti vuttā. ‘‘Paṭiggahetvā ekarattaṃ vītināmitassetaṃ adhivacana’’nti hi vuttaṃ.
在圣典中,因为说“为食用而执受七日药、尽形寿药,犯恶作”等,对于蓄藏的七日药和尽形寿药,即使在食前为食用而吞咽,也犯恶作。因此,对于夜分药,为食用而吞咽时,也应另有恶作,故说:“为食用而吞咽者,伴随恶作而有波逸提。”“在通常的食中”,是指在米饭等适宜食用的食物中。对于夜分药,若有因缘,以沾有食物的嘴吞咽者,有两罪:即在今天食前,以沾有食物的嘴食用昨天执受的夜分药时,因蓄藏夜分药而有一波逸提,因与蓄藏食物混合的食而有另一罪,共计两波逸提。“在两种分别中”,是指所说的“沾有食物”和“不沾有食物”两种方式。“恶作增加”是指因吞咽而增加的恶作。“偷兰遮和恶作增加”,是指在人肉中偷兰遮增加,在其他不适合的肉中恶作增加。显示巴利原文
Pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘sattāhakālikaṃ yāvajīvikaṃ āhāratthāya paṭiggaṇhāti, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’tiādinā sannihitesu sattāhakālikayāvajīvikesu purebhattampi āhāratthāya ajjhoharaṇepi dukkaṭassa vuttattā yāmakālikepi āhāratthāya ajjhoharaṇe visuṃ dukkaṭenapi bhavitabbanti āha ‘‘āhāratthāya ajjhoharato dukkaṭena saddhiṃ pācittiya’’nti. Pakatiāmiseti odanādikappiyāmise. Yāmakālikaṃ sati paccaye sāmisena mukhena ajjhoharato dveti hiyyo paṭiggahitayāmakālikaṃ ajja purebhattaṃ sāmisena mukhena bhuñjato sannihitayāmakālikapaccayā ekaṃ pācittiyaṃ, sannihitena saṃsaṭṭhaāmisapaccayā ekanti dve pācittiyāni. Vikappadvayepīti sāmisena nirāmisenāti vuttavidhānadvaye. Dukkaṭaṃ vaḍḍhatīti āhāratthāya ajjhoharaṇapaccayā dukkaṭaṃ vaḍḍhati. Thullaccayañca dukkaṭañca vaḍḍhatīti manussamaṃse thullaccayaṃ, sesaakappiyamaṃsesu dukkaṭaṃ vaḍḍhati.
255 首先,关于“因接受而犯恶作”:此处因为是蓄藏的食物,即使在正午前食用也犯恶作。然而,若有因缘,即使蓄藏了七日药或尽形寿药,为了作药而接受、食用者,并无罪过。其余内容此处浅显易懂。然而,在此处,有“时药与夜分药的性质”、“蓄藏的状态”、“将其吞咽”这三项要素。显示巴利原文
255.Paṭiggahaṇapaccayā tāva dukkaṭanti ettha sannihitattā purebhattampi dukkaṭameva. Sati paccaye pana sannihitampi sattāhakālikaṃ yāvajīvikaṃ bhesajjatthāya gaṇhantassa paribhuñjantassa ca anāpattiyeva. Sesamettha uttānameva. Yāvakālikayāmakālikatā, sannidhibhāvo, tassa ajjhoharaṇanti imāni panettha tīṇi aṅgāni.
九、上妙食学处注释显示巴利原文
9. Paṇītabhojanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
257-259 第九条中,与上妙物混合的食物称为上妙食。正如由良马所驾的车称为“良马车”,同样,在此处,由七种谷物所生、与上妙物混合的食物便称为“上妙食”。为了显示那些与之混合的上妙物的类别,圣典中说:“所谓,即酥油、生酥”等。“那些允许的肉”一句,是为了显示构成波逸提对象的范围而说,并非为了显示允许对象的范围。因为对于食肉不被允许的众生,其酥油等并非不被允许。事实上,除了人油之外,在一切乳、酥、生酥、油、脂当中,并无所谓的不允许。关于“酥油饭”:在此,虽将混合了酥油的饭称为酥油饭,酥油和饭本身也可称为酥油饭,但注释书中以“犹如并没有一种叫做酥油饭的米饭”这一理据,更加肯定地判为恶作,故不可另作他说。注释书阿阇梨正是在此类处所中的权威。显示巴利原文
257-259. Navame paṇītasaṃsaṭṭhāni bhojanāni paṇītabhojanāni. Yathā hi ājaññayutto ratho ‘‘ājaññaratho’’ti vuccati, evamidhāpi paṇītasaṃsaṭṭhāni sattadhaññanibbattāni bhojanāni ‘‘paṇītabhojanānī’’ti vuttāni. Yehi pana paṇītehi saṃsaṭṭhāni, tāni ‘‘paṇītabhojanānī’’ti vuccanti, tesaṃ pabhedadassanatthaṃ ‘‘seyyathidaṃ, sappi navanīta’’ntiādi pāḷiyaṃ vuttaṃ. ‘‘Yesaṃ maṃsaṃ kappatī’’ti idañca pācittiyavatthuparicchedadassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ, na pana kappiyavatthuparicchedadassanatthaṃ. Na hi akappiyamaṃsasattānaṃ sappiādīni na kappanti. Ekañhi manussavasātelaṃ ṭhapetvā sabbesaṃ khīrasappinavanītavasātelesu akappiyaṃ nāma natthi. Sappibhattanti ettha kiñcāpi sappisaṃsaṭṭhaṃ bhattaṃ sappibhattaṃ, sappi ca bhattañca sappibhattantipi viññāyati, aṭṭhakathāsu pana ‘‘sālibhattaṃ viya sappibhattaṃ nāma natthī’’ti kāraṇaṃ vatvā dukkaṭasseva daḷhataraṃ katvā vuttattā na sakkā aññaṃ vattuṃ. Aṭṭhakathācariyā eva hi īdisesu ṭhānesu pamāṇaṃ.
“根本”是指净物而说。“无犯”:由于不存嫌疑,于一切罪中无犯。然而,有些人说:“此处所说的无犯仅是就波逸提而言,但乞求汤饭的恶作依然存在。”此说不应采纳。“以净酥油、以不净酥油”:这是依肉的净与不净而说,因此在这里应理解为:由净肉所得的酥油、由不净肉所得的酥油。“不同事缘的”:是指依酥油、生酥等不同事缘而说。显示巴利原文
Mūlanti kappiyabhaṇḍaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Anāpattīti visaṅketattā sabbāhiyeva āpattīhi anāpatti. Keci pana ‘‘pācittiyeneva anāpatti vuttā, sūpodanaviññattidukkaṭaṃ pana hotiyevā’’ti vadanti, taṃ na gahetabbaṃ. Kappiyasappinā akappiyasappināti ca idaṃ kappiyākappiyamaṃsānaṃ vasena vuttaṃ, tasmā kappiyamaṃsasappinā akappiyamaṃsasappināti evamettha attho gahetabbo. Nānāvatthukānīti sappinavanītādīnaṃ vasena vuttaṃ.
261 应依大名学处处治——于此:显示巴利原文
261.Mahānāmasikkhāpadena kāretabboti ettha –
无病比丘应接受四个月的资具邀请,唯再次邀请与常邀请除外。若超过此而接受,即犯波逸提。(波逸提 306)显示巴利原文
‘‘Agilānena bhikkhunā catumāsapaccayapavāraṇā sāditabbā aññatra punapavāraṇāya aññatra niccapavāraṇāya, tato ce uttari sādiyeyya, pācittiya’’nti (pāci. 306) –
这称为大名学处。依此学处,若在僧团为病者所作的资具邀请之处,已以夜晚或药物作限定:‘只应乞求此数量的夜晚或此数量的药物’,那么,若超过此夜晚的界限或药物的界限,向非以药事而请者乞求药物,或以他种药事而请者乞求他种药物,便说犯波逸提。因此,无病者而自以为有病,乞求五种药物,即名为‘向非以药事者乞求药物’,故说‘应以大名学处处置’。‘这些是悔过的事缘’:这是就圣典所提及的酥油等而说。然而应知,圣典未提及的不允许的酥油等,对比丘尼亦是恶作的事缘。‘乞求汤饭’:这是指除了比丘的波逸提事缘和比丘尼的悔过事缘之外的其他乞求而说。其余在此处是浅显易通的。然而在此处,有‘上妙食的性质’、‘无病’、‘未作乞求而得’、‘吞咽’这四项要素。显示巴利原文
Idaṃ mahānāmasikkhāpadaṃ nāma. Iminā ca sikkhāpadena saṅghavasena gilānapaccayapavāraṇāya pavāritaṭṭhāne sace tattha rattīhi vā bhesajjehi vā paricchedo kato hoti, ettakāyeva rattiyo ettakāni vā bhesajjāni viññāpetabbānīti. Atha tato rattipariyantato vā bhesajjapariyantato vā uttari na bhesajjakaraṇīyena vā bhesajjaṃ aññabhesajjakaraṇīyena vā aññaṃ bhesajjaṃ viññāpentassa pācittiyaṃ vuttaṃ. Tasmā agilāno gilānasaññī hutvā pañca bhesajjāni viññāpento na bhesajjakaraṇīyena bhesajjaṃ viññāpento nāma hotīti ‘‘mahānāmasikkhāpadena kāretabbo’’ti vuttaṃ. Etāni pāṭidesanīyavatthūnīti pāḷiyaṃ āgatasappiādīni sandhāya vuttaṃ. Pāḷiyaṃ anāgatāni pana akappiyasappiādīni bhikkhunīnampi dukkaṭavatthūnīti veditabbaṃ. Sūpodanaviññattiyanti bhikkhūnaṃ pācittiyavatthūni bhikkhunīnaṃ pāṭidesanīyavatthūni ca ṭhapetvā avasesaviññattiṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Sesamettha uttānameva. Paṇītabhojanatā, agilānatā, akataviññattiyā paṭilābho, ajjhoharaṇanti imāni panettha cattāri aṅgāni.
十、齿木学处注释显示巴利原文
10. Dantaponasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
263 在第十条中,‘被弃于圣者’:这是对‘父亲之团食’的称呼。‘门槛’:指在冢间建造的房屋或自己房屋的门槛。‘紧密连结’:由坚硬的肉连结而成,即说身体坚硬、紧密。显示巴利原文
263. Dasame ayyavosāṭitakānīti pitupiṇḍassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Ummāreti susāne katagehassa attano gehassa vā ummāre. Ghanabaddhoti ghanamaṃsena sambaddho, kathinasaṃhatasarīroti vuttaṃ hoti.
264 “口门”:指喉管。“食物”:指应吞咽的任何时药等食物。“使进入”:指令其进入口门。无论从口进入还是从鼻进入,由于须经喉管吞咽,这一切都只是令其入了口门。然而,那些比丘即便在没有食物时,对水也生起食物想,对齿木也生起“此已入口门”之想,心中不安,因此说:“那些比丘……未正确理解意义而心生不安。”因为水可随意饮用,齿木可如法使用,但其汁液不可吞咽。即使齿木汁液在不知情时吞入体内,也犯波逸提。然而,若不吞咽,无论是齿木还是其他任何东西,都可以放入口中。显示巴利原文
264.Mukhadvāranti galanāḷikaṃ. Āhāranti ajjhoharitabbaṃ yaṃkiñci yāvakālikādiṃ. Āhareyyāti mukhadvāraṃ paveseyya. Mukhena vā paviṭṭhaṃ hotu nāsikāya vā, galena ajjhoharaṇīyattā sabbampi taṃ mukhadvāraṃ pavesitameva hoti. Yasmā pana te bhikkhū anāhārepi udake āhārasaññāya dantapone ca mukhadvāraṃ āhaṭaṃ idanti saññāya kukkuccāyiṃsu, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘te bhikkhū adinnaṃ…pe… sammā atthaṃ asallakkhetvā kukkuccāyiṃsū’’ti. Udakañhi yathāsukhaṃ pātuṃ dantakaṭṭhañca dantaponaparibhogena paribhuñjituṃ vaṭṭati, tassa pana rasaṃ gilituṃ na vaṭṭati. Sacepi dantakaṭṭharaso ajānantassa anto pavisati, pācittiyameva. Anajjhoharantena pana dantakaṭṭhaṃ vā hotu aññaṃ vā, kiñci mukhe pakkhipituṃ vaṭṭati.
265 “无病”:指病者无法亲手受用,而以口接受。所谓“仅发音”,即仅抬起。所谓“一处”,即仅以手指触碰。若以此方式接受,则全部皆视为已接受,因为是用竹竿末端绑住而安放的。即便瓦罐放在地上,施者站在伸手可及处,说“我展示瓦罐”而施与时,通过握住竹竿末端接受,绑在两端的所有物品也都成为已接受。关于“为比丘的利益,不挤压,而自然被挤压的甘蔗汁”,因有言“拿取”,故说“不见有奉献”。然而,若比丘站在伸手可及处,为他的利益而挤压甘蔗,流出的汁液可以拿取;在槽中自然流出的甘蔗汁,即使经过中间一再阻隔再放出,也可以拿取。此义见于某些注释书。显示巴利原文
265.Akallakoti gilāno sahatthā paribhuñjituṃ asakkonto mukhena paṭiggaṇhāti. Uccāraṇamattanti ukkhipanamattaṃ. Ekadesenapīti aṅguliyāpi phuṭṭhamattena. Taṃ ce paṭiggaṇhāti, sabbaṃ paṭiggahitamevāti veṇukoṭiyā bandhitvā ṭhapitattā. Sacepi bhūmiyaṃ ṭhitameva ghaṭaṃ dāyakena hatthapāse ṭhatvā ghaṭaṃ dassāmīti dinnaveṇukoṭiggahaṇavasena paṭiggaṇhāti, ubhayakoṭibaddhaṃ sabbampi paṭiggahitameva hoti. Bhikkhussa atthāya apīḷetvā pakatiyā pīḷiyamānaucchurasaṃ sandhāya ‘‘gaṇhathā’’ti vuttattā ‘‘abhihāro na paññāyatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Hatthapāse ṭhitassa pana bhikkhussa atthāya pīḷiyamānā ucchuto paggharantaṃ rasaṃ gaṇhituṃ vaṭṭati, doṇikāya sayaṃ paggharantaṃ ucchurasaṃ majjhe āvaritvā āvaritvā vissajjitampi gaṇhituṃ vaṭṭati. Katthaci aṭṭhakathāsu.
“不可移动”:指中等体力的人无法移动之物。因说到“在丁提尼迦等叶上”,故应知在树枝上接受是可行的。关于“擦拭后接受”,此处有说:“擦拭后并无接受之事,故应理解为‘擦拭后拿取’。”此处当视为“擦拭后接受”或“擦拭后拿取”之义。因为落在钵中的尘垢,若不除去而想内部受用,可接受后受用。由于随顺先前的作意,故说“可给予未受具足戒者……”。然而,仅凭心中生起“我将给予他人”的念头,并不成为他人所有,因此即使不给他,亦可接受后受用。显示巴利原文
Asaṃhārimeti thāmamajjhimena purisena asaṃhāriye. ‘‘Tintiṇikādipaṇṇesū’’ti vacanato sākhāsu paṭiggahaṇaṃ ruhatīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Puñchitvā paṭiggahetvāti ettha ‘‘puñchite paṭiggahaṇakiccaṃ natthi, tasmā puñchitvā gahetvāti evamattho gahetabbo’’ti vadanti. Puñchitvā paṭiggahetvā vāti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Patte patitarajanacuṇṇañhi abbhantaraparibhogatthāya aparihaṭabhāvato paṭiggahetvā paribhuñjituṃ vaṭṭati. Pubbābhogassa anurūpena ‘‘anupasampannassa datvā…pe… vaṭṭatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Yasmā pana taṃ ‘‘aññassa dassāmī’’ti cittuppādamattena parasantakaṃ nāma na hoti, tasmā tassa adatvāpi paṭiggahetvā paribhuñjituṃ vaṭṭati.
“给予比丘”是指给予其他比丘。“酸粥”是针对任何流质而说的,如乳浆等。因为从手中放开后再拿取,便成了已执取,所以文中说“即不放开手”。关于“搅拌者”,是指正在搅拌的人们,或这就是原文的读法。因为取来放在地上,故不存在奉献,所以文中说“应接受钵”。关于“首先从杓中点滴落入钵中”,此处有些人说:“正如首先落入的无有过失,同样,对于倒出后移开的人们,后来落入的也因已奉献而无过失。”关于“以小锅”,是指小的容器。即使以口缘拿取,即抬起口缘使手触及时,也是可以拿取的。某些人是指无畏山寺住者。此中的理趣是:身所系属的所系属物,也即是身所系属。同样地,在那里,对于身所系属及彼所系属,只说有偷兰遮。显示巴利原文
Bhikkhussa detīti aññassa bhikkhussa deti. Kañjikanti khīrarasādiṃ yaṃkiñci dravaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Hatthato mocetvā puna gaṇhāti, uggahitakaṃ hotīti āha ‘‘hatthato amocentenevā’’ti. Ālulentānanti ālolentānaṃ, ayameva vā pāṭho. Āharitvā bhūmiyaṃ ṭhapitattā abhihāro natthīti āha ‘‘patto paṭiggahetabbo’’ti. Paṭhamataraṃ uḷuṅkato thevā patte patantīti ettha ‘‘yathā paṭhamataraṃ patitatheve doso natthi, tathā ākiritvā apanentānaṃ pacchā patitathevepi abhihaṭattā nevatthi doso’’ti vadanti. Carukenāti khuddakabhājanena. Mukhavaṭṭiyāpi gahetuṃ vaṭṭatīti mukhavaṭṭiṃ ukkhipitvā hatthe phusāpite gaṇhituṃ vaṭṭati. Kecīti abhayagirivāsino. Esa nayoti kāyapaṭibaddhapaṭibaddhampi kāyapaṭibaddhamevāti ayaṃ nayo. Tathā ca tattha kāyapaṭibaddhe taṃpaṭibaddhe ca thullaccayameva vuttaṃ.
“由彼”是指物品去到其近处的那位比丘。“因此”是指因为只允许原主使用,所以如此说。若在当日用手拿取,于第二日接受后再使用,便成为已执取、已接受,所以文中说“未触摸”。因为尚未接受,所以文中说“以蓄藏为缘,无犯”。若未接受而使用,则犯未与而取的口门罪,因此文中说:“然而接受后方可使用。”因为文中说“当日……此后则不可”,所以若当日用手拿取或未拿取而放置,第二日未经接受便使用者,犯未与而取的口门罪;然而,用手拿取后放置,第二日接受后使用者,则成为已执取、已接受。因为用手拿取后放置的,正是未接受之物。因为文中说“自己拿取后使用”,所以允许在当日使用未接受之物。因此,复注中所说:“‘正在给予时掉落’——此处,如同在群食等中,为患病等而心存疑虑者,允许群食;同样,在此,世尊为消除疑虑而允许已接受者”,这段话不应取。因为“正在给予时掉落”是通说,故应知此理趣适用于四种时限。显示巴利原文
Tenāti yassa bhikkhuno santikaṃ gataṃ, tena. Tasmāti yasmā mūlaṭṭhasseva paribhogo anuññāto, tasmā. Taṃ divasaṃ hatthena gahetvā dutiyadivase paṭiggahetvā paribhuñjantassa uggahitakapaṭiggahitaṃ hotīti āha ‘‘anāmasitvā’’ti. Appaṭiggahitattā ‘‘sannidhipaccayā anāpattī’’ti vuttaṃ. Appaṭiggahetvā paribhuñjantassa adinnamukhadvārāpatti hotīti āha ‘‘paṭiggahetvā pana paribhuñjitabba’’nti. ‘‘Taṃ divasaṃ…pe… na tato para’’nti vacanato taṃ divasaṃ hatthena gahetvā vā aggahetvā vā ṭhapitaṃ dutiyadivase appaṭiggahetvā paribhuñjantassa adinnamukhadvārāpatti hoti, hatthena gahetvā ṭhapitaṃ dutiyadivase paṭiggahetvā paribhuñjantassa pana uggahitakapaṭiggahitaṃ hoti. Appaṭiggahitameva hi hatthena gahetvā ṭhapitaṃ. ‘‘Sāmaṃ gahetvā paribhuñjitu’’nti hi vacanato appaṭiggahitasseva tasmiṃ divase paribhogo anuññāto. Tasmā yaṃ vuttaṃ gaṇṭhipade ‘‘taṃ diyyamānaṃ patatīti ettha yathā gaṇabhojanādīsu gilānādīnaṃ kukkuccāyantānaṃ gaṇabhojanaṃ anuññātaṃ, evamidhāpi bhagavatā paṭiggahitameva kukkuccavinodanatthaṃ anuññāta’’nti, taṃ na gahetabbaṃ. ‘‘Taṃ diyyamānaṃ patatī’’ti avisesena vuttattā catūsupi kālikesu ayaṃ nayo veditabbo.
“以刀具”是指以已受持的刀具。为何在此不会构成拿取或储存因缘的过失呢?回答说:“因为他们并非为了受用而持有它。”这句话表明了:为了外部受用,自己拿取后,或拿取未受具足戒者所给予的物品后而持有,是允许的。因此,若有人为了涂抹钵等目的,自己拿取并持有油等物,若想受用,则在受持后受用者无犯。然而,若为了内部受用,自己拿取后受持而受用者,则成为“已拿取、已受持”;若未受持而受用者,则犯“未与而取”的口门罪;若为了内部受用,拿取未受具足戒者所给予的物品而持有者,则如同“生薑、盐的许可”一样,构成储存因缘的罪过。有些人说:“由于‘对中等体力的男子而言,仅提起即算’等所说的五支具足时受持即成立,因此,即使为了外部受用,若拿取未受具足戒者所给之物,也属于已受持。”若按此说法,则在此为外部受用而拿取未受具足戒者所给之物并持有者,就应当构成储存因缘的罪过,而且也不应说“因为他们并非为了受用而持有它”。因此应知:为了外部受用而拿取者,不名为已受持。若问:“既然如此,在五种受持支中,是否应加上‘为了受用’这一限定语?”答:“不应加。因为受持本是……”显示巴利原文
Satthakenāti paṭiggahitasatthakena. Kasmā panettha uggahitapaccayā sannidhipaccayā vā doso na siyāti āha ‘‘na hi taṃ paribhogatthāya pariharantī’’ti. Imināva bāhiraparibhogatthaṃ sāmaṃ gahetvā anupasampannena dinnaṃ vā gahetvā pariharituṃ vaṭṭatīti dīpeti. Tasmā pattasammakkhanādiatthaṃ sāmaṃ gahetvā parihaṭatelādiṃ sace paribhuñjitukāmo hoti, paṭiggahetvā paribhuñjantassa anāpatti. Abbhantaraparibhogatthaṃ pana sāmaṃ gahitaṃ paṭiggahetvā paribhuñjantassa uggahitakapaṭiggahitaṃ hoti, appaṭiggahetvā paribhuñjantassa adinnamukhadvārāpatti hoti, abbhantaraparibhogatthameva anupasampannena dinnaṃ gahetvā pariharantassa siṅgīloṇakappo viya sannidhipaccayā āpatti hoti. Keci pana ‘‘thāmamajjhimassa purisassa uccāraṇamattaṃ hotītiādinā vuttapañcaṅgasampattiyā paṭiggahaṇassa ruhanato bāhiraparibhogatthampi sace anupasampannena dinnaṃ gaṇhāti, paṭiggahitamevā’’ti vadanti. Evaṃ sati idha bāhiraparibhogatthaṃ anupasampannena dinnaṃ gahetvā pariharantassa sannidhipaccayā āpatti vattabbā siyā, ‘‘na hi taṃ paribhogatthāya pariharantī’’ti ca na vattabbaṃ, tasmā bāhiraparibhogatthaṃ gahitaṃ paṭiggahitaṃ nāma na hotīti veditabbaṃ. Yadi evaṃ pañcasu paṭiggahaṇaṅgesu ‘‘paribhogatthāyā’’ti visesanaṃ vattabbanti? Na vattabbaṃ. Paṭiggahaṇañhi paribhogatthameva hotīti ‘‘paribhogatthāyā’’ti visuṃ avatvā ‘‘tañce bhikkhu kāyena vā kāyapaṭibaddhena vā paṭiggaṇhātī’’ti ettakameva vuttaṃ. Apare pana ‘‘satipi paṭiggahaṇe ‘na hi taṃ paribhogatthāya pariharantī’ti idha aparibhogatthāya pariharaṇe anāpatti vuttā’’ti vadanti. Udukkhalamusalāni khiyyantīti ettha udukkhalamusalānaṃ khayena pisitakoṭṭitabhesajjesu sace āgantukavaṇṇo paññāyati, na vaṭṭati.
“是清净的水”,指的是从树枝等处滴落而下的水。“或者他的钵应被受持”这句中,为说明以触碰钵中之物而给与时,因手上沾有食物而无过失,钵的受持应理解为是为了内部受用而受持。在“若落入沙弥的钵中……受持不失去”这段中,若反复拿取并放入自己钵中,因已确认“这是自己的所有物”,故手中的受持不会失去;但若拿取明确分配给他人之物,由于在拿取之时即已确认“这是自己的所有物”,故手中的受持便告失去。在“为某些人而盛饭”这段中,即使是为未受具足戒者盛饭,若心想“他会来取”而自己盛好放置,则受持不失去;但若放入未受具足戒者手中,则由于是未受具足戒者所放置,因已舍弃而失去受持。因此说:“沙弥……由于已舍弃。”显示巴利原文
Suddhaṃ udakaṃ hotīti rukkhasākhādīhi gaḷitvā patanaudakaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Patto vāssa paṭiggahetabboti etthāpi pattagataṃ chupitvā dentassa hatthalaggena āmisena dosābhāvatthaṃ pattapaṭiggahaṇanti abbhantaraparibhogatthameva paṭiggahaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. Yaṃ sāmaṇerassa patte patati…pe… paṭiggahaṇaṃ na vijahatīti ettha punappunaṃ gaṇhantassa attano patte pakkhittameva ‘‘attano santaka’’nti sanniṭṭhānakaraṇato hatthagataṃ paṭiggahaṇaṃ na vijahati, paricchinditvā dinnaṃ pana gaṇhantassa gahaṇasamayeyeva ‘‘attano santaka’’nti sanniṭṭhānassa katattā hatthagataṃ paṭiggahaṇaṃ vijahati. Kesañci atthāya odanaṃ pakkhipatīti ettha anupasampannassa atthāya pakkhipantepi ‘‘āgantvā gaṇhissatī’’ti sayameva pakkhipitvā ṭhapanato paṭiggahaṇaṃ na vijahati, anupasampannassa hatthe pakkhittaṃ pana anupasampanneneva ṭhapitaṃ nāma hotīti paṭiggahaṇaṃ vijahati pariccattabhāvato. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘sāmaṇera…pe… pariccattattā’’ti.
“堪能受持的负重”,是指中等体力的男子所能提起的重量。虽未放手而以另一只手遮盖者并无过失,但依义注,仍不应遮盖,应以义注为依准。关于“为防蝇”,有说:“即使树枝上的灰尘落入钵中,若能方便受用,则因树枝已受持,故在此为了内部受用,根本受持即有效。”另一些人则说:“‘为防蝇’在此只是就字面意思而言,是为了外部受用而拿取。”在“若没有这些”中,是指若没有罐或糠。在“令未受具足戒者拿取”中,是指令未受具足戒者拿取那些可吞咽的物品。“上座比丘的钵给下座比丘”,是指自己拿取上座比丘的钵交给下座比丘。在“把你的粥给我”这段中,如此说后,便拿取沙弥的钵,也把自己的钵给他。在此,“智者沙弥”等是关于换钵的讨论。“应审察其理由”的意思是:如同为母亲等携带油等物时,在那样的事务中,不与未受具足戒者交换而受用是允许的,但在此若不换钵则不得受用,对此应当审察其理由。显示巴利原文
Paṭiggahaṇūpagaṃ bhāraṃ nāma thāmamajjhimassa purisassa ukkhepārahaṃ. Kiñcāpi avissajjetvāva aññena hatthena pidahantassa doso natthi, tathāpi na pidahitabbanti aṭṭhakathāpamāṇeneva gahetabbaṃ. Macchikavāraṇatthanti ettha ‘‘sacepi sākhāya laggarajaṃ patte patati, sukhena paribhuñjituṃ sakkāti sākhāya paṭiggahitattā abbhantaraparibhogatthamevidha paṭiggahaṇanti mūlapaṭiggahaṇameva vaṭṭatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Apare pana ‘‘macchikavāraṇatthanti ettha vacanamattaṃ gahetvā bāhiraparibhogatthaṃ gahita’’nti vadanti. Tasmimpi asatīti cāṭiyā vā kuṇḍake vā asati. Anupasampannaṃ gāhāpetvāti taṃyeva ajjhoharaṇīyabhaṇḍaṃ anupasampannena gāhāpetvā. Therassa pattaṃ anutherassāti therassa pattaṃ attanā gahetvā anutherassa deti. Tuyhaṃ yāguṃ mayhaṃ dehīti ettha evaṃ vatvā sāmaṇerassa pattaṃ gahetvā attanopi pattaṃ tassa deti. Ettha panāti paṇḍito sāmaṇerotiādipattaparivattanakathāya. Kāraṇaṃ upaparikkhitabbanti yathā mātuādīnaṃ telādīni haranto tathārūpe kicce anupasampannena aparivattetvāva paribhuñjituṃ labhati, evamidha pattaparivattanaṃ akatvā paribhuñjituṃ na labhatīti ettha kāraṇaṃ vīmaṃsitabbanti attho.
在此,有说其理由:“当沙弥们所拿的米用尽时,可能会生起‘我们的沙弥一定会照顾我们’的寻思,因此必须交换后才可受用。然而,若为父母的利益或为树荫等而拿取,则并无受用的期许,因此那是允许的。”正因如此,阿阇梨佛授长老也说:显示巴利原文
Ettha pana ‘‘sāmaṇerehi gahitataṇḍulesu parikkhīṇesu avassaṃ amhākaṃ sāmaṇerā saṅgahaṃ karontīti vitakkuppatti sambhavati, tasmā taṃ parivattetvāva paribhuñjitabbaṃ. Mātāpitūnaṃ atthāya pana chāyatthāya vā gahaṇe paribhogāsā natthi, tasmā taṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti kāraṇaṃ vadanti. Teneva ācariyabuddhadattattherenapi vuttaṃ –
为父母利益故,虽持油等物;
为树枝、树荫等故,于这些无有差别;
是故,于其差别,当思惟其因由;
我们则思量其‘有室’之差别。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Mātāpitūnamatthāya, telādiharatopi ca; Sākhaṃ chāyādiatthāya, imesaṃ na visesati. ‘‘Tasmā hissa visesassa, cintetabbaṃ tu kāraṇaṃ; Tassa sālayabhāvaṃ tu, visesaṃ takkayāma ta’’nti.
在此,这更为合理,因为必定会有那样的寻思生起。在此,确实无法净化寻思。然而,为母亲等利益而携带时,则不一定有那样的寻思生起,因此可以净化寻思。因为,在可以净化寻思之处,便无过失。正因如此,下文将说:“如果他能够净化寻思,那么从那里得到的食物也可以吃。”显示巴利原文
Idamevettha yuttataraṃ avassaṃ tathāvidhavitakkuppattiyā sambhavato. Na sakkā hi ettha vitakkaṃ sodhetunti. Mātādīnaṃ atthāya haraṇe pana nāvassaṃ tathāvidhavitakkuppattīti sakkā vitakkaṃ sodhetuṃ. Yattha hi vitakkaṃ sodhetuṃ sakkā, tattha nevatthi doso. Teneva vakkhati ‘‘sace pana sakkoti vitakkaṃ sodhetuṃ, tato laddhaṃ khāditumpi vaṭṭatī’’ti.
“不能使之移动”是指:不能移动后去除砂砾。所谓“钵已放在托架上”,是针对应被接受的钵而言。“摇动”是指无理由地摇动。即使有理由,也不应摇动比丘们受用之物。虽然世尊说:“比丘们,我允许在非人病时食用生肉、生血”(《大品》264),在那种病时为了自己的利益而接受生肉是被允许的,但又以通则方式禁止说“他远离接受生肉”。然而,由于此处并非为了自己或其他比丘的利益而执取,所以说“狮子残食等……是适当的”。“他能净化寻思”是指:他能觉察到“他也给我吗?”这样的寻思尚未生起,或者能觉察到“我以‘要给沙弥’的清净心而拿取”。显示巴利原文
Niccāletuṃ na sakkotīti niccāletvā sakkharā apanetuṃ na sakkoti. Ādhārake patto ṭhapitohotīti paṭiggahetabbapattaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Cāletīti vinā kāraṇaṃ cāleti. Satipi kāraṇe bhikkhūnaṃ paribhogārahaṃ cāletuṃ na vaṭṭati. Kiñcāpi ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, amanussikābādhe āmakamaṃsaṃ āmakalohita’’nti (mahāva. 264) tādise ābādhe attano atthāya āmakamaṃsapaṭiggahaṇaṃ anuññātaṃ, ‘‘āmakamaṃsapaṭiggahaṇā paṭivirato hotī’’ti ca sāmaññato paṭikkhittaṃ, tathāpi attano aññassa vā bhikkhuno atthāya aggahitattā ‘‘sīhavighāsādiṃ…pe… vaṭṭatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Sakkoti vitakkaṃ sodhetunti mayhampi detīti vitakkassa anuppannabhāvaṃ sallakkhetuṃ sakkoti, sāmaṇerassa dassāmīti suddhacittena mayā gahitanti vā sallakkhetuṃ sakkoti.
对于“若在根本处也已受持”这一句,此处有论师说:“若带着‘他拿走之后也会给我吧’的想法而受持了。”“分成份”是指:让比丘与沙弥各自取自己所喜欢的一份,为所有人分成均等的份。“取后剩余”是指:从沙弥们所取的那一份中剩余下来的。“拿取后”是指:想着“我要拿这个”而取走。在此处,“取后剩余”是指他拿取之后又重新放下的。“受持后”是指:在当天受持后。因此说:“时药与尽形寿药相混时,没有过失。”但若是在前一天受持后放置的,则不可用沾有食物的嘴去吸那药卷的烟。“用海水”是指:用未受持的海水。因为洁净石使水清净后单独留存,所以说“不计为食物”。“附着”是指:在口中、手上,以及在水里或干时显出白色的东西附着。“取了饮用水”是指:为了自己而取用。但若想着“我要把喝剩的倒回原处”而取,则无需再次受持。“推开”是指:拨开、除去。显示巴利原文
Sace pana mūlepi paṭiggahitaṃ hotīti ettha ‘‘gahetvā gate mayhampi dadeyyunti saññāya sace paṭiggahitaṃ hotī’’ti vadanti. Koṭṭhāse karotīti bhikkhusāmaṇerā ca attano attano abhirucitaṃ koṭṭhāsaṃ gaṇhantūti sabbesaṃ samake koṭṭhāse karoti. Gahitāvasesanti sāmaṇerehi gahitakoṭṭhāsato avasesaṃ. Gaṇhitvāti ‘‘mayhaṃ idaṃ gaṇhissāmī’’ti gahetvā. Idha gahitāvasesaṃ nāma tena gaṇhitvā puna ṭhapitaṃ. Paṭiggahetvāti tadahu paṭiggahetvā. Teneva ‘‘yāvakālikena yāvajīvikasaṃsagge doso natthī’’ti vuttaṃ. Sace pana purimadivase paṭiggahetvā ṭhapitā hoti, sāmisena mukhena tassā vaṭṭiyā dhūmaṃ pivituṃ na vaṭṭati. Samuddodakenāti appaṭiggahitasamuddodakena. Yasmā katakaṭṭhi udakaṃ pasādetvā visuṃ tiṭṭhati, tasmā ‘‘abbohārika’’nti vuttaṃ. Laggatīti mukhe hatthe ca udake sukkhe setavaṇṇaṃ dassentaṃ laggati. Pānīyaṃ gahetvāti attanoyeva atthāya gahetvā. Sace pana pītāvasesaṃ tattheva ākirissāmīti gaṇhāti, puna paṭiggahaṇakiccaṃ natthi. Vikkhambhetvāti viyūhitvā, apanetvāti attho.
“大种上”是指:依于身体的大种上。“掉落”是指:切断后掉落。只有切断后掉落的才应受持,不是其他的。即使从树上砍下生木来做,也是可以的——此处应知,为了取黏土而掘地也是可以的。只有在有蛇等爬行动物危险时挖掘,才是被允许的——若无作净者,可自己取用;其他时候则应令人受持后使用。其余此处意义明显。未受持、未允许、无烟等不计为食物而吞咽——这些是此处的四个条件。显示巴利原文
Mahābhūtesūti sarīranissitesu mahābhūtesu. Patatīti vicchinditvā patati. Vicchinditvā patitameva hi paṭiggahetabbaṃ, na itaraṃ. Alladāruṃ rukkhato chinditvāpi kātuṃ vaṭṭatīti ettha mattikatthāya pathaviṃ khaṇitumpi vaṭṭatīti veditabbaṃ. Sappadaṭṭhakkhaṇeyeva vaṭṭatīti asati kappiyakārake sāmaṃ gahetvā paribhuñjituṃ vaṭṭati, aññadā paṭiggahāpetvā paribhuñjitabbaṃ. Sesamettha uttānameva. Appaṭiggahitatā, ananuññātatā, dhūmādiabbohārikābhāvo, ajjhoharaṇanti imāni panettha cattāri aṅgāni.
第五 裸行者品显示巴利原文
5. Acelakavaggo
一、裸行者学处注释显示巴利原文
1. Acelakasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
273 在裸行者品第一学处中:“他们的”指外道;“在那里”指容器中;“从此”指从钵中。若外道说:“这是最先特地为我取来放置的,属于我所有,请倒在这个容器里。”这样说是许可的。其余文义清晰。所施者是外道、是可吞咽之物、为吞咽而亲手置于未置容器中——此为这里的三个条件。显示巴利原文
273. Acelakavaggassa paṭhamasikkhāpade tesanti titthiyānaṃ. Tatthāti bhājane. Itoti pattato. Sace titthiyo vadatīti ‘‘paṭhamameva maṃ sandhāya abhiharitvā ṭhapitaṃ mayhaṃ santakaṃ hoti, imasmiṃ bhājane ākirathā’’ti vadati, vaṭṭati. Sesamettha uttānameva. Aññatitthiyatā, ajjhoharaṇīyatā , ajjhoharaṇatthāya sahatthā anikkhittabhājane dānanti imāni panettha tīṇi aṅgāni.
二、遣离学处注释显示巴利原文
2. Uyyojanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
274 第二学处文义清晰。欲行非行、为此目的遣离比丘、遣离时对方越过近行区域——此为这里的三个条件。显示巴利原文
274. Dutiyaṃ uttānatthameva. Anācāraṃ ācaritukāmatā, tadatthameva upasampannassa uyyojanā, evaṃ uyyojentassa upacārātikkamoti imāni panettha tīṇi aṅgāni.
三、与食学处注释显示巴利原文
3. Sabhojanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
280 第三学处:“脊梁”是门楣的别称。所谓“小”的卧室,宽五肘,其中央位置从脊梁起算恰好为二肘半。因此,在这样的卧室中,若离开脊梁一肘半而坐,即称为“越过脊梁而坐”。如此而坐,也名为“越过中央而坐”,故说“以此显示越过中央”。无论怎样取坐——或架在脊梁上、或未架在脊梁上——“有心的”指以入座后安坐之心而成为有心。其余文义清晰。夫妇有染心而共在座、是卧室、无第二位比丘、潜入而坐——此为这里的四个条件。显示巴利原文
280. Tatiye piṭṭhasaṅghāṭoti dvārabāhāyetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Khuddakaṃ nāma sayanigharaṃ vitthārato pañcahatthappamāṇaṃ hoti, tassa ca majjhimaṭṭhānaṃ piṭṭhasaṅghāṭato aḍḍhateyyahatthappamāṇameva hoti, tasmā tādise sayanighare piṭṭhasaṅghāṭato hatthapāsaṃ vijahitvā nisinno piṭṭhivaṃsaṃ atikkamitvā nisinno nāma hoti. Evaṃ nisinno ca majjhaṃ atikkamitvā nisinno nāma hotīti āha ‘‘iminā majjhātikkamaṃ dassetī’’ti. Yathā vā tathā vā katassāti piṭṭhivaṃsaṃ āropetvā vā anāropetvā vā katassa. Sacittakanti anupavisitvā nisīdanacittena sacittakaṃ. Sesamettha uttānameva. Pariyuṭṭhitarāgajāyampatikānaṃ sannihitatā, sayanigharatā, dutiyassa bhikkhuno abhāvo, anupakhajja nisīdananti imāni panettha cattāri aṅgāni.
284-289 关于第四与第五学处,无需任何说明。显示巴利原文
284-289. Catutthapañcamesu natthi kiñci vattabbaṃ.
六、行仪学处注释显示巴利原文
6. Cārittasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
298 第六学处中,“以自然声”是指:在十二肘范围内站立可闻之声,即称为自然声。“应告知”是说:应以“我去某家”或“我行威仪”等语告知。此处其余意义明显。接受五种食物之任一邀请、有比丘在而不告知、从施食家进入其他家、未过正午、无因缘或危难——这些是此处的五个条件。显示巴利原文
298. Chaṭṭhe pakativacanenāti ettha yaṃ dvādasahatthabbhantare ṭhitena sotuṃ sakkā bhaveyya, taṃ pakativacanaṃ nāma. Āpucchitabboti ‘‘ahaṃ itthannāmassa gharaṃ gacchāmī’’ti vā ‘‘cārittaṃ āpajjāmī’’ti vā īdisena vacanena āpucchitabbo. Sesamettha uttānameva. Pañcannaṃ bhojanānaṃ aññatarena nimantanasādiyanaṃ, santaṃ bhikkhuṃ anāpucchanā, bhattiyagharato aññagharappavesanaṃ, majjhanhikānatikkamo, samayassa vā āpadānaṃ vā abhāvoti imāni panettha pañca aṅgāni.
七、大名学处注释显示巴利原文
7. Mahānāmasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
303 第七学处中,名为“大名”者,是阿努卢陀长老的兄弟,世尊的小叔父之子。净饭王、斛饭王、白饭王、甘露饭王、阿弥饭王——这五人实为兄弟。名为甘露的王后是他们之姐妹,提沙长老是她的儿子。如来与难陀长老是净饭王之子,大名与阿努卢陀长老是斛饭王之子,阿难陀长老是甘露饭王之子。他是世尊的堂弟,而大名年纪较长,是一位斯陀含圣弟子。因此,经文说“名为大名……圣弟子。”显示巴利原文
303. Sattame mahānāmo nāmāti anuruddhattherassa bhātā bhagavato cūḷapitu putto. Suddhodano sakkodano sukkodano dhotodano amitodanoti ime hi pañca janā bhātaro. Amitā nāma devī tesaṃ bhaginī, tissatthero tassā putto. Tathāgato ca nandatthero ca suddhodanassa puttā, mahānāmo ca anuruddhatthero ca sukkodanassa, ānandatthero amitodanassa. So bhagavato kaniṭṭho, mahānāmo mahallakataro sakadāgāmī ariyasāvako. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘mahānāmo nāma…pe… ariyasāvako’’ti.
305-306 第305–306条。巴利语中“ajjaṇho”意为“今日”,即指一天;或可取其“ajjano”之义,而非“我们”之义。“kālaṃ āharissathā”意为“你们将在明天带来”。如果此后还接受,就是说,如果已经就夜晚或药物作了限定——“只应告知这么些夜晚”或“只应告知这么些药物”,那么,在超过夜晚分限或药物分限之后,若再告知而接受,即犯。即使告知“我们已被您以这些药物邀请,我们正需要这种药物”,也只有病人才可这样告知。显示巴利原文
305-306. Pāḷiyaṃ ajjaṇhoti ajja ekadivasanti attho, ‘‘ajjano’’ti vā attho gahetabbo, no amhākaṃ. Kālaṃ āharissathāti sve harissatha. Tato ce uttari sādiyeyyāti sace tattha rattīhi vā bhesajjehi vā paricchedo kato hoti ‘‘ettakāyeva vā rattiyo ettakāni vā bhesajjāni viññāpetabbānī’’ti, tato rattipariyantato vā bhesajjapariyantato vā uttari viññāpento sādiyeyya. ‘‘Imehi tayā bhesajjehi pavāritamha, amhākañca imināva bhesajjena attho’’ti ācikkhitvā viññāpetumpi gilānova labhati.
310 第310条。由于这一规定仅适用于僧团的邀约,所以说“那些被个人自己的邀约所邀约者”。其余内容浅显易明。此处的四要素为:属僧团之邀约、就药物作告知、非因病、超出分限。显示巴利原文
310. Yasmā saṅghapavāraṇāyamevāyaṃ vidhi, tasmā ‘‘ye attano puggalikāya pavāraṇāya pavāritā’’ti vuttaṃ. Sesaṃ uttānameva. Saṅghapavāraṇatā , bhesajjaviññatti, agilānatā, pariyantātikkamoti imāni panettha cattāri aṅgāni.
8. 整军学处注释显示巴利原文
8. Uyyuttasenāsikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
311 第311条。第八学处文义浅明。此处的四要素为:军队已开拔、为观看而前往、在允许的区域外观看、没有这样的因缘或危难。显示巴利原文
311. Aṭṭhamaṃ uttānatthameva. Uyyuttasenā, dassanatthāya gamanaṃ, anuññātokāsato aññatra dassanaṃ, tathārūpapaccayassa āpadāya vā abhāvoti imāni panettha cattāri aṅgāni.
9. 军营学处注释显示巴利原文
9. Senāvāsasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
317 第317条。第九学处亦义理显明。此中三要素为:超过三夜、在军中日落、无病等因缘。显示巴利原文
317. Navamasikkhāpadampi uttānameva. Tirattātikkamo, senāya sūriyassa atthaṅgamo, gilānatādīnaṃ abhāvoti imāni panettha tīṇi aṅgāni.
10. 观战学处注释显示巴利原文
10. Uyyodhikasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
322 第322条。第十学处中,“你获得多少标记?”意为“作为你箭射之标记,你获得了多少人?”即“你射中了多少人?”其余内容于此义理显明。此中三要素为:为观看演习等而往、于开许处之外观看、无如是因缘或灾厄。显示巴利原文
322. Dasame kati te lakkhāni laddhānīti tava sarappahārassa lakkhaṇabhūtā kittakā janā tayā laddhāti attho, kittakā tayā viddhāti vuttaṃ hoti. Sesamettha uttānameva. Uyyodhikādidassanatthāya gamanaṃ, anuññātokāsato aññatra dassanaṃ, tathārūpapaccayassa āpadāya vā abhāvoti imāni panettha tīṇi aṅgāni.
6. 饮酒品显示巴利原文
6. Surāpānavaggo
一、饮酒学处注释显示巴利原文
1. Surāpānasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
326-328 饮酒品第一学处中,“vatiyā”意为“以村围”。在巴利语中,所谓粉酒,是将粉放入容器,加入适量水,揉捏制成。同样,将糕点与饭放入容器,加入适量水,揉捏制成者,称为糕点酒与饭酒。而“kiṇṇā”是指此酒的酒母;也有称为“酒丸”者,加入其中制成者,称为加酒母酒。由诃子、芥子等多种成分混合者,称为混合成分酒。显示巴利原文
326-328. Surāpānavaggassa paṭhamasikkhāpade vatiyāti gāmaparikkhepavatiyā. Pāḷiyaṃ piṭṭhasurādīsu piṭṭhaṃ bhājane pakkhipitvā tajjaṃ udakaṃ datvā madditvā katā piṭṭhasurā. Evaṃ pūve odane ca bhājane pakkhipitvā tajjaṃ udakaṃ datvā madditvā katā pūvasurā odanasurāti ca vuccati. ‘‘Kiṇṇā’’ti pana tassā surāya bījaṃ vuccati. Ye surāmodakātipi vuccanti, te pakkhipitvā katā kiṇṇapakkhittā. Harītakīsāsapādinānāsambhārehi saṃyojitā sambhārasaṃyuttā.
由蜂蜜、棕榈、椰子等花汁长期放置而成者,为花酒。由面包果等果汁而成者,为果酒。由葡萄汁而成者,为蜜酒。由甘蔗汁而成者,为糖酒。由诃子、余甘子、苦味药材等多种成分的汁液长期放置而成者,为混合成分酒。所谓“从种子起”,即从备好这些成分放入瓮中之时起,以及从棕榈、椰子等花汁采集之时起。显示巴利原文
Madhukatālanāḷikerādipuppharaso ciraparivāsito pupphāsavo. Panasādiphalaraso phalāsavo. Muddikāraso madhvāsavo. Ucchuraso guḷāsavo. Harītakāmalakakaṭukabhaṇḍādinānāsambhārānaṃ raso ciraparivāsito sambhārasaṃyutto. Bījato paṭṭhāyāti sambhāre paṭiyādetvā cāṭiyaṃ pakkhittakālato, tālanāḷikerādīnaṃ puppharasassa gahitaabhinavakālatoyeva ca paṭṭhāya.
329 盐酸粥,是以多种药物配制而成的非酒类特殊发酵物。所谓“为取气味”,即是为了获取芬芳气味。至于此处“非心念、世间所责”的义理,应依第一波罗夷注释中所说的方法了知。其余内容此处自明。这里有两项要素:即酒性,以及对它的饮用。显示巴利原文
329.Loṇasovīrakaṃ suttañca anekehi bhesajjehi abhisaṅkhato amajjabhūto āsavaviseso. Vāsaggāhāpanatthanti sugandhibhāvaggāhāpanatthaṃ. Acittakaṃ lokavajjanti ettha yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ paṭhamapārājikavaṇṇanāyaṃ vuttanayena veditabbaṃ. Sesamettha uttānameva. Majjabhāvo, tassa pānañcāti imāni panettha dve aṅgāni.
二、指戳学处注释显示巴利原文
2. Aṅgulipatodakasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
330 第330条。第二学处中,“比丘尼亦处于未受具足戒位”,此处应知:比丘亦处于比丘尼的未受具足戒位。其余内容于此自明。于此处,有两项要素:以嬉笑为意图、以身触撞击已受具足戒者之身。显示巴利原文
330. Dutiye bhikkhunīpi anupasampannaṭṭhāne ṭhitāti ettha bhikkhupi bhikkhuniyā anupasampannaṭṭhāne ṭhitoti veditabbo. Sesamettha uttānameva. Hasādhippāyatā, upasampannassa kāyena kāyāmasananti imāni panettha dve aṅgāni.
三、嬉戏学处解释显示巴利原文
3. Hasadhammasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
335 第335条。第三学处,其义显然。于此处,有两项要素:超过踝骨之上、以嬉笑为意图而起嬉戏。显示巴利原文
335. Tatiyaṃ uttānatthameva. Uparigopphakatā, hasādhippāyena kīḷananti imāni panettha dve aṅgāni.
四、不恭敬学处解释显示巴利原文
4. Anādariyasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
344 第344条。第四学处中指出:“不应执取应受谴责的师说。”意即:因为甘蔗汁属七日药,其渣滓属终身药,两者的集合即是甘蔗棒,所以如糖诃子一般,在非时嚼食甘蔗棒是可行的——像这样的应受谴责的师说,不应执取。在世间所责学处中,“师说不可行”,即在世间所责学处的犯处,那种师说不可执取,其意为:逾越世间所责之后,宣称“这是我们的师说”者,其执取不被允许。所谓“随顺经”,即注释书。所谓“随传承而来的和合而行”,即是“应执取随传承而来的师说”——如此解说时,便已含摄于大注释书的论说之中,这是其意趣。其余内容于此自明。于此处,有两项要素:对已受具足戒者,以所制之说而作不恭敬。显示巴利原文
344. Catutthe gārayho ācariyuggaho na gahetabboti yasmā ucchuraso sattāhakāliko, tassa kasaṭo yāvajīviko, dvinnaṃyeva samavāyo ucchuyaṭṭhi, tasmā vikāle ucchuyaṭṭhiṃ khādituṃ vaṭṭati guḷaharītakaṃ viyāti evamādiko gārayhācariyavādo na gahetabbo. Lokavajje ācariyuggaho na vaṭṭatīti lokavajjasikkhāpade āpattiṭṭhāne yo ācariyavādo, so na gahetabbo, lokavajjaṃ atikkamitvā ‘‘idaṃ amhākaṃ ācariyuggaho’’ti vadantassa uggaho na vaṭṭatīti adhippāyo. Suttānulomaṃ nāma aṭṭhakathā. Paveṇiyā āgatasamodhānaṃ gacchatīti ‘‘paveṇiyā āgato ācariyuggahova gahetabbo’’ti evaṃ vutte mahāaṭṭhakathāvādeyeva saṅgahaṃ gacchatīti adhippāyo. Sesamettha uttānameva. Upasampannassa paññattena vacanaṃ, anādariyakaraṇanti imāni panettha dve aṅgāni.
五、恐吓学处解释显示巴利原文
5. Bhiṃsāpanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
345 第五,其义自明。然于此中,有二支:已受具足戒;于其见闻之范围内,为欲令彼心生恐惧而作努力。显示巴利原文
345. Pañcamaṃ uttānatthameva. Upasampannatā, tassa dassanasavanavisaye bhiṃsāpetukāmatāya vāyamananti imāni panettha dve aṅgāni.
6. 火学处注释显示巴利原文
6. Jotisikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
350 第六,“巴嘎”本是地方王子的名称,其居住之地也依惯用语而称为“巴嘎”,故说“巴嘎是地区之名”。其事发生在名为苏苏玛拉吉利的城中。据说,在建设该城选址之日,一位建筑占相师勘察城址时,不远处有一只鳄鱼发出吼叫。此后,城无碍建成,便以此鳄鱼之吼为吉兆,命名为苏苏玛拉吉利。然而,另有一说:“因山形似鳄鱼,故名苏苏玛拉山,此山在该城附近,因城有苏苏玛拉山,故称‘苏苏玛拉吉利’。”无论取哪一说,此乃该城之名,故言“苏苏玛拉吉利是城名”。“贝萨卡拉”是一种特定的树木,名为甘潘达,也有人称之为“白树”。然而,因该树众多,那片树林便以“贝萨卡拉林”著称。亦有读作“贝萨嘎拉林”者,因为有些人说:“有一名为贝萨的夜叉,行止不正,因其从此处堕落,故那片树林得名贝萨嘎拉林。”显示巴利原文
350. Chaṭṭhe bhaggā nāma janapadino rājakumārā, tesaṃ nivāso ekopi janapado ruḷhīsaddena ‘‘bhaggā’’ti vuccati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘bhaggāti janapadassa nāma’’nti. Susumāragireti evaṃnāmake nagare. Tassa kira nagarassa māpanatthaṃ vatthuvijjācariyena nagaraṭṭhānassa pariggaṇhanadivase avidūre susumāro saddamakāsi giraṃ nicchāresi. Atha anantarāyena nagare māpite tameva susumāragiraṇaṃ subhanimittaṃ katvā susumāragiraṃtvevassa nāmaṃ akaṃsu. Keci pana ‘‘susumārasaṇṭhānattā susumāro nāma eko giri, so tassa nagarassa samīpe, tasmā taṃ susumāragiri etassa atthīti ‘susumāragirī’ti vuccatī’’ti vadanti. Tathā vā hotu aññathā vā, nāmametaṃ tassa nagarassāti āha ‘‘susumāragiranti nagarassa nāma’’nti. Bhesakaḷāti ghampaṇḍanāmako gacchaviseso. Keci ‘‘setarukkho’’tipi vadanti. Tesaṃ bahulatāya pana taṃ vanaṃ bhesakaḷāvanantveva paññāyittha. ‘‘Bhesagaḷāvane’’tipi pāṭho. ‘‘Bheso nāma eko yakkho ayuttakārī, tassa tato gaḷitaṭṭhānatāya taṃ vanaṃ bhesagaḷāvanaṃ nāma jāta’’nti hi keci.
352 “作火”即是生火。此处其余,其义自明。然于此中,有四支:无病;无允许之作;欲取暖;点燃。显示巴利原文
352.Jotikaraṇeti aggikaraṇe. Sesamettha uttānameva. Agilānatā, anuññātakaraṇābhāvo, visibbetukāmatā, samādahananti imāni panettha cattāri aṅgāni.
7. 沐浴学处注释显示巴利原文
7. Nahānasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
357 第357条。第七学处之巴利文中,“asambhinnena”意谓未被涂抹的,即未被染污的。“Orenaddhamāsaṃ nahāyeyya”意谓从沐浴之日算起,于半月未满时沐浴。此处其余,其义自明。然而,此处有三支:中部地区;于不足半月时沐浴;无适时、渡河或灾祸等因缘。显示巴利原文
357. Sattamasikkhāpadassa pāḷiyaṃ asambhinnenāti amakkhitena, anaṭṭhenāti attho. Orenaddhamāsaṃ nahāyeyyāti nahātadivasato paṭṭhāya addhamāse aparipuṇṇe nahāyeyya. Sesamettha uttānameva. Majjhimadeso, ūnakaddhamāse nahānaṃ, samayānaṃ vā nadīpāragamanassa vā āpadānaṃ vā abhāvoti imāni panettha tīṇi aṅgāni.
8. 作恶色学处注释显示巴利原文
8. Dubbaṇṇakaraṇasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
368 第368条。第八学处中,“所谓皮革匠之蓝,即是天然蓝色”,此说见于三处结戒处。然而,在结戒处中说:“皮革匠将铅与铁锈投入水中,令皮革变成黑色,此即皮革匠之蓝。”此处其余,其义自明。然而,此处有三支:如所述之衣未经坏色处理;非废衣等;或下裳,或上衣。显示巴利原文
368. Aṭṭhame ‘‘cammakāranīlaṃ nāma pakatinīla’’nti tīsupi gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ. Gaṇṭhipade pana ‘‘cammakārā udake tipumalaṃ ayagūthañca pakkhipitvā cammaṃ kāḷaṃ karonti, taṃ cammakāranīla’’nti vuttaṃ. Sesamettha uttānameva. Vuttappakārassa cīvarassa akatakappatā, anaṭṭhacīvarāditā, nivāsanaṃ vā pārupanaṃ vāti imāni panettha tīṇi aṅgāni.
9. 分配学处的解释显示巴利原文
9. Vikappanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
374 第374条。第九学处中,“未舍”即未作如此之舍:“此为我所有物,你可受用,或可舍弃。”与彼共作羯磨者,即与彼共同行律之羯磨者。于三十事注释中,即于舍堕之注释中。由受用而成身业,由令未舍而成为语业。此处其余,其义自明。然而,此处有三支:自己已作净施之衣而未舍;衣属于应作净施者;受用。显示巴利原文
374. Navame apaccuddhāraṇanti ‘‘mayhaṃ santakaṃ paribhuñja vā vissajjehi vā’’tiādinā akatapaccuddhāraṃ. Yena vinayakammaṃ katanti yena saddhiṃ vinayakammaṃ kataṃ. Tiṃsakavaṇṇanāyanti nissaggiyavaṇṇanāyaṃ. Paribhogena kāyakammaṃ, apaccuddhārāpanena vacīkammaṃ. Sesamettha uttānameva. Sāmaṃ vikappitassa apaccuddhāro, vikappanupagacīvaratā, paribhogoti imāni panettha tīṇi aṅgāni.
10. 衣藏置学处的解释显示巴利原文
10. Cīvaraapanidhānasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
377 第三百七十七,第十条,其义自明。然而,此处有二支:一是藏匿已受具足戒者所有的钵等物品;二是欲令其遭受恼害,或出于嬉笑之意。显示巴利原文
377. Dasamaṃ uttānatthameva. Upasampannassa santakānaṃ pattādīnaṃ apanidhānaṃ, vihesetukāmatā vā hasādhippāyatā vāti imāni panettha dve aṅgāni.
第七 有虫品显示巴利原文
7. Sappāṇakavaggo
1. 故意学处的解释显示巴利原文
1. Sañciccasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
382 第三百八十二,有虫品第一学处中,“usuṃ saraṃ assati khipatīti issāso”意为射箭者,即善巧弓术之人,故说“弓术师”。“paṭisattuvidhamanatthaṃ dhanuṃ gaṇhantīti dhanuggahā”意为为摧破怨敌而持弓者,名为持弓者,他们之师即是弓术师。应以不放逸履行义务:即于住处善持正念而行,令他们有情不致死亡。此处余义,其意自明。诸支亦应如于人身中所说之理而了知。显示巴利原文
382. Sappāṇakavaggassa paṭhamasikkhāpade usuṃ saraṃ assati khipatīti issāso, dhanusippakusaloti āha ‘‘dhanuggahācariyo’’ti. Paṭisattuvidhamanatthaṃ dhanuṃ gaṇhantīti dhanuggahā, tesaṃ ācariyo dhanuggahācariyo. Appamattena vattaṃ kātabbanti yathā te pāṇā na maranti, evaṃ sūpaṭṭhitassatinā senāsane vattaṃ kātabbaṃ. Sesamettha uttānameva. Aṅgānipi manussaviggahe vuttanayena veditabbānīti.
二、有生命学处之解释显示巴利原文
2. Sappāṇakasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
387 第387条,第二项中,“udakasaṇṭhānakappadese”是指水被倾注后能停留、不会迅速干涸的地方。此处其余内容,其义自明。其诸支分,即如“浇洒学处”中所说。显示巴利原文
387. Dutiye udakasaṇṭhānakappadeseti yattha bhūmibhāge udakaṃ nikkhittaṃ santiṭṭhati, na sahasā parikkhayaṃ gacchati, tādise padese. Sesamettha uttānameva. Aṅgāni siñcanasikkhāpade vuttanayāneva.
三、翻案学处之解释显示巴利原文
3. Ukkoṭanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
392 第三项中,“yathāpatiṭṭhitabhāvena patiṭṭhātuṃ na dentīti”是为了说明他们现行的情况而说。然而,凡是依法已决断的诤事,便是善决断。若在羯磨尚未完成时提出抗议,则应令他理解后再进行。否则,羯磨便会失效,且行事者也得罪。此处其余,其义自明。然而,此处有三支:已依法决断之状态;了知;翻案。显示巴利原文
392. Tatiye yathāpatiṭṭhitabhāvena patiṭṭhātuṃ na dentīti tesaṃ pavattiākāradassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Yaṃ pana dhammena adhikaraṇaṃ nihataṃ, taṃ sunihatameva. Sace vippakate kamme paṭikkosati, taṃ saññāpetvāva kātabbaṃ. Itarathā kammañca kuppati, kārakānañca āpatti. Sesamettha uttānameva. Yathādhammaṃ nihatabhāvo, jānanā, ukkoṭanāti imāni panettha tīṇi aṅgāni.
四、粗恶学处之解释显示巴利原文
4. Duṭṭhullasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
399 第四项中,“tasseva”即指那位犯戒者本身。“ārocetīti”是指为了隐瞒而说“不要告诉任何人”。“vatthupuggalo”指犯戒之人。“yenassa ārocitaṃ”是指由第二人告诉了第三人。“koṭi chinnā hotīti”是说:因为以隐瞒为缘,犯戒之后,第二人将此告诉了第三人,因此以这个缘,不再有再犯之戒,戒的相续便由此切断。显示巴利原文
399. Catutthe tassevāti yo āpanno, tasseva. Ārocetīti paṭicchādanatthameva mā kassaci ārocesīti vadati. Vatthupuggaloti āpannapuggalo. Yenassa ārocitanti yena dutiyena assa tatiyassa ārocitaṃ. Koṭi chinnā hotīti yasmā paṭicchādanapaccayā āpattiṃ āpajjitvāva dutiyena tatiyassa ārocitaṃ, tasmā tappaccayā puna tena āpajjitabbāpattiyā abhāvato āpattiyā koṭi chinnā nāma hoti.
400 关于“未受具足戒者的出精与身触,此名为粗恶行”的说法,这与说粗恶戒的注释书并不相符。因为其中曾说:“未受具足戒者的粗恶行或非粗恶行当中,最初五条学处称为粗恶行,其余为非粗恶行;而出精、身触与说粗恶,则称为他们之行。”而在“告知时,未受具足戒者的粗恶行有一种含义,在遮蔽时则有另一种含义”中,也未见有特别区分的理由,因此注释书前后并不一致。然而,若欲求其无矛盾,则应在此探究其中的道理。其余部分此处易解。对已受具足戒者粗恶戒的知晓,以及以遮蔽之心放下“我将不告知”的责任,此为此处的二支。显示巴利原文
400.‘‘Anupasampannassa sukkavissaṭṭhi ca kāyasaṃsaggo cāti ayaṃ duṭṭhullaajjhācāro nāmā’’ti idaṃ duṭṭhullārocanasikkhāpadaṭṭhakathāya na sameti. Vuttañhi tattha (pāci. aṭṭha. 82) ‘‘anupasampannassa duṭṭhullaṃ vā aduṭṭhullaṃ vā ajjhācāranti ettha ādito pañca sikkhāpadāni duṭṭhullo nāma ajjhācāro, sesāni aduṭṭhullo, sukkavissaṭṭhikāyasaṃsaggaduṭṭhullaattakāmā panassa ajjhācāro nāmā’’ti. ‘‘Ārocane anupasampannassa duṭṭhullaṃ aññathā adhippetaṃ, paṭicchādane aññathā’’ti etthāpi visesakāraṇaṃ na dissati, tasmā aṭṭhakathāya pubbenāparaṃ na sameti. Avirodhaṃ icchantena pana vīmaṃsitabbamettha kāraṇaṃ. Sesamettha uttānameva. Upasampannassa duṭṭhullāpattijānanaṃ, paṭicchādetukāmatāya nārocessāmīti dhuranikkhepoti imāni panettha dve aṅgāni.
5. 未满二十岁学处解释显示巴利原文
5. Ūnavīsativassasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
402 第五章中,“rūpasuttaṃ”指金匠的线绳。“duruttānaṃ”指因辱骂而说恶语者,因其恶语故为恶至者。“vacanapathānaṃ”:此处言语本身即是道路,为那些欲知其义及欲令知者而设,故称言语道。“dukkhamānaṃ”指应以苦而安忍者。显示巴利原文
402. Pañcame rūpasuttanti heraññikānaṃ suttaṃ. Duruttānanti akkosavasena duruttānaṃ, duruttattāyeva durāgatānaṃ. Vacanapathānanti ettha vacanameva tadatthaṃ ñātukāmānaṃ ñāpetukāmānañca pathoti vacanapatho. Dukkhamānanti dukkhena khamitabbānaṃ.
404 自卧于胎中之时起,此年为第二十雨安居,故称“胎满二十”。“hāyanavaḍḍhanaṃ”应知:若胎月较多则减年,较少则增年。“ekūnavīsativassaṃ”指在母胎中住满十二个月后,从大自恣时出生之日起,为十九雨安居。“pāṭipadadivase”指后安居入雨安居之日。依“三十昼夜为一月”之说,故说“四个月减损”。“vassaṃ ukkaḍḍhanti”意为将雨安居向上拉,即于第三年以闰月而舍弃一月,将雨安居向上拉,故第三年为十三个月;而一年本为十二个月,于十八年中别取闰月,故说“六个月增长”。“tato”指从此六个月后。“nikkaṅkhā hutvā”意为因与闰月合计已满二十雨安居,故无疑惑。然而,于三结节处所说“唯取十八年之闰月而计算故,余二年亦有额外之日,彼额外之日即指‘无疑惑’”,此说不应采纳。何以故?于二年中,实无另外可立之额外日,因唯有在第三年通过拉雨安居而舍弃闰月时,方有超过一月之可能。故于二年中,确实没有另外的额外之日。显示巴利原文
404. Gabbhe sayitakālena saddhiṃ vīsatimaṃ vassaṃ assāti gabbhavīso. Hāyanavaḍḍhananti gabbhamāsesu adhikesu uttarihāyanaṃ, ūnesu vaḍḍhananti veditabbaṃ. Ekūnavīsativassanti dvādasamāse mātukucchismiṃ vasitvā mahāpavāraṇāya jātakālato paṭṭhāya ekūnavīsativassaṃ. Pāṭipadadivaseti pacchimikāya vassūpagamanadivase. ‘‘Tiṃsarattidivo māso’’ti (a. ni. 3.71; 8.43; vibha. 1023) vacanato ‘‘cattāro māsā parihāyantī’’ti vuttaṃ. Vassaṃ ukkaḍḍhantīti vassaṃ uddhaṃ kaḍḍhanti, tatiye saṃvacchare ekamāsaṃ adhikamāsavasena pariccajantā vassaṃ uddhaṃ kaḍḍhantīti attho, tasmā tatiyo saṃvaccharo terasamāsiko hoti, saṃvaccharassa pana dvādasamāsikattā aṭṭhārasasu vassesu adhikamāse visuṃ gahetvā ‘‘cha māsā vaḍḍhantī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tatoti chamāsato. Nikkaṅkhā hutvāti adhikamāsehi saddhiṃ paripuṇṇavīsativassattā nibbematikā hutvā. Yaṃ pana vuttaṃ tīsu gaṇṭhipadesu ‘‘aṭṭhārasannaṃyeva vassānaṃ adhikamāse gahetvā gaṇitattā sesavassadvayassapi adhikāni divasāni honteva, tāni adhikadivasāni sandhāya ‘nikkaṅkhā hutvā’ti vutta’’nti, taṃ na gahetabbaṃ. Na hi dvīsu vassesu adhikadivasāni nāma visuṃ upalabbhanti tatiye vasse vassukkaḍḍhanavasena adhikamāse pariccatteyeva atirekamāsasambhavato. Tasmā dvīsu vassesu atirekadivasāni nāma visuṃ na sambhavanti.
岂非已说“取彼二月,即满二十雨安居”吗?为何又说于十九雨安居时,若另加一年则满二十雨安居?答:“此处……云云”。因诸不变词多义,pana一词在此作hi之义,故此处说hi。此乃为证成前义而说。由此显明:“所谓‘令十九雨安居之沙弥越过出雨安居之满月,于翌日授具足戒’者,是指未计入胎月、以二月未满二十雨安居而说‘十九雨安居’,故若取二闰月,则名为满二十雨安居。”‘tasmā’意为因胎月亦计算在内。‘ekavīsativasso hoti’意为从出生之日起满二十雨安居者,与胎月合计则为二十一雨安居。显示巴利原文
Nanu ca ‘‘te dve māse gahetvā vīsativassāni paripuṇṇāni hontī’’ti kasmā vuttaṃ, ekūnavīsativassamhi puna aparasmiṃ vasse pakkhitte vīsativassāni paripuṇṇāni hontīti āha ‘‘ettha pana…pe… vutta’’nti. Anekatthattā nipātānaṃ pana-saddo hi-saddatthe, ettha hīti vuttaṃ hoti. Idañhi vuttassevatthassa samatthanavasena vuttaṃ. Iminā ca imaṃ dīpeti ‘‘yaṃ vuttaṃ ‘ekūnavīsativassaṃ sāmaṇeraṃ nikkhamanīyapuṇṇamāsiṃ atikkamma pāṭipadadivase upasampādentī’ti, tattha gabbhamāsepi aggahetvā dvīhi māsehi aparipuṇṇavīsativassaṃ sandhāya ‘ekūnavīsativassa’nti vuttaṃ, tasmā adhikamāsesu dvīsu gahitesu vīsativassāni paripuṇṇāni nāma hontī’’ti. Tasmāti yasmā gabbhamāsāpi gaṇanūpagā honti, tasmā. Ekavīsativasso hotīti jātadivasato paṭṭhāya vīsativasso samāno gabbhamāsehi saddhiṃ ekavīsativasso hoti.
406 ‘aññaṃ upasampādetīti’意谓成为戒师或甘马语师而授具足戒。余处易解。未满二十岁、知未满、授具足戒,此即此处三支。显示巴利原文
406.Aññaṃupasampādetīti upajjhāyo kammavācācariyo vā hutvā upasampādeti. Sesamettha uttānameva. Ūnavīsativassatā, ūnakasaññitā, upasampādananti imāni panettha tīṇi aṅgāni.
6. 盗贼队学处解释显示巴利原文
6. Theyyasatthasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
407 第六学处义易解。身为盗贼团、知悉、共谋、无约定而行,此即此处四支。显示巴利原文
407. Chaṭṭhasikkhāpadaṃ uttānatthameva. Theyyasatthakabhāvo, jānanaṃ, saṃvidhānaṃ, avisaṅketena gamananti imāni panettha cattāri aṅgāni.
412 第七项无任何需说明之处。显示巴利原文
412. Sattame natthi kiñci vattabbaṃ.
8. 阿利德塔学处解释显示巴利原文
8. Ariṭṭhasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
417 第八句中“bādhayiṃsu”意为“伤害、毁坏”。由于对种种成就的障碍,在众生相续的内部、中间到来、生起,故为“antarāya”(障碍),即现世等不利。由于不可逾越之义,系属于该障碍,或应得障碍之果,或有制造障碍之习性,故为“antarāyikā”(障碍者)。因此说“antarāyaṃ karontīti antarāyikā”(制造障碍故为障碍者)。“ānantariyadhammā”指具有无间性的思心所法。此处词义为——死心之后即刻得果,故名为“anantara”(无间);系属于该无间,或以产生彼而有无间造作之习性,或以无间为因,故为“ānantarikā”;他们本身被称为“ānantariyā”。业本身即是障碍者,故为“kammantarāyikā”(业障碍者)。只对解脱作障碍,不对天界作障碍,这是因无邪行特征而说。因为比丘尼并无“法护”之状态。这是依普通比丘尼而说。然而,圣者所行唯是导致恶趣之业,难陀童子即是此处例证。或者,由于两者有共同的意乐,故非天界障碍者;但就解脱障碍而言,因破坏为解脱而修的修行故。然而,若被烦恼压倒而转起,则天界障碍性亦不可阻止。显示巴利原文
417. Aṭṭhame bādhayiṃsūti haniṃsu. Taṃtaṃsampattiyā vibandhanavasena sattasantānassa antare vemajjhe eti āgacchatīti antarāyo, diṭṭhadhammikādianattho. Anatikkamanaṭṭhena tasmiṃ antarāye niyuttā, antarāyaṃ vā phalaṃ arahanti, antarāyassa vā karaṇasīlāti antarāyikā. Tenāha ‘‘antarāyaṃ karontīti antarāyikā’’ti. Ānantariyadhammāti ānantarikasabhāvā cetanādhammā. Tatrāyaṃ vacanattho – cutianantaraphalaṃ anantaraṃ nāma, tasmiṃ anantare niyuttā, taṃnibbattanena anantarakaraṇasīlā, anantarappayojanāti vā ānantarikā, te eva ānantariyāti vuttā. Kammāni eva antarāyikāti kammantarāyikā. Mokkhasseva antarāyaṃ karoti, na saggassāti micchācāralakkhaṇābhāvato vuttaṃ. Na hi bhikkhuniyā dhammarakkhitabhāvo atthi. Pākatikabhikkhunīvasena cetaṃ vuttaṃ. Ariyāya pana pavattaṃ apāyasaṃvattanikameva, nandamāṇavako cettha nidassanaṃ. Ubhinnaṃ samānacchandatāvasena vā na saggantarāyikatā , mokkhantarāyikatā pana mokkhatthāya paṭipattiyā vidūsanato. Abhibhavitvā pana pavattiyaṃ saggantarāyikatāpi na sakkā nivāretunti.
无因见、无作见、虚无见,当其达到决定性状态时,便成为决定性的邪见法。“paṭisandhidhammā”指结生心的生起。此处举出黄门等,仅是例示,因为一切无因结生都具有果报障碍性。那些用以诽谤圣者的思心所,即成为“诽谤圣者”。“此后”指从请求原谅之后。此处所应说明的义理,已于天眼通论中阐明。故意犯的罪,即故意违犯的七罪聚。即使是故意违犯的恶作、恶说,也会对天界、道、果造成障碍。只要仍自称为比丘,若犯波罗夷,便不能出罪;若犯其他重罪,则不出罪;若犯轻罪,则不发露。显示巴利原文
Ahetukadiṭṭhiakiriyadiṭṭhinatthikadiṭṭhiyova niyatabhāvaṃ pattā niyatamicchādiṭṭhidhammā. Paṭisandhidhammāti paṭisandhicittuppādamāha. Paṇḍakādiggahaṇañcettha nidassanamattaṃ sabbāyapi ahetukapaṭisandhiyā vipākantarāyikabhāvato. Yāhi ariye upavadati, tā cetanā ariyūpavādā jātā. Tato paranti khamāpanato upari. Yaṃ panettha vattabbaṃ, taṃ dibbacakkhukathāyaṃ vuttameva. Sañcicca āpannā āpattiyoti sañcicca vītikkantā satta āpattikkhandhā. Sañcicca vītikkantañhi antamaso dukkaṭadubbhāsitampi saggamaggaphalānaṃ antarāyaṃ karoti. Yāva bhikkhubhāvaṃ paṭijānāti pārājikaṃ āpanno, na vuṭṭhāti sesagarukāpattiṃ āpanno, na deseti lahukāpattiṃ āpanno.
“此比丘”指阿利吒比丘。“以味混同味”意指以无过失的资具受用之味,混同有过失的欲乐受用之味。通过如理作意观察,对此无有欲贪,故称“无欲贪”,即指资具的受用。“如同在靠近”即如同在靠近束缚。另有异读作“如同在摩擦”。“如同在拉近”即如同在拉近相似性,因为将纯有过失者置于无过失的范畴。恶,以低劣义及导致恶趣义,故为恶。如同束缚大海,即如同以造桥的方式束缚大海。与一切知智相违,即对于一切知智所见为“有过失”者,执取为“无过失”,从而与一切知智相违。于教轮,指第一波罗夷学处所摄的教轮,以及“舍非梵行”等教说所摄的教轮。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ bhikkhūti ariṭṭho bhikkhu. Rasena rasaṃ saṃsanditvāti anavajjena paccayaparibhuñjanarasena sāvajjakāmaguṇaparibhogarasaṃ samānetvā. Yoniso paccavekkhaṇena natthi ettha chandarāgoti nicchandarāgo, paccayaparibhogo. Upanento viyāti bandhanaṃ upanento viya. ‘‘Ghaṭento viyā’’tipi pāṭho. Upasaṃharanto viyāti sadisataṃ upasaṃharanto viya ekantasāvajje anavajjabhāvapakkhepanato. Pāpakanti lāmakaṭṭhena duggatisampāpanaṭṭhena ca pāpakaṃ. Mahāsamuddaṃ bandhantena viyāti setukaraṇavasena mahāsāgaraṃ bandhantena viya. Sabbaññutaññāṇena saddhiṃ paṭivirujjhantoti sabbaññutaññāṇena ‘‘sāvajja’’nti diṭṭhaṃ ‘‘anavajja’’nti gahaṇena tena saha paṭivirujjhanto. Āṇācakketi paṭhamapārājikasikkhāpadasaṅkhāte, ‘‘abrahmacariyaṃ pahāyā’’tiādidesanāsaṅkhāte ca āṇācakke.
所谓骨锁,是指胸骨、脊骨或头骨。因其无肉,故称为“骨锁”。因为在无肉的骨链中,或单块骨上,“骨锁”一词已通用。以燃烧之义,即因错误的行道,于现在与未来燃烧。以大热恼之义,因无安住的自性;以短暂现前之义,因仅作须臾之事;以暂时之义,因被他者所征服;以毁坏一切肢节之义,因有破裂等事由;以类似拔除之义,因有强烈打击之义;以于无疮处生疮、向内侵入之义,因有穿刺之义;以现世与后世不利之相,故有恐惧怖畏之义。显示巴利原文
Aṭṭhikaṅkalaṃ nāma uraṭṭhi vā piṭṭhikaṇṭakaṃ vā sīsaṭṭhi vā. Tañhi nimmaṃsattā ‘‘kaṅkala’’nti vuccati. Vigatamaṃsāya hi aṭṭhisaṅkhalikāya ekaṭṭhimhi vā kaṅkala-saddo niruḷho. Anudahanaṭṭhenāti anupāyapaṭipattiyā sampati āyatiñca anudahanaṭṭhena. Mahābhitāpanaṭṭhena anavaṭṭhitasabhāvatāya, ittarapaccupaṭṭhānaṭṭhena muhuttakaraṇīyatāya, tāvakālikaṭṭhena parehi abhibhavanatāya, sabbaṅgapaccaṅgapalibhañjanaṭṭhena bhedanādiadhikaraṇabhāvena, ugghāṭasadisatāya adhikuṭṭanaṭṭhena, avaṇe vaṇaṃ uppādetvā anto anupavisanabhāvatāya vinivijjhanaṭṭhena, diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikaanatthanimittatāya sāsaṅkasappaṭibhayaṭṭhena.
在圣典中,“以强力、以执取”等处,应如此理解其义。“以强力”指以见的强力,即彼见成为强力之义。“以执取”指以见的执取,即以称为见的执取。因为见本身超越法的自性而执取其他,故为执取。“执著”指以渴爱执著为先导的见执著,即执著为“此中此为真实”。“说”即言说。“诸比丘,自从那时”是指当那些比丘。“我如此被世尊所记说,尊者”,这是他虽想隐藏自己的邪见、想说“没有”,却因世尊的威力而承认。据说,在佛陀面前,没有人能说出两种不同的话。“你这愚人,我究竟对谁”是指你这愚人,我究竟对哪位刹帝利、婆罗门、吠舍、首陀罗、在家者、出家者、天或人,如此说过法而让你作此理解。此处其余内容容易了解。法之行事、劝告、不舍弃,是此处的三支。显示巴利原文
Pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘thāmasā parāmāsā’’tiādīsu evamattho veditabbo. Thāmasāti diṭṭhithāmena, tassā diṭṭhiyā thāmagatabhāvenāti attho. Parāmāsāti diṭṭhiparāmāsena, diṭṭhisaṅkhātaparāmāsenāti attho. Diṭṭhiyeva hi dhammasabhāvaṃ atikkamitvā parato āmasanena parāmāso. Abhinivissāti taṇhābhinivesapubbaṅgamena diṭṭhābhinivesena ‘‘idamettha sacca’’nti abhinivisitvā. Voharatīti katheti. Yato ca kho te bhikkhūti yadā te bhikkhū. Evaṃbyākho ahaṃ, bhante, bhagavatāti idaṃ esa attano laddhiṃ nigūhitukāmatāya natthīti vattukāmopi bhagavato ānubhāvena sampaṭicchati. Buddhānaṃ kira sammukhā dve kathā kathetuṃ samattho nāma natthi. Kassa nu kho nāma tvaṃ moghapurisāti tvaṃ moghapurisa kassa khattiyassa vā brāhmaṇassa vā vessassa vā suddassa vā gahaṭṭhassa vā pabbajitassa vā devassa vā manussassa vā mayā evaṃ dhammaṃ desitaṃ ājānāsi. Sesamettha uttānameva. Dhammakammatā, samanubhāsanā, appaṭinissajjananti imāni panettha tīṇi aṅgāni.
九、举罪共住学处注释显示巴利原文
9. Ukkhittasambhogasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
424 第九项中,“以使用计数”,即指依所受施物之使用而计数。关于共住,应依羯磨结束来判定;关于同卧,应依一人躺下时另一人躺下的动作来判定罪的分际。在此分别解说中,由于“同一覆盖处”是不加限定地宣说,因此即便处于不同的近行处,只要在同一覆盖处躺下,便构成犯。正因如此,《论母义注》中说:“‘或共卧’——即使近行处不同,但在同一覆盖处躺下,也构成犯。”纵然是不知制戒的阿罗汉,也可能以唯作无记心生起此罪,故说为“三心”。若有人言:“此处的‘三心’应理解为与异熟无记心共卧,否则,此学处是有心学处,以唯作无记心犯之便不合理。”此说不可取,因为阿罗汉并非不可能违犯有心学处。正因如此,在掘地等有心学处中,同样说为“三心”。其余在此是显而易见的。未行随顺法、明知、作共享等,此中为三要素。显示巴利原文
424. Navame payogagaṇanāyāti dānaggahaṇappayogagaṇanāya. Saṃvāse kammapariyosānavasena, sahaseyyāya ekasmiṃ nipanne itarassa nipajjanapayogavasena āpattiparicchedo veditabbo. Ettha ca padabhājane ‘‘ekacchanne’’ti avisesena vuttattā nānūpacārepi ekacchanne nipajjantassa āpatti. Teneva mātikāṭṭhakathāyaṃ (kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. ukkhittasambhogasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā) vuttaṃ ‘‘saha vā seyyaṃ kappeyyāti nānūpacārepi ekacchanne nipajjeyyā’’ti. Paṇṇattiṃ ajānantena arahatāpi kiriyābyākatacittena āpajjitabbattā ‘‘ticitta’’nti vuttaṃ. Yaṃ pana kenaci vuttaṃ ‘‘ticittanti ettha vipākābyākatacittena saha vā seyyaṃ kappeyyāti evamattho daṭṭhabbo, aññathā sacittakattā sikkhāpadassa kiriyābyākataṃ sandhāya na yujjatī’’ti, taṃ na gahetabbaṃ. Na hi sacittakasikkhāpadavītikkamo arahato na sambhavati. Teneva pathavīkhaṇanādīsu sacittakasikkhāpadesu ticittameva vuttaṃ. Sesamettha uttānameva. Akatānudhammatā, jānanā, sambhogādikaraṇanti imāni panettha tīṇi aṅgāni.
十、刺学处注释显示巴利原文
10. Kaṇṭakasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
428 第十项中,“pire”是不变词。用于呼格时,与“para”一词同义,故说“para amāmakā”,意为“非属我等、外在的”。或者,“pire”是与“parato”同义的不变词,因此“cara pire”即“到别处去,莫留于此”,此处应如是理解。其余则与此前二学处相同。显示巴利原文
428. Dasame pireti nipātapadaṃ. Sambodhane vattamānaṃ para-saddena samānatthaṃ vadantīti āha ‘‘para amāmakā’’ti, amhākaṃ anajjhattikabhūtāti attho. Pireti vā ‘‘parato’’ti iminā samānatthaṃ nipātapadaṃ, tasmā cara pireti parato gaccha, mā idha tiṭṭhāti evampettha attho veditabbo. Sesamettha purimasikkhāpadadvaye vuttanayameva.
八、同法品显示巴利原文
8. Sahadhammikavaggo
一、共法学处注释显示巴利原文
1. Sahadhammikasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
434 同法品第一学处中,“每说一语即一罪”,是指因不恭敬而假借借口如此说者所犯之罪。其余于此中清晰可知。这里有两个要素:对已受具足戒者,以制戒之言说;以及因不欲学而如此说。显示巴利原文
434. Sahadhammikavaggassa paṭhamasikkhāpade vācāya vācāya āpattīti anādariyabhayā lesena evaṃ vadantassa āpatti. Sesamettha uttānameva. Upasampannassa paññattena vacanaṃ, asikkhitukāmatāya evaṃ vacananti imāni panettha dve aṅgāni.
二、讥嫌学处注释显示巴利原文
2. Vilekhanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
438 第二项中,律的学习即是律典,故说“学习律者”等。“善护”,犹如放入箱中的宝珠堆不会毁失、不遭破坏,如此善加保护。“善守护”是其同义词。如同不被烦恼贼所劫夺,因于一切时善安住于念而善加守护。“为恶作所困者”,指被因如法或不如法所生起的恶作所压倒者。忆念为“核心”,乃是痴迷之怖畏。离此核心者为“无畏者”。“以同法”,即是以有理由之言说。“善加抑制而抑制”,即如同令其不再抬头,变得无言以对、羞愧难当,如此善加抑制。显示巴利原文
438. Dutiye vinayassa pariyāpuṇanaṃ vinayapariyattīti āha ‘‘vinayaṃ pariyāpuṇantāna’’ntiādi. Suguttoti yathā karaṇḍake pakkhittamaṇikkhandho viya na nassati vipattiṃ na pāpuṇāti, evaṃ suṭṭhu gopito. Surakkhitoti tasseva pariyāyavacanaṃ. Yathā hi kilesacorehi avilumpanīyo hoti, evaṃ sabbadā sūpaṭṭhitassatitāya suṭṭhu rakkhito. Kukkuccapakatānanti kappiyākappiyaṃ nissāya uppannakukkuccena abhibhūtānaṃ. Sārajjanaṃ sārado, byāmohabhayaṃ. Vigato sārado etassāti visārado. Sahadhammenāti sakāraṇena vacanena. Suniggahitaṃ niggaṇhātīti yathā na puna sīsaṃ ukkhipanti, atha kho appaṭibhānā maṅkubhūtāyeva honti, evaṃ suṭṭhu niggaṇhāti.
“无耻”是通过删除ya音来表示,即说为“无耻性”。“无知”等也是同理。“迟钝、愚痴”,因无知而迟钝,因非其境界而愚痴,意即大痴。显示巴利原文
Alajjitāti ya-kāralopena niddeso, alajjitāyāti vuttaṃ hoti. Aññāṇatātiādīsupi eseva nayo. Mando momūhoti aññāṇabhāvena mando, avisayato momūho, mahāmūḷhoti attho.
“自敌”者,即自己的敌人。“跋耆子”是指宣扬十事的部派。“他引、无知、疑、他决”等论者:此处有些自称证得阿罗汉的人,实未证得,却自以为证得,是增上慢者或诡诈者。他们自称证阿罗汉,见到遗精之后,魔天众便以为“阿罗汉会生起不净”,如同东山部与西山部,他们是“他引”论者。还有一些人认为:因阿罗汉对于男女等名姓会产生无知,故说阿罗汉有无知;因对事情不能决断,故说阿罗汉有疑;又因为需要他人为其决断、宣说、告知那些事,故说阿罗汉有“他决”。这三种执见,就如现今的东山部等,他们是无知、疑、他决论者。对他们的驳斥,应依《论事》中所说的方式来了解。显示巴利原文
Attapaccatthikāti attano paccatthikā. Vajjiputtakā dasavatthudīpakā. Parūpahāraaññāṇakaṅkhāparavitāraṇādivādāti ettha ye arahattaṃ paṭijānantānaṃ appatte pattasaññīnaṃ adhimānikānaṃ kuhakānaṃ vā arahattaṃ paṭijānantānaṃ sukkavissaṭṭhiṃ disvā mārakāyikā devatā ‘‘arahato asuciṃ upasaṃharantī’’ti maññanti seyyathāpi pubbaseliyā aparaseliyā ca, te parūpahāravādā. Yesaṃ pana arahato itthipurisādīnaṃ nāmagottādīsu ñāṇappavattiyā abhāvena atthi arahato aññāṇaṃ, tattheva sanniṭṭhānābhāvena atthi arahato kaṅkhā, yasmā cassa tāni vatthūni pare vitārenti pakāsenti ācikkhanti, tasmā atthi arahato paravitāraṇāti imā tisso laddhiyo seyyathāpi etarahi pubbaseliyānaṃ, te aññāṇakaṅkhāparavitāraṇavādā. Niggaho pana nesaṃ kathāvatthuppakaraṇe vuttanayeneva veditabbo.
“四道与四果”是以胜说的方式来说明的,四无碍解、三明、六通也属于所证得的正法。或者,这里的“及”字应视为摄集那些未说的内容。有些长老——也就是说法者——如此说。据说,粪扫衣长老们也这样说。显示巴利原文
Cattāro maggā ca phalāni cāti ukkaṭṭhaniddesavasena vuttaṃ, catasso paṭisambhidā tisso vijjā cha abhiññāti ayampi adhigamasaddhammoyeva. Ca-kāro vā avuttasampiṇḍanattho daṭṭhabbo. Keci therāti dhammakathikā. Āhaṃsūti paṃsukūlikattherā evaṃ āhaṃsu.
此论何时生起?这里有一段渐次的叙述:据说,在此岛发生旃陀罗帝须大怖畏时,帝释天王化作大筏,告知比丘们:“将有大怖畏,天将不调顺降雨,比丘们困于资具,将不能护持教典。应到他岸去,诸位贤者,护命为宜。乘此大筏而去吧,诸尊者,若那里没有足够坐处,可以木块放在胸前而行,所有人都将没有怖畏。”那时,六十位比丘到达海岸后,立下约定:“我们不必去那边,就住在此处守护三藏。”于是返回,前往南摩罗耶国,以块茎、根、叶活命而住。身体能支撑时,便坐下诵习教典;不能支撑时,便拨开沙地,围坐一处,将头凑聚在一起,研习教典。以此方式,经过十二年,他们圆满成就并持守了连同义注的三藏。显示巴利原文
Kadā panāyaṃ kathā udapādīti? Ayañhettha anupubbikathā (a. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.130) – imasmiṃ kira dīpe caṇḍālatissamahābhaye sakko devarājā mahāuḷumpaṃ māpetvā bhikkhūnaṃ ārocāpesi ‘‘mahantaṃ bhayaṃ bhavissati, na sammā devo vassissati, bhikkhū paccayehi kilamantā pariyattiṃ sandhāretuṃ na sakkhissanti, paratīraṃ gantvā ayyehi jīvitaṃ rakkhituṃ vaṭṭati. Imaṃ mahāuḷumpaṃ āruyha gacchatha bhante, yesaṃ ettha nisajjaṭṭhānaṃ nappahoti, te kaṭṭhakhaṇḍepi uraṃ ṭhapetvā gacchantu, sabbesaṃ bhayaṃ na bhavissatī’’ti. Tadā samuddatīraṃ patvā saṭṭhi bhikkhū katikaṃ katvā ‘‘amhākaṃ ettha gamanakiccaṃ natthi, mayaṃ idheva hutvā tepiṭakaṃ rakkhissāmā’’ti tato nivattitvā dakkhiṇamalayajanapadaṃ gantvā kandamūlapaṇṇehi jīvikaṃ kappentā vasiṃsu, kāye vahante nisīditvā sajjhāyaṃ karonti, avahante vālikaṃ ussāretvā parivāretvā sīsāni ekaṭṭhāne katvā pariyattiṃ sammasanti. Iminā niyāmena dvādasa saṃvaccharāni sāṭṭhakathaṃ tepiṭakaṃ paripuṇṇaṃ katvā dhārayiṃsu.
怖畏平息后,七百位比丘于各处对附有注释的三藏不令一字、一音节毁损,来到此岛,进入了迦罗村地区的曼达拉园寺。听闻长老们到来的消息,留在此岛的六十位比丘心想‘我们要去见长老们’,便前去与长老们一同校勘三藏,发现并无一字、一音节的出入。就在那时,长老们展开了这样的讨论:‘教法的根本究竟是教理,还是行道?’粪扫衣长老们说:‘行道是根本’,说法者们说:‘教理是根本’。于是长老们对他们说:‘仅凭你们二位的言说,无法定论,请举出佛陀所说的经文。’举出经文并非难事——显示巴利原文
Bhaye vūpasante sattasatā bhikkhū attano gataṭṭhāne sāṭṭhakathe tepiṭake ekakkharampi ekabyañjanampi avināsetvā imameva dīpamāgamma kallagāmajanapade maṇḍalārāmavihāraṃ pavisiṃsu. Therānaṃ āgatapavattiṃ sutvā imasmiṃ dīpe ohīnā saṭṭhi bhikkhū ‘‘there passissāmā’’ti gantvā therehi saddhiṃ tepiṭakaṃ sodhentā ekakkharampi ekabyañjanampi asamentaṃ nāma na passiṃsu. Tasmiṃ ṭhāne therānaṃ ayaṃ kathā udapādi ‘‘pariyatti nu kho sāsanassa mūlaṃ, udāhu paṭipattī’’ti. Paṃsukūlikattherā ‘‘paṭipatti mūla’’nti āhaṃsu, dhammakathikā ‘‘pariyattī’’ti . Atha ne therā ‘‘tumhākaṃ dvinnampi janānaṃ vacanamatteneva na sakkā viññātuṃ, jinabhāsitaṃ suttaṃ āharathā’’ti āhaṃsu. Suttaṃ āharituṃ na bhāroti –
‘苏跋陀,若这些比丘能正确安住,世间便不会没有阿罗汉。’(《长部》2.214)‘大王,师之教法以行道为根本,以行道为核心,行道存续则教法存续。’(《弥兰陀问经》4.1.7)显示巴利原文
‘‘Ime ca, subhadda, bhikkhū sammā vihareyyuṃ, asuñño loko arahantehi assā’’ti (dī. ni. 2.214). ‘‘Paṭipattimūlakaṃ, mahārāja, satthusāsanaṃ , paṭipattisārakaṃ, mahārāja, satthusāsanaṃ, paṭipatti tiṭṭhantī tiṭṭhatī’’ti (mi. pa. 4.1.7) –
他们举出了经文。显示巴利原文
Suttaṃ āhariṃsu.
说法者们听闻此经后,为了确立自己的主张而引用了此经——显示巴利原文
Imaṃ suttaṃ sutvā dhammakathikā attano vādaṭṭhapanatthāya imaṃ suttaṃ āhariṃsu –
“只要经典尚存,只要戒律流布;
那时,他们便得见光明,犹如旭日东升。”
经典不存,律藏被遗忘之时;
世间便将陷入黑暗,犹如太阳隐没一般。
经典得到善加守护时,行道即得守护;
安住于行道的智者,于瑜伽安稳中不退堕。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Yāva tiṭṭhanti suttantā, vinayo yāva dippati; Tāva dakkhanti ālokaṃ, sūriye abbhuṭṭhite yathā. ‘‘Suttantesu asantesu, pamuṭṭhe vinayamhi ca; Tamo bhavissati loke, sūriye atthaṅgate yathā. ‘‘Suttante rakkhite sante, paṭipatti hoti rakkhitā; Paṭipattiyaṃ ṭhito dhīro, yogakkhemā na dhaṃsatī’’ti.
当此经被举出时,粪扫衣长老们便默然了,说法长老们的话语占了上风。正如百牛千牛之中,若没有维系血脉的母牛,那牛群与血脉便不能延续;同样地,纵使有百位千位着手修观的比丘,若无教理,圣道证悟便不名为存在。又如为了知藏宝之罐而在石板上镌文,只要文字存续,宝罐便不名为丢失;同样地,当教理被持守时,教法亦不名为隐没。‘Tassādheyyo’意为‘归属于它’。显示巴利原文
Imasmiṃ sutte āhaṭe paṃsukūlikattherā tuṇhī ahesuṃ. Dhammakathikattherānaṃyeva vacanaṃ purato ahosi. Yathā hi gavasatassa gavasahassassa vā antare paveṇipālikāya dhenuyā asati so vaṃso sā paveṇī na ghaṭīyati, evameva āraddhavipassakānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ satepi sahassepi vijjamāne pariyattiyā asati ariyamaggapaṭivedho nāma na hoti. Yathā ca nidhikumbhiyā jānanatthāya pāsāṇapiṭṭhe akkharesu upanibaddhesu yāva akkharāni dharanti, tāva nidhikumbhī naṭṭhā nāma na hoti, evameva pariyattiyā dharamānāya sāsanaṃ antarahitaṃ nāma na hotīti. Tassādheyyoti tassāyatto.
439 439.‘Sopanā’即巴帝摩卡。此处其余内容显而易见。‘欲加谴责’与‘于已受具足戒者面前毁谤学处’,此为这里的二项条件。显示巴利原文
439.Sopanāti so pātimokkho. Sesamettha uttānameva. Garahitukāmatā, upasampannassa santike sikkhāpadavivaṇṇanañcāti imāni panettha dve aṅgāni.
三、迷惑学处注释显示巴利原文
3. Mohanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
443 第三学处显而易见。‘令迷惑’、‘欲迷惑’、依前文所说之‘听闻状态’、‘迷惑’,这是此处的四项条件。显示巴利原文
443. Tatiyaṃ uttānameva. Mohāropanaṃ, mohetukāmatā, vuttanayena sutabhāvo, mohananti imāni panettha cattāri aṅgāni.
四、殴打学处注释显示巴利原文
4. Pahārasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
452 第四学处中,‘染污心’指因身体接触的贪欲而染污的心。然而,若以淫欲之贪而施以打击,则犯恶作。此处其余内容容易理解。‘愤怒’、‘不以解脱为目的’、‘对已受具足戒者施以打击’,这是此处的三个条件。显示巴利原文
452. Catutthe rattacittoti kāyasaṃsaggarāgena rattacitto. Sace pana methunarāgena ratto pahāraṃ deti, dukkaṭameva. Sesamettha uttānameva. Kupitatā, na mokkhādhippāyatā, upasampannassa pahāradānanti imāni panettha tīṇi aṅgāni.
五、举掌威吓学处注释显示巴利原文
5. Talasattikasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
457 第五学处中,‘因并非以想打击之心而施打,故犯恶作’:此处,若以想打击之心而打,依前学处犯波逸提;若以想威胁之心而仅作威胁状,依此学处犯波逸提。然而,若偏离(想打击之心)而施以打击,则犯恶作。那么,此恶作是因施打而生,还是因威胁而生?对此,有些人说:‘恶作唯因施打而生,波逸提唯因威胁而生,如此,恶作与波逸提兼而有之是合理的。因为威胁在先,施打在后,后来的施打不能使先前的威胁成为无犯。’显示巴利原文
457. Pañcame na paharitukāmatāya dinnattā dukkaṭanti ettha paharitukāmatāya pahaṭe purimasikkhāpadena pācittiyaṃ, uccāretukāmatāya kevalaṃ uggiraṇamatte kate iminā pācittiyaṃ. Iminā pana virajjhitvā pahāro dinno, tasmā dukkaṭaṃ. Kimidaṃ dukkaṭaṃ pahārapaccayā, udāhu uggiraṇapaccayāti? Tattha keci tāva vadanti ‘‘pahārapaccayā eva dukkaṭaṃ, uggiraṇapaccayā pācittiyanti sadukkaṭaṃ pācittiyaṃ yujjati. Purimañhi uggiraṇaṃ, pacchā pahāro, na ca pacchā pahāraṃ nissāya purimaṃ uggiraṇaṃ anāpattivatthukaṃ bhavitumarahatī’’ti.
然而,我们于此如此思量:‘因为威胁本身按其自性并不构成打击,故不应因此而生波逸提;然而,由于是以不清净心所起的加行,此处不可能无犯,因此说为恶作。而“因非以欲打击之心而给予”这句话,是说明由于打击之缘而不可能依前学处产生波逸提的理由,并非说因打击之缘而生恶作。因为,若非以欲打击之心而给予打击,却依前学处因打击之缘而生波逸提或恶作,这是不合理的。’他们说:‘即使因见畜生等不净行而愤怒,作威胁状者,也唯以解脱为目的。’此处其余内容显而易见。‘愤怒’、‘非以解脱为目的’、‘对已受具足戒者作举手威胁’,此为这里的三个条件。显示巴利原文
Mayaṃ panettha evaṃ takkayāma ‘‘uggiraṇassa attano sabhāveneva asaṇṭhitattā tappaccayā pācittiyena na bhavitabbaṃ, asuddhacittena katapayogattā pana na sakkā ettha anāpattiyā bhavitunti dukkaṭaṃ vuttaṃ. ‘Na paharitukāmatāya dinnattā’ti iminā ca pahārapaccayā purimasikkhāpadena pācittiyāsambhave kāraṇaṃ vuttaṃ, na pana pahārapaccayā dukkaṭasambhave. Na hi apaharitukāmatāya pahāre dinne purimasikkhāpadena pahārapaccayā pācittiyena dukkaṭena vā bhavituṃ yutta’’nti. ‘‘Tiracchānādīnaṃ asucikaraṇādiṃ disvā kujjhitvāpi uggirantassa mokkhādhippāyo evā’’ti vadanti. Sesamettha uttānameva. Kupitatā, na mokkhādhippāyatā, upasampannassa talasattiuggiraṇanti imāni panettha tīṇi aṅgāni.
六、无根诬告学处注释显示巴利原文
6. Amūlakasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
459 第六学处,其义自明。这里的四个条件是:已受具足戒者、对桑喀地谢沙罪的无根性、非为呵责、当即了知。显示巴利原文
459. Chaṭṭhaṃ uttānatthameva. Upasampannatā, saṅghādisesassa amūlakatā, anuddhaṃsanā, taṅkhaṇavijānanāti imāni panettha cattāri aṅgāni.
7. 故意学处之解释显示巴利原文
7. Sañciccasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
464 第七学处,其义亦自明。这里的三个条件是:已受具足戒者、欲令不安乐、令生追悔。显示巴利原文
464. Sattamampi uttānatthameva. Upasampannatā, aphāsukāmatā, kukkuccuppādananti imāni panettha tīṇi aṅgāni.
8. 窃听学处之解释显示巴利原文
8. Upassutisikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
471 第八条中,“听近”意为“声近”。因为“suti”是指被听闻,即声音的别名。其近处为“upassuti”,即说为声近。在《结文》中,也说“suti”是被听闻,就是指声音。然而,站在某处能听到声音,站在该处即名为站在声近之处,因此说“站在……”等。但有些人说:“‘suti’是在此处听闻,这是对所站之处能听闻的那个处所的称呼。其近处为‘upassuti’。”若依此理解,则变成站在能听闻的处所附近的另一地方。而且,注释书中为了显示“upassuti”一词的含义,说“站在某处能听到他们的谈话”,并非在解释“suti”一词。因此,前一种解释更为可取。或者,“upassuti”是指靠近后于此被听闻,即处所。应如此理解其义:靠近某个处所后,能听到交谈者的声音,即在该处。关于“mantente”,因为是以处格意义而用了业格,所以说“正在交谈的”。显示巴利原文
471. Aṭṭhame sutisamīpanti saddasamīpaṃ. Suyyatīti hi suti, saddassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Tassa samīpaṃ upassuti, saddasamīpanti vuttaṃ hoti. Gaṇṭhipadesu ca suyyatīti sutīti saddova vutto. Yattha pana ṭhitena sakkā hoti saddaṃ sotuṃ, tattha tiṭṭhanto saddasamīpe ṭhito nāma hotīti āha ‘‘yattha ṭhatvā’’tiādi. Keci pana ‘‘suṇāti etthāti suti. Yattha ṭhito suṇāti, tassa ṭhānassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Tassa samīpaṃ upassutī’’ti vadanti, evaṃ pana gayhamāne yasmiṃ ṭhāne ṭhito suṇāti, tassa āsanne aññasmiṃ padese tiṭṭhatīti āpajjati. Aṭṭhakathāyañca upassuti-saddasseva atthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘yattha ṭhatvā sakkā hoti, tesaṃ vacanaṃ sotu’’nti vuttaṃ, na suti-saddassa. Tasmā pubbanayovettha pasatthataro. Atha vā upecca suyyati etthāti upassuti, ṭhānaṃ. Yaṃ ṭhānaṃ upagatena sakkā hoti kathentānaṃ saddaṃ sotuṃ, tatthāti evamattho gahetabbo. Mantentanti bhummatthe upayogavacananti āha ‘‘mantayamāne’’ti.
473 此处,“同一类别”是指依“或是有为,或是无为”的方式而属同一类别。因为这三条学处,有时从有为生起,有时从无为生起,并非在同一刹那从有为和无为两者生起。其余内容在此易懂。然而,这里有三支:受具足戒、举罪意图、听闻。显示巴利原文
473.Ekaparicchedānīti ‘‘siyā kiriyaṃ, siyā akiriya’’nti iminā nayena ekaparicchedāni. Imāni hi tīṇi sikkhāpadāni kadāci kiriyato samuṭṭhahanti, kadāci akiriyato, na ekakkhaṇeyeva kiriyākiriyato samuṭṭhahanti. Sesamettha uttānameva. Upasampannatā, codanādhippāyo, savananti imāni panettha tīṇi aṅgāni.
9. 阻碍羯磨学处之解释显示巴利原文
9. Kammapaṭibāhanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
474 第九条含义浅显。然而,这里有三支:羯磨如法、认为羯磨如法、给予同意后却又讥嫌。显示巴利原文
474. Navamaṃ uttānatthameva. Dhammakammatā, dhammakammanti saññā, chandaṃ datvā khiyyananti imāni panettha tīṇi aṅgāni.
十、未给予同意而离去学处之注释显示巴利原文
10. Chandaṃ adatvā gamanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
479 第十条意义浅白易解。然而,于此有六项条件:裁断正在进行中、羯磨如法、视为羯磨如法、立于同一界内、共住、因欲触怒对方而离开伸手可及的范围。显示巴利原文
479. Dasamaṃ uttānatthameva. Vinicchayakathāya pavattamānatā, dhammakammatā, dhammakammasaññitā, samānasīmāyaṃ ṭhitatā, samānasaṃvāsakatā, kopetukāmatāya hatthapāsavijahananti imāni panettha cha aṅgāni.
十一、削弱学处之注释显示巴利原文
11. Dubbalasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
484 第十一条同样意义浅白。然而,于此有四项条件:已受具足戒、如法获得选定、与僧团共同分配所得之衣、事后因欲讥嫌而作讥嫌。显示巴利原文
484. Ekādasamampi uttānatthameva. Upasampannatā, dhammena laddhasammutitā, saṅghena saddhiṃ vikappanupagacīvaradānaṃ, pacchā khīyitukāmatāya khiyyanāti imāni panettha cattāri aṅgāni.
489 第十二条无需多作解释。显示巴利原文
489. Dvādasame natthi kiñci vattabbaṃ.
一、内宫学处之注释显示巴利原文
1. Antepurasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
497-499 《王品》第一学处的注释书,内容皆浅白易解。然于巴利原文中,有些词义并不显豁。“已作或将作”指已作或将作邪淫。“imesaṃ”一词应转变格位,于两处连接而成:“imehi kataṃ, ime karissanti”(由这些已作,这些将作)。“ratanaṃ”指摩尼宝珠等宝物。“ubhato”意为从两方面。若仅说“ubhato sujāto”,可能被理解为从任何两方面皆善生。而“sujāta”一词在“善生、容貌端严”等语境中,是身材成就的同义词。因此,为阐明依种姓而善生,特说明“从母方及从父方”。世间也依亲生子的关系而有父母之名,但此处唯取亲生子的关系。为显明此义,故说“saṃsuddhagahaṇiko”。“gabbhaṃ gaṇhāti dhāretīti gahaṇī”:执持胎儿者,名为“gahaṇī”,指称子宫的母胎部分。“saṃsuddhā gahaṇī assāti saṃsuddhagahaṇiko”:意为她的母胎清净,即说其母胎是清净的。然而在“samavepākiniyā gahaṇiyā”中,指的是执持而不吐弃所食之物的消化作用。显示巴利原文
497-499. Rājavaggassa paṭhamasikkhāpade aṭṭhakathāyaṃ sabbaṃ uttānatthameva. Pāḷiyaṃ pana ayamanuttānapadattho. Kataṃ vā karissanti vāti methunavītikkamanaṃ kataṃ vā karissanti vā. Imesanti padaṃ vibhattivipariṇāmaṃ katvā ubhayattha yojetabbaṃ ‘‘imehi kataṃ ime karissantī’’ti. Ratananti maṇiratanādīsu yaṃkiñci. Ubhatoti dvīhi pakkhehi. ‘‘Ubhato sujāto’’ti ettake vutte yehi kehici dvīhi bhāgehi sujātatā viññāyeyya, sujāta-saddo ca ‘‘sujāto cārudassano’’tiādīsu ārohasampattipariyāyoti jātivaseneva sujātataṃ vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘mātito ca pitito cā’’ti vuttaṃ. Anorasaputtavasenapi loke mātupitusamaññā dissati, idha pana sā orasaputtavaseneva icchitāti dassetuṃ ‘‘saṃsuddhagahaṇiko’’ti vuttaṃ. Gabbhaṃ gaṇhāti dhāretīti gahaṇī, gabbhāsayasaññito mātukucchippadeso. Saṃsuddhā gahaṇī assāti saṃsuddhagahaṇiko, saṃsuddhā tassa mātukucchīti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Samavepākiniyā gahaṇiyā’’ti ettha pana yathābhuttassa āhārassa vipācanavasena gaṇhanato achaḍḍanato kammajatejodhātu ‘‘gahaṇī’’ti vuccati.
“上溯七代祖父辈”:此处,父之父为祖父,祖父之一代,称为祖父辈。“代”指寿命的计量。这只是言说,于义理上,祖父自身即是祖父辈的一代。父与母合称父母,父母之父为祖父,他们的一代即为祖父辈。因此,“上溯七代祖父辈”,即指七代祖父辈,应如此理解。这样,举“祖父”一词,便已包含外祖父。此处“代”一词应视为省略,即一代又一代。如此,各处便已包含代数。因此,自此以上,一切祖先皆以“祖父辈”一词涵盖。如是,上溯七代祖父辈,其母胎皆是清净的。显示巴利原文
Yāvasattamā pitāmahayugāti ettha pitu pitā pitāmaho, pitāmahassa yugaṃ pitāmahayugaṃ. ‘‘Yuga’’nti āyuppamāṇaṃ vuccati. Abhilāpamattameva cetaṃ, atthato pana pitāmahoyeva pitāmahayugaṃ. Pitā ca mātā ca pitaro, pitūnaṃ pitaro pitāmahā, tesaṃ yugo pitāmahayugo, tasmā yāva sattamā pitāmahayugā, pitāmahadvandāti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Evañhi pitāmahaggahaṇeneva mātāmahopi gahito hoti. Yuga-saddo cettha ekasesena daṭṭhabbo yugo ca yugo ca yugoti. Evañhi tattha tattha dvandaṃ gahitameva hoti, tasmā tato uddhaṃ sabbepi pubbapurisā pitāmahayugaggahaṇeneva gahitā. Evaṃ yāva sattamo pitāmahayugo, tāva saṃsuddhagahaṇiko.
“未被轻蔑”指未被如此轻蔑:“赶走他,要此人何用?”即未被摒弃。“未被指责”指未被指责,未曾遭受辱骂或诽谤。为何如此?答言“以种姓之论”。其中,“从双方……乃至……祖父辈”一段,通过称扬母胎清净,显示其无出身过失;“未被轻蔑”一句,显示无行为过失,因为众生因行为过失而遭摒弃;“未被指责”一句,显示无不当交往,因为众生因不当交往而遭受辱骂。此处其余内容易于理解。然而,此中具备这五支:身为刹帝利、已行灌顶、双方尚未离开寝室、未予告知、越过门槛。显示巴利原文
Akkhittoti ‘‘apanetha etaṃ, kiṃ iminā’’ti evaṃ akkhitto anavakkhitto. Anupakuṭṭhoti na upakuṭṭho, na akkosaṃ vā nindaṃ vā pattapubbo. Kena kāraṇenāti āha ‘‘jātivādenā’’ti. Ettha ca ‘‘ubhato…pe… pitāmahayugā’’ti etena tassa yonidosābhāvo dassito saṃsuddhagahaṇikabhāvakittanato, ‘‘akkhitto’’ti iminā kiriyāparādhābhāvo. Kiriyāparādhena hi sattā khepaṃ pāpuṇanti. ‘‘Anupakuṭṭho’’ti iminā ayuttasaṃsaggābhāvo. Ayuttasaṃsaggañhi paṭicca sattā akkosaṃ labhanti. Sesamettha uttānameva. Khattiyatā, abhisittatā, ubhinnampi sayanigharato anikkhantatā, appaṭisaṃviditatā, indakhīlātikkamoti imāni panettha pañca aṅgāni.
2. 宝物学处注释显示巴利原文
2. Ratanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
502 第二则,名为“大藤蔓”:据说她于前往夫家时,父亲为她打造了一件名为“大藤蔓”的饰物。此饰物上,四管钻石于应镶嵌处各得其所地镶嵌;另有珍珠十一管、珊瑚二十二管、宝石三十三管。如此,以这些连同琉璃、红宝石、摩沙罗石等其余七色宝物,乃告完成。那件饰物戴于头上时,垂落至脚背;唯有具备五头大象之力的女子,方能佩戴。正是为此而说了那番话。显示巴利原文
502. Dutiye mahālataṃ nāmāti patikulaṃ gacchantiyā kira tassā pitā mahālatāpiḷandhanaṃ nāma kārāpesi. Tasmiṃ piḷandhane catasso vajiranāḷiyo tattha tattha appetabbaṭṭhāne appanavasena viniyogaṃ agamaṃsu, muttānaṃ ekādasa nāḷiyo, pavāḷassa dvāvīsati nāḷiyo, maṇīnaṃ tettiṃsa nāḷiyo. Iti etehi ca aññehi ca veḷuriyalohitaṅkamasāragallādīhi sattavaṇṇehi ca ratanehi niṭṭhānaṃ agamāsi . Taṃ sīse paṭimukkaṃ yāva pādapiṭṭhiyā bhassati, pañcannaṃ hatthīnaṃ balaṃ dhārayamānāva itthī naṃ dhāretuṃ sakkoti. Taṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ.
506 然而,于住处,应如此理解:簸箕所及之处或杵所及之处,即称为“附近区域”。此处的“住处”,不论在寺院内或其它地方,皆指自己居住之所。“出于欲乐、出于恐惧”意指:对木匠等出于欲乐,对国王宠臣等出于恐惧。“对该比丘起疑”是指:于忘记而离开时,因自己身后无有他人,于是生疑。“适宜的方式”是指:若物品被认定为宝物,则作粪扫衣想而拾取,或对宝物无贪著地离去。因为若那被认定为宝物的物品是可触摸的,他便以“此物无主”的粪扫衣想拾取;若不可触摸,则以此粪扫衣想断除障碍,无所顾念地离去。“教令后”意为:教令他人后,依“圣者为示现而住立,此是圣者之乞求”所说的方式而乞求,应如此领会其义。此处其余内容显而易见。未经允许而作、属他人所有、不作亲厚想及粪扫衣想、自己取或令他人取——这是此处的四个构成要素。显示巴利原文
506. Āvasathassa pana suppapāto vā musalapāto vā upacāro nāmāti yojetabbaṃ. Āvasathoti cettha antoārāme vā hotu aññattha vā, attano vasanaṭṭhānaṃ vuccati. Chandenapi bhayenapīti vaḍḍhakīādīsu chandena, rājavallabhesu bhayena. Tameva bhikkhuṃ āsaṅkantīti vissaritvā gamanakāle attano pacchato aññassābhāvā āsaṅkanti. Patirūpaṃ nāma ratanasammate paṃsukūlaggahaṇaṃ vā ratane nirussukkagamanaṃ vā. Yadi hi taṃ ratanasammataṃ āmāsaṃ ce, ‘‘natthi etassa sāmī’’ti paṃsukūlaṃ gahessati. Anāmāsaṃ ce, ‘‘natthi etassa sāmī’’ti paṃsukūlachinnapalibodho nirapekkho gamissati. Samādapetvāti aññaṃ samādapetvā, ‘‘uddissa ariyā tiṭṭhanti, esā ariyānayācanā’’ti (jā. 1.7.59) vuttanayena yācitvāti attho. Sesamettha uttānameva. Ananuññātakaraṇaṃ, parasantakatā, vissāsaggāhapaṃsukūlasaññānaṃ abhāvo, uggahaṇaṃ vā uggahāpanaṃ vāti imāni panettha cattāri aṅgāni.
3. 非时入村学处注释显示巴利原文
3. Vikālagāmappavisanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
508 第三项“圣道”:此处也包含天道。由于不导向出离,天界之道与解脱之道的言论属于畜生之论,故称“畜生论”。“属于畜生”意为成为障碍、成为系缚。“与国王相关的言论”:以国王为对象,如“大选出王、曼陀多王、法阿育王有如此大威神力”等方式而说。在此,若以“某位国王容貌俊美、值得观赏”等世俗方式谈论,即是畜生论。然而,若以“即使有如此大威神力者也已灭尽”这样的方式而说,则成为与无常相关的业处,这是成立的。关于盗贼,若以“根本盗贼有如此大威神力,云鬘盗贼有如此大威神力”等语,赞叹他们的行为说“啊,真是勇士”,这类世俗言论即是畜生论。关于战争,如在婆罗多战争等中,以“某人被某人如此杀死、如此刺伤”等方式,纯粹出于欲乐而说的言论,即是畜生论。然而,若以“即使那些人也已灭尽”的方式而说,则在一切处都成为业处。显示巴利原文
508. Tatiye ariyamaggassāti ettha saggamaggopi saṅgahetabbo. Aniyyānikattā saggamokkhamaggānaṃ tiracchānabhūtā hi kathā tiracchānakathā. Tiracchānabhūtanti tirokaraṇabhūtaṃ vibandhanabhūtaṃ. Rājapaṭisaṃyuttaṃ kathanti (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.17; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 2.223; saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 3.5.1080; a. ni. aṭṭha. 3.10.69-70) rājānaṃ ārabbha ‘‘mahāsammato mandhātā dhammāsoko evaṃmahānubhāvo’’tiādinā nayena pavattakathaṃ. Ettha ca ‘‘asuko rājā abhirūpo dassanīyo’’tiādinā nayena gehassitakathāva tiracchānakathā hoti. ‘‘Sopi nāma evaṃmahānubhāvo khayaṃ gato’’ti evaṃ pavattā pana aniccatāpaṭisaṃyuttā kammaṭṭhānabhāve tiṭṭhati. Coresupi ‘‘mūladevo evaṃmahānubhāvo, meghamālo evaṃmahānubhāvo’’ti tesaṃ kammaṃ paṭicca ‘‘aho sūrā’’ti gehassitakathāva tiracchānakathā. Yuddhepi bharatayuddhādīsu ‘‘asukena asuko evaṃ mārito evaṃ viddho’’ti kāmassādavaseneva kathā tiracchānakathā. ‘‘Tepi nāma khayaṃ gatā’’ti evaṃ pavattā pana sabbattha kammaṭṭhānameva hoti.
再者,关于食物等,不应出于贪着欲乐而说:“我们曾食、曾享、曾饮、曾受用如此色泽、香、味、触感圆满的食物。”但若赋予其意义而说:“从前我们曾将如此色泽等圆满的食物、饮料、衣物、卧具、花鬘、香等布施给具戒者,曾作塔庙供养。”则是适当的。关于亲戚论等,也不应出于贪着而说:“我们的亲戚勇猛、能干”,或“从前我们曾乘坐如此种种奇妙的车乘游历。”但若赋予其意义,则应说:“即使我们那些亲戚也已灭尽”,或“从前我们曾将这样的鞋履布施给僧团。”关于乡村论,也不应以“某村居民勇猛、能干”等方式,或以村落布局好坏、丰饶饥馑等为话题,出于贪着而说。但若赋予其意义,则可说:“他们有信心、已净信”,或“他们已灭尽、已消逝。”关于城镇论、都城论、国土论,也应同样理解。显示巴利原文
Apica annādīsu ‘‘evaṃ vaṇṇavantaṃ gandhavantaṃ rasavantaṃ phassasampannaṃ khādimha bhuñjimha pivimha paribhuñjimhā’’ti kāmassādavasena kathetuṃ na vaṭṭati, sātthakaṃ pana katvā ‘‘pubbe evaṃ vaṇṇādisampannaṃ annaṃ pānaṃ vatthaṃ sayanaṃ mālāgandhaṃ sīlavantānaṃ adamha, cetiyapūjaṃ akarimhā’’ti kathetuṃ vaṭṭati. Ñātikathādīsupi ‘‘amhākaṃ ñātakā sūrā samatthā’’ti vā ‘‘pubbe mayaṃ evaṃ vicitrehi yānehi vicarimhā’’ti vā assādavasena vattuṃ na vaṭṭati, sātthakaṃ pana katvā ‘‘tepi no ñātakā khayaṃ gatā’’ti vā ‘‘pubbe mayaṃ evarūpā upāhanā saṅghassa adamhā’’ti vā kathetabbaṃ. Gāmakathāpi suniviṭṭhadunniviṭṭhasubhikkhadubbhikkhādivasena vā ‘‘asukagāmavāsino sūrā samatthā’’ti vā evaṃ assādavasena na vaṭṭati, sātthakaṃ pana katvā ‘‘saddhā pasannā’’ti vā ‘‘khayavayaṃ gatā’’ti vā vattuṃ vaṭṭati. Nigamanagarajanapadakathāsupi eseva nayo.
关于女人论,也不应针对容貌、体态等出于贪着而说;而应说:“她有信心、已净信,已灭尽。”关于勇士论,也不应出于贪着而说:“名为欢喜友的战士曾是勇士”;同样应说:“他有信心,已灭尽。”关于街巷论,也不应出于贪着而说:“某条街巷布局好、布局差,居民勇猛、能干”;而应说:“他们有信心、已净信,已灭尽。”显示巴利原文
Itthikathāpi vaṇṇasaṇṭhānādīni paṭicca assādavasena na vaṭṭati, ‘‘saddhā pasannā, khayaṃ gatā’’ti evaṃ vattuṃ vaṭṭati. Sūrakathāpi ‘‘nandimitto nāma yodho sūro ahosī’’ti assādavasena na vaṭṭati, ‘‘saddho ahosi, khayaṃ gato’’ti evameva vaṭṭati. Visikhākathāpi ‘‘asukā visikhā suniviṭṭhā dunniviṭṭhā sūrā samatthā’’ti assādavaseneva na vaṭṭati, ‘‘saddhā pasannā, khayaṃ gatā’’icceva vaṭṭati.
“瓮处论”:即码头论、汲水处论,或担水婢女论。对此,也不应以贪著的方式说:“她们端庄,善于歌舞”;而应依“有信心、已净信”等方式来说。“先亡亲族论”:指有关已故亲族的言论。在此,其判定标准与有关现存亲族的言论相同。显示巴利原文
Kumbhaṭṭhānakathāti kuṭaṭṭhānakathā udakatitthakathā vuccati, kumbhadāsīkathā vā. Sāpi ‘‘pāsādikā naccituṃ gāyituṃ chekā’’ti assādavasena na vaṭṭati, ‘‘saddhā pasannā’’tiādinā nayeneva vaṭṭati. Pubbapetakathāti atītañātikathā. Tattha vattamānañātikathāsadisova vinicchayo.
“种种论”:指除前后所述之外,其余各种性质的无义言论。“世间传说”:即“此世间由谁所造?由某位生主、梵天或自在天所造;乌鸦白色,因骨白;苍鹭红色,因血红”等,此类世间外道的诡辩言论。从生起、安住、坏灭等角度解说世间,故称“世间传说”。“海洋传说”:即“为何海洋称为‘海’?因被海王之子们挖掘而成,故称‘海’;因以手印告知‘我们被挖掘’,故称‘海洋’”等,此类无意义的海洋传说言论。显示巴利原文
Nānattakathāti purimapacchimakathāvimuttā avasesā nānāsabhāvā niratthakakathā. Lokakkhāyikāti ‘‘ayaṃ loko kena nimmito, asukena pajāpatinā brahmunā issarena vā nimmito, kāko seto aṭṭhīnaṃ setattā, bakā rattā lohitassa rattattā’’ti evamādikā lokāyatavitaṇḍasallāpakathā. Uppattiṭhitisaṃhārādivasena lokaṃ akkhāyatīti lokakkhāyikā. Samuddakkhāyikā nāma kasmā samuddo sāgaro, sāgarassa rañño puttehi khatattā sāgaro. Khato amhehīti hatthamuddāya niveditattā samuddoti evamādikā niratthakā samuddakkhāyikakathā.
所谓“有与无”,是指说出种种无义之因后所开展的言论,称为“有无论”。其中,“有”指常见,“无”指断见。“有”指增长,“无”指损减。“有”指欲乐,“无”指自我折磨。如此,连同这六种有无论,共有三十二种畜生论。或者,将那些虽在巴利圣典中未直接出现其形态的森林论、山岳论、河流论、岛屿论等,以“iti”一词摄集,则称为三十六种畜生论。此处的“iti”一词表种类义,“vā”一词表简别义。这是说:“讲述如此种类或其他类似的无意义言论。” 或者,“iti”一词如在“iti vā iti evarūpā naccagītavāditavisūkadassanā paṭivirato”(远离如这些类的舞蹈、歌唱、音乐等表演观赏)等句中那样,表“起始”之义,意思是“讲述以此为端绪的其他类似言论”。显示巴利原文
Iti bhavo iti abhavoti yaṃ vā taṃ vā niratthakakāraṇaṃ vatvā pavattitakathā itibhavābhavakathā. Ettha ca bhavoti sassataṃ, abhavoti ucchedaṃ. Bhavoti vuddhi, abhavoti hāni . Bhavoti kāmasukhaṃ, abhavoti attakilamatho. Iti imāya chabbidhāya itibhavābhavakathāya saddhiṃ bāttiṃsa tiracchānakathā nāma hoti. Atha vā pāḷiyaṃ sarūpato anāgatāpi araññapabbatanadīdīpakathā iti-saddena saṅgahetvā chattiṃsa tiracchānakathāti vuccati. Iti vāti hi ettha iti-saddo pakāratthe, vā-saddo vikappatthe. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – ‘‘evaṃpakāraṃ ito aññaṃ vā tādisaṃ niratthakakathaṃ kathentī’’ti. Ādiatthe vā iti-saddo ‘‘iti vā iti evarūpā naccagītavāditavisūkadassanā paṭivirato’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.10, 194) viya, evamādiṃ aññampi tādisaṃ kathaṃ kathentīti attho.
512 无围墙村落的界内区域,应如不予取学处中所说之法了知——以此指出,此处以第二掷土块之范围为界内。其余在此易解。此处有比丘存在、未告知、无许可理由、于非时进入村落,即此处的三支条件。显示巴利原文
512.Aparikkhittassa gāmassa upacāro adinnādāne vuttanayeneva veditabboti iminā dutiyaleḍḍupāto idha upacāroti dasseti. Sesamettha uttānameva. Santaṃ bhikkhuṃ anāpucchanā, anuññātakāraṇābhāvo, vikāle gāmappavisananti imāni panettha tīṇi aṅgāni.
4. 针筒学处注释显示巴利原文
4. Sūcigharasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
517 于第四学处中,因须先破而后方可说示,故彼有应破之事,即此应破属于彼波逸提,称为“应破”,即波逸提。应视词中“a”音为表“有”义之后缀。“Vāsijaṭeti”意指“于刀柄中”。其余在此易解。针筒之性、骨制等之性、为己而作或令作而获得——此为此处的三支条件。显示巴利原文
517. Catutthe taṃ assa atthīti paṭhamaṃ bhinditvā pacchā desetabbattā taṃ bhedanakaṃ tassa pācittiyassa atthīti bhedanakaṃ, pācittiyaṃ. Assatthiatthe a-kārapaccayo daṭṭhabbo. Vāsijaṭeti vāsidaṇḍake. Sesamettha uttānameva. Sūcigharatā, aṭṭhimayāditā, attano atthāya karaṇaṃ vā kārāpetvā vā paṭilābhoti imāni panettha tīṇi aṅgāni.
5. 床座学处注释显示巴利原文
5. Mañcapīṭhasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
522 于第五学处中,“应截”即如前所说之法,故“应截”即是“应截”,彼有此故,称为“应截”——此义被指出。其余在此易解。床座超量之性、为己而作或令作而获得——此为此处的二支条件。显示巴利原文
522. Pañcame chedanakaṃ vuttanayamevāti chedanameva chedanakaṃ, taṃ tassa atthīti chedanakanti imamatthaṃ atidissati. Sesamettha uttānameva. Pamāṇātikkantamañcapīṭhatā, attano atthāya karaṇaṃ vā kārāpetvā vā paṭilābhoti imāni panettha dve aṅgāni.
6. 兜罗绵学处注释显示巴利原文
6. Tūlonaddhasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
526 第六学处中,“放入绵后”的意思是:在下铺开垫布后,于其上放入绵。“Poṭakitūlaṃ”指如灯心草绵等任何草类之绵。其余在此易解。绵敷床座性、为己作或令作后获得,此是此处犯戒的两项条件。因为若为己而令作,仅于获得时便犯波逸提。正因如此,分别中说:“应在获得后拆毁,再忏悔波逸提。”然而,有人主张:“‘应在获得后拆毁,再忏悔波逸提’——此处虽看似仅于获得时便犯波逸提,但应理解为唯于受用时方犯。‘若获得他人所作者而受用,犯恶作’一语,于此可为佐证。”但这仅是其个人见解。因为“若获得他人所作者而受用,犯恶作”并非针对自己令作而说,且此学处是依作与令作之缘而制定波逸提,并非依受用之缘。在犍度中已说:“诸比丘,不得受用绵敷之床或座,若受用者,犯恶作。”因此,无论是自作还是他作,受用者唯依受用之缘而犯恶作,不犯波逸提。显示巴利原文
526. Chaṭṭhe tūlaṃ pakkhipitvāti heṭṭhā cimilikaṃ pattharitvā tassa upari tūlaṃ pakkhipitvāti attho. Poṭakitūlanti erakatūlādi yaṃkiñci tiṇajātīnaṃ tūlaṃ. Sesamettha uttānameva. Tūlonaddhamañcapīṭhatā, attano atthāya karaṇaṃ vā kārāpetvā vā paṭilābhoti imāni panettha dve aṅgāni. Attanā kārāpitassa hi paṭilābhamatteneva pācittiyaṃ. Teneva padabhājane ‘‘paṭilābhena uddāletvā pācittiyaṃ desetabba’’nti vuttaṃ. Kenaci pana ‘‘paṭilābhena uddāletvā pācittiyaṃ desetabbanti ettha kiñcāpi paṭilābhamatteneva pācittiyaṃ viya dissati, paribhogeyeva āpatti daṭṭhabbā. ‘Aññena kataṃ paṭilabhitvā paribhuñjati, āpatti dukkaṭassā’ti vacanaṃ ettha sādhaka’’nti vuttaṃ, taṃ tassa matimattaṃ. Na hi ‘‘aññena kataṃ paṭilabhitvā paribhuñjati, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti idaṃ attanā kārāpitaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, karaṇakārāpanapaccayā ca iminā sikkhāpadena pācittiyaṃ vuttaṃ, na paribhogapaccayā. ‘‘Na, bhikkhave, tūlonaddhaṃ mañcaṃ vā pīṭhaṃ vā paribhuñjitabbaṃ, yo paribhuñjeyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti hi khandhake vuttattā attanā vā kataṃ hotu aññena vā, paribhuñjantassa paribhogapaccayā dukkaṭameva, na pācittiyaṃ.
7. 坐具学处注释显示巴利原文
7. Nisīdanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
531 第七学处中,应说之义已尽于坐卧具学处中。坐具超过规定尺寸、为己作或令作后获得,此是此处犯戒的两项条件。显示巴利原文
531. Sattame yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ nisīdanasanthatasikkhāpade vuttameva. Nisīdanassa pamāṇātikkantatā, attano atthāya karaṇaṃ vā kārāpetvā vā paṭilābhoti imāni panettha dve aṅgāni.
537-542 第八、第九、第十学处中,无其他应说之义,其犯戒条件亦可依第七学处所说之法了知。显示巴利原文
537-542. Aṭṭhamanavamadasamesu natthi vattabbaṃ, aṅgānipi sattameva vuttanayeneva veditabbāni.